MY18 E 63 Wagon Operators Manual

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Mercedes-Benz E-Wagon AMG E 63 S Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 510

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

E-Class Wagon
Vehicle document wallet
Here you can find comprehen‐
sive information about operating
your vehicle and about services
and warranties in printed form.

Digital – on the Internet
You can find the Operator's Man‐
ual on the Mercedes-Benz home‐
page.

Digital – as an App
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App
is available free-of-charge in
familiar App stores.

Apple® iOS

É2135842508rËÍ
2135842508
Order no. P213 0748 13
Edition B-2018

Part no. 213 584 25 08

AndroidTM

Mercedes-Benz

Digital – in the vehicle
Familiarize yourself with the con‐
tents of the Operator's Manual
directly via the vehicle's multi‐
media system (menu item "Vehi‐
cle"). Start with the quick guide,
discover your vehicle's highlights
or broaden your knowledge with
useful tips.

E-Class Wagon
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz

Symbols
In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol‐
lowing symbols:
& DANGER Danger due to not observing
the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐
ards that may endanger your health or life, or
the health or life of others.
# Please observe the warning notices in
this manual.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe envi‐
ronmental notes

Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐
ronmentally responsible disposal.
# Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure
to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of
risks which may lead to your vehicle being
damaged.
# Observe notes on material damage.
% Useful instructions or further information
that could be helpful to you.
Instruction
X
(Q page) Further information on a topic
Information in the multifunction dis‐
Display
play/multimedia display
+
Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system
*
Corresponding submenus, which are
to be selected in the multimedia sys‐
tem
*
Indicates a cause

Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with‐
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrasse 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany

As at 04.04.17

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you first drive off, read this Operator's
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with
your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer
vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning
notices in this Operator's Manual. Disregarding
them may lead to damage to the vehicle or per‐
sonal injury.
Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard of
the instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may vary according to:
R Model
R Order
R National version
R Availability
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce
changes in the following areas:
R Design
R Equipment
R Technical features

The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐
fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐
trations.
The following are integral parts of the vehicle:
R Digital Operator's Manual
R Printed Operator's Manual
R Maintenance Booklet
R Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of
the documents on to the new owner.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company

2135842508

Contents

At a glance .................................................... 6
Cockpit ........................................................... 6
Overview of warning and indicator lamps ....... 8
Overhead control panel ................................ 12
Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 14
Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 16
Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 18
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 18
General notes .............................................
Protecting the environment ..........................
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts .......................
Operator's Manual ........................................
Service and vehicle operation .......................
Operating safety ...........................................
Declaration of conformity for wireless
vehicle components .....................................
Diagnostics connection ................................
Qualified specialist workshop .......................
Correct use of the vehicle ............................
Problems with your vehicle ...........................
Reporting safety defects ...............................
Limited Warranty ..........................................

19
19
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
25
25
25
26

QR codes for the rescue card ....................... 26
Vehicle data storage ..................................... 26
Copyright ...................................................... 30
Occupant safety .........................................
Restraint system ...........................................
Seat belts .....................................................
Airbags .........................................................
PRE-SAFE® system .......................................
Children in the vehicle ..................................
Notes on pets in the vehicle .........................

31
31
33
38
45
46
55

Opening and closing ..................................
SmartKey ......................................................
Doors ............................................................
Load compartment .......................................
Roller sun blinds ...........................................
Side windows ................................................
Sliding sunroof ..............................................
Anti-theft protection .....................................

57
57
62
65
72
72
76
81

Seats and stowing ..................................... 83
Notes on the correct driver's seat position ... 83

Seats ............................................................ 84
Steering wheel .............................................. 97
Using the memory function ........................ 100
Stowage areas ............................................ 101
Cup holder .................................................. 115
Ashtray and cigarette lighter ....................... 116
Sockets ....................................................... 118
Wireless charging of the mobile phone
and connection with the exterior antenna ... 121
Installing or removing the floor mats .......... 122
Light and visibility ...................................
Exterior lighting ...........................................
Interior lighting ...........................................
Windshield wiper and windshield washer
system ........................................................
Mirrors ........................................................
Operating the sun visors .............................
Infrared reflective windshield ......................

124
124
128
130
133
136
137

Climate control ........................................ 138
Overview of climate control systems .......... 138
Operating the climate control system ......... 139

Contents
Driving and parking .................................
Driving ........................................................
DYNAMIC SELECT switch ...........................
Automatic transmission ..............................
Refueling .....................................................
Parking .......................................................
Driving and driving safety systems .............
Instrument Display and on-board
computer ...................................................
Instrument Display overview .......................
Overview of the buttons on the steering
wheel ..........................................................
Operating the on-board computer ...............
Setting the additional value range ...............
Overview of displays on the multifunc‐
tion display .................................................
Adjusting the instrument lighting ...............
Menus and submenus ................................
Head-up Display .........................................

145
145
152
153
157
159
168

216
216
217
217
219
219
220
220
227

Voice Control System .............................. 229
Notes on operating safety .......................... 229
Operation ................................................... 229

Using the Voice Control System effec‐
tively ........................................................... 231
Essential voice commands .......................... 231
Multimedia system ..................................
Overview and operation ..............................
System settings ..........................................
Navigation ..................................................
Telephone ...................................................
Online and Internet functions .....................
Media ..........................................................
Radio ..........................................................
Sound .........................................................

242
242
250
262
286
303
310
322
330

Maintenance and care .............................
ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........
Engine compartment ..................................
Cleaning and care .......................................

332
332
333
339

Breakdown assistance ............................
Emergency ..................................................
Flat tire .......................................................
Battery (vehicle) .........................................

346
346
346
352

Tow starting or towing away ....................... 357
Electrical fuses ........................................... 362
Wheels and tires ......................................
Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐
acteristics ...................................................
Regular checking of wheels and tires .........
Notes on snow chains .................................
Tire pressure ..............................................
Loading the vehicle .....................................
Tire labeling ................................................
Definition of terms for tires and loading .....
Changing a wheel .......................................

366

Technical data ..........................................
Notes on technical data ..............................
Vehicle electronics .....................................
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and
engine number ...........................................
Operating fluids ..........................................
Vehicle data ................................................

396
396
396

366
366
367
368
373
378
384
386

398
400
406

Contents

Display messages and warning/indi‐
cator lamps .............................................. 408
Display messages ....................................... 408
Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 452
Index .......................................................... 471

At a glance – Cockpit

At a glance – Cockpit
1 Steering wheel gearshift paddle

→

155

G DYNAMIC SELECT switch

→

153

2 Combination switch

→

125

H PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps

→

42,

3 DIRECT SELECT lever

→

153

I Control panel for the multimedia system

→

217

4 Display (multimedia system)

→

242

J Adjusts the steering wheel

→

5 Start/Stop button

→

146

K Control panel for the on-board computer

→

217

6 Control panel for the multimedia system

→

242

L Cruise control lever

→

175

7 Climate control systems

→

138

M Unlocks the hood

→

333

8 Glove box

→

102

N Electric parking brake

→

165

9 Hazard warning lights

→

126

O Light switch

→

124

A Stowage compartment

→

102

P Control panel for:

B Control elements for the multimedia system

→

242

Active Steering Assist

→

183

C Lowers the rear seat head restraints

→

Active Lane Keeping Assist

→

214

D ECO start/stop function

→

151

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

→

194

E Active Parking Assist

→

202

Head-up Display

→

228

F Sets the vehicle level

→

190

At a glance – Overview of warning and indicator lamps

Instrument Display (standard)

At a glance – Overview of warning and indicator lamps
1 Speedometer

→

216

D · Distance warning

→

463

2 ÷ ESP®

→

455

E ? Coolant too hot/cold

→

465

3 #! Turn signal light

→

125

F Coolant temperature display

→

216

4 Ð Steering assistance malfunction

→

464

G J Brakes (yellow)

→

455

5 Multifunction display

→

219

H ! Electric parking brake (yellow)

→

455

6 ! ABS malfunction

→

455

I 6 Restraint system

→

7 ; Check Engine

→

465

J ü Seat belt is not fastened

→

462

8 Tachometer

→

216

K T Parking lights

→

124

→

465

M K High beam

→

125

N L Low beam

→

124

O R Rear fog light

→

125

P AIR BODY CONTROL malfunctioning

→

463

Q h Tire pressure monitoring system

→

469

R å

→

455

L Fuel level indicator

9 % This indicator lamp has no function
A Electric parking brake applied (red)

→

455

F USA only
! Canada only
B Brakes (red)

→

455

$ USA only
J Canada only
C # Electrical defect

→

465

8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler flap location
indicator

ESP®

OFF

At a glance – Overview of warning and indicator lamps

Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit

At a glance – Overview of warning and indicator lamps
1 Speedometer

→

216

$ USA only

2 AIR BODY CONTROL malfunctioning

→

463

J Canada only

3 #! Turn signal light

→

125

E ü Seat belt is not fastened

4 Multifunction display

→

219

F Fuel level indicator

5 Tachometer

→

216

→

455

→

455

7 K High beam

→

125

L Low beam

→

124

T Parking lights

→

124

8 ? Coolant too hot/cold

→

465

9 Coolant temperature display

→

216

A · Distance warning

→

463

B Ð Steering assistance malfunction

→

464

C # Electrical defect

→

465

D Brakes (red)

→

455

6 å

ESP®

OFF

→

462

G 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler flap location
indicator

→

465

H R Rear fog light

→

125

I 6 Restraint system

→

K ; Check Engine

→

465

L J Brakes (yellow)

→

455

M Electric parking brake applied (red)

→

455

N h Tire pressure monitoring system

→

469

O ! ABS malfunction

→

455

P ! Electric parking brake (yellow)

→

455

J % This indicator lamp has no function

F USA only
! Canada only

At a glance – Overhead control panel

At a glance – Overhead control panel
1 Sun visors

→

136

2 Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace®)

→

302

3 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off

→

128

4 | Switches the automatic lighting control
on/off

→

128

5 SOS button (mbrace®)

→

301

6 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off

→

128

7 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off

→

128

8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off

→

128

9 MB Info call button (mbrace®)

→

302

A Spectacles compartment

→

103

B 3 Opens/closes the panoramic sliding sun‐
roof

→

134

Opens/closes the roller sunblinds
C Inside rearview mirror

At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment

At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment
1 Adjusts the seats electrically

→

C W Opens/closes the left side window

→

2 Switches the seat heating on/off

→

D Opens the door

→

3 Switches the seat ventilation on/off

→

E Sets the memory function

→

100

4 Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driv‐
er's seat

→

F Sets the seat fore-and-aft position

→

5 & % Locks/unlocks the vehicle

→

G Adjusts the seat cushion length

→

6 Opens/closes the tailgate

→

H Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support

→

7 Adjusts and folds the outside mirrors out/in
electrically

→

133

I Seat adjustment using the multimedia system

→

J Adjusts the head restraints

→

8 W Opens/closes the right side window

→

K Adjusts the seat cushion inclination

→

9 W Opens/closes the rear right side window

→

L Adjusts the seat height

→

A Child safety lock for the rear side windows

→

M Sets the seat backrest inclination

→

B W Opens/closes the rear left side window

→

At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns

At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
What to do in the event of an accident
1 QR code for accessing the rescue card

→

2 Safety vests

→

346

3 Button for the SOS emergency call system and
Roadside Assistance

→

300

4 Checking and topping up operating fluids

→

400

5 Tow-starting and towing away

→

358

6 Flat tire

→

346

7 Starting assistance

→

354

8 Hazard warning lights

→

126

9 Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tire
pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing
the rescue card

→

157

A Tow-starting and towing away

→

358

B Tire-change tool kit

→

389

C TIREFIT kit

→

348

Digital Operator's Manual

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual
Multimedia system:
,
. Õ

Select a menu item.

In addition, you can also call up the Operator's
Manual within a main function (e.g. via
).
The Digital Operator's Manual describes the
function and operation of:
R the vehicle
R the multimedia system

For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man‐
ual is deactivated while driving.
The Digital Operator's Manual contains the fol‐
lowing menu items:
R
: allows you to search precisely for
keywords.
R
: provides you with important
information so that you can start using your
vehicle immediately.
R
: provides tips on how to use your vehicle
in certain situations.
R
: provides you with further informa‐
tion about the messages in the instrument
cluster.
R
: provides you with a list of all the
bookmarks you have stored yourself.

1 Picture
2 Menu
3 Navigation window

Some sections of the Digital Operator's Manual,
e.g. warnings, can be made visible by highlight‐
ing and pressing them.
% The Operator's Manual can also be found in
the Mercedes-Benz Guides app in all com‐
mon app stores.

General notes
Protecting the environment

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and
personal driving style

The pollutant emission of your vehicle is
directly related to the way you operate your
vehicle.
You can help to protect the environment by
operating your vehicle in an environmentally
responsible manner. Please observe the fol‐
lowing recommendations on operating condi‐
tions and personal driving style.
Operating conditions:
# Make sure that the tire pressure is cor‐
rect.
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no
longer need them).
# Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐
ute to environmental protection.

Always have service work carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:
# Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
# Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary.
# Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front.
# Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking.
# Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum
engine speed.
# Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐
fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop
function.
# Drive in a fuel-efficient manner.
Environmental issues and recommendations:
it is recommended that you re-use or recycle
materials first instead of just disposing of them.

The relevant environmental guidelines and regu‐
lations serve to protect the environment and
must be strictly observed.
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by not using recycled
reconditioned components

Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned
components and parts with the same quality
as new parts. The same entitlement from the
Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts.
# Use recycled reconditioned compo‐
nents and parts from Daimler AG.

General notes

* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐
ciency of the restraint systems from
installing accessories or from repairs or
welding
Airbags, Emergency Tensioning Devices, as
well as control units and sensors for the
restraint systems, may be installed in the fol‐
lowing areas of your vehicle:
R Doors
R Door pillars
R Door sills
R Seats
R Cockpit
R Instrument cluster
R Center console
#
#
#

Do not install accessories such as audio
systems in these areas.
Do not carry out repairs or welding.
Have accessories retrofitted at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your
vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well
as accessories relevant to safety which have not
been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐
vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐
function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels
and accessory parts that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to
strict quality control. Each part has been spe‐
cially developed, manufactured or selected for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and fine-tuned for them.
Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz
GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz
models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain
a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts-delivery centers pro‐
vide for quick and reliable parts service.

Always specify the vehicle identification number
(VIN) (→ page 398) when ordering MercedesBenz GenuineParts.
Operator's Manual
This Operator's Manual describes all models and
all standard and optional equipment available for
your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man‐
ual going to press. Country-specific differences
are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and functions.
Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may
differ from that in the descriptions and illustra‐
tions.
The original purchase contract documentation
for your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys‐
tems in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept in
the vehicle.

General notes
Service and vehicle operation
Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
the following points:
R Service points or replacement parts may not
be available immediately.
R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi‐
cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
R The fuel may have an extremely low octane
number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine
damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in
Europe through our European Delivery Program.
For more information, please consult an author‐
ized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to
one of the following address:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Maintenance
Your customer advisor confirms the service in
the service report.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐
gram offers technical help in the case of a
breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
You can find further information in the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"

section in the maintenance and warranty infor‐
mation booklet (Canada). You will find both in
the vehicle document wallet.
Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of address change" in the
Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) on the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐
tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We
can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces‐
sary.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera‐
ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the
next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi‐
cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of
Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet
or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐
tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

General notes

Important notice for California retail buyers
and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a reasona‐
ble number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
covered by its express warranty.
During a period of 18 months from original deliv‐
ery of the vehicle or a kilometer/mileage read‐
ing of 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first, vehicle repair is presumed for a
retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the fol‐
lowing occurs:
(1) the serious defect or damage can result in
deadly or serious injury to the vehicle occu‐
pants while driving AND this defect has
already been repaired at least twice AND
Mercedes‑Benz, LLC has been informed in
writing of the necessity of a repair.
(2) the defect or damage, though less serious
than (1) above, has already been repaired at

least four times AND Mercedes‑Benz has
been informed in writing of the necessity of
a repair.
(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than
30 calendar days because of repair work
resulting from this or other serious defects
or damage.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes‑Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Operating safety
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐
functions or system failures
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this could result in malfunctions
or system failures.

Always have the prescribed service/
maintenance work as well any required
repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due
to incorrect modification of electronic
components and parts
Modification to electronic components, their
software or wiring could impair their function
and/or the function of other networked com‐
ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant
to safety could also be affected.
As a result, these may no longer function
properly and/or jeopardize the operating
safety of the vehicle.
# Never tamper with the vehicle's wiring,
electronic components or software.
# You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.

General notes
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable
materials on hot parts of the exhaust
system

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system.
# When driving on unpaved roads or offroad, regularly check the vehicle under‐
side.
# Remove trapped plants or other flam‐
mable material.
# If there is damage, consult a qualified
specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle
Damage to the vehicle may occur in the fol‐
lowing cases:
R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpaved road.

the vehicle is driven too fast over an
obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot‐
hole.
a heavy object strikes the underbody or
chassis components.

In situations such as this, the body, the
underbody, chassis components, wheels or
tires could be damaged without the damage
being visible. Components damaged in this
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of
an accident, no longer withstand the strain
they are designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam‐
mable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. These materials may
ignite if they come into contact with hot
parts on the exhaust system.
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
or

If driving safety is impaired while con‐
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop
the vehicle immediately, paying atten‐
tion to road and traffic conditions, and
contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi‐
cle components
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com‐
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: 1) These
devices may not cause harmful interference, and
2) These devices must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or modifications
not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol‐
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices

General notes

must accept any interference, including interfer‐
ence that may cause undesired operation of the
device."
USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi‐
ces (Model: D-WMI2015A): this device complies
with Part 18 of the FCC Rules."
The name and address of the responsible party
is:
Continental Automotive Systems US Inc.
2400 Executive Hills Drive
Auburn Hills, MI 48326-2980
United States of America
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐
necting devices to the diagnostics con‐
nection
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems.
As a result, the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle could be affected.
# Only connect equipment to a diagnos‐
tics connection in the vehicle which is
approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.

Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.

* NOTE Battery discharging from using
devices connected to the diagnostics
connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection
drains the battery.
# Check the charge level of the battery.
# If the charge level is low, charge the
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable
distance.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐
mation being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
the next emissions inspection during the main
inspection.

General notes
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
correctly carry out the work required on your
vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant
to safety.
For the following, always have your vehicle
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter:
R work relevant to safety
R service and maintenance work
R repair work
R modifications as well as installations and
conversions
R work on electronic component parts
Mercedes‑Benz recommends an authorized
Mercedes‑Benz Center.

Correct use of the vehicle
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others
could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave
warning stickers in position.
When using the vehicle, observe the following
information:
R the safety notes in this manual
R technical data for the vehicle
R traffic rules and regulations
R laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz service center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed and
rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your
satisfaction, please discuss the problem again
with the authorized Mercedes-Benz service cen‐

ter or, if necessary, contact us at one of the fol‐
lowing addresses.
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐
eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966".

General notes

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) (inside the USA); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis‐
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash‐
ington, DC 20590, USA.
Further information on vehicle safety can be
found at: http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising
from violation of these operating instruc‐
tions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐
tion of these operating instructions.
This damage is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
# Follow the instructions in these operat‐
ing instructions on proper operation of
your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐
cle damage.
QR codes for the rescue card
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and
on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event
of an accident, rescue services can use the QR
code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card
for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐
tains the most important information about your

vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the
electric lines.
Further information can be obtained at http://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Vehicle data storage
Information from electronic control units
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control
units. Some of these are necessary for the safe
operation of your vehicle, while some assist you
when driving (driver assistance systems). In
addition, your vehicle provides convenience and
entertainment functions, which are also made
possible by electronic control units.
Electronic control units contain data memories
which can temporarily or permanently store
technical information about the vehicle's operat‐
ing status, component loads, maintenance
requirements and technical events or malfunc‐
tions.

General notes
In general, this information documents the state
of a component part, a module, a system or the
surroundings, for example:
R operating statuses of system components
(e.g. fluid levels, battery status, tire pressure)
R status messages concerning the vehicle and
its individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration, lat‐
eral acceleration, display of the fastened seat
belts)
R malfunctions or defects in important system
components (e.g. lights, brakes)
R information on vehicle damage events
R system reactions in special driving situations
(e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of sta‐
bility control systems)
R ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain
sensor)
In addition to providing the actual control unit
function, this data assists the manufacturer in
detecting and rectifying malfunctions and opti‐
mizing vehicle functions. The majority of this
data is temporary and is only processed in the

vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is
stored in the event or malfunction memory.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical data
from the vehicle can be read out by service net‐
work employees or third parties. Services
include repair services, maintenance processes,
warranty events and quality assurance meas‐
ures, for example. The read out is performed via
the legally prescribed port for OBD ("on-board
diagnostics") in the vehicle. The respective
service network locations or third parties col‐
lect, process and use the data. They document
technical statuses of the vehicle, assist in find‐
ing malfunctions and improving quality and are
transmitted to the manufacturer, if necessary.
Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to
product liability. For this, the manufacturer
requires technical data from vehicles.
Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be
reset by a service outlet as part of repair or
maintenance work.
They can enter data into the vehicle's conveni‐
ence and infotainment functions themselves as
part of the selected equipment.

This includes, for example:
multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
system
R address book data for use in connection with
an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐
grated navigation system
R entered navigation destinations
R data about the use of Internet services

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or
is located on a device which you have connected
to the vehicle. If this data is stored in the vehi‐
cle, you can delete it at any time. This data can
only be transmitted to third parties upon your
request with particular regard to the scope of
use of online services according to your selected
settings.
You can store or change convenience settings/
individualization in the vehicle at any time.
Depending on the equipment, this includes, for
example:
R seat and steering wheel position settings
R suspension and climate control settings

28
R

General notes
individualization such as interior lighting

If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can
connect your smartphone or another mobile end
device to the vehicle. You can control them via
the control elements integrated in your vehicle.
Images and audio from the smartphone can be
output via the multimedia system. Certain infor‐
mation is simultaneously transmitted to your
smartphone.
Depending on the respective integration type,
this includes, for example:
R general vehicle information
R position data
This enables the use of selected smartphone
Apps, e.g. navigation or music playback. There is
no further interaction between the smartphone
and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not
directly accessible. The type of further data pro‐
cessing is determined by the provider of the App
used. The respective App and your smartphone's
operating system determine whether changes
can be made to the settings and which settings
can be changed.

Service providers
Wireless network connection
If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, it enables data to be exchanged between
your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐
less network connection is enabled via the vehi‐
cle's transmission and reception unit or via con‐
nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones).
Online functions can be used via the wireless
network connection. This includes online serv‐
ices and applications/Apps provided by the
manufacturer or other providers.
Manufacturer's services
The manufacturer describes the respective func‐
tions and corresponding legal data protection
information when suitable for the manufacturer's
online services. Personal data may be used for
the provision of online services. Data is
exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. to the
manufacturer's designated IT systems. Personal
data is collected, processed and used via the
provision of services exclusively on the basis of
legal permissions or with prior consent.

The services and functions (sometimes subject
to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated.
In some cases, this also applies to the entire
vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par‐
ticular, legally prescribed functions and services.
Third party services
If it is possible to use online services from other
providers, these services are subject to the data
protection and terms of use of the responsible
provider. The manufacturer has no influence on
the content exchanged.
Please enquire, therefore, about the type, scope
and purpose of the collection and use of per‐
sonal data as part of third party services from
their respective provider.
COMAND/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's oper‐
ation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations,
and the location of the vehicle may be compiled
through COMAND or the mbrace system.

General notes
For additional information please refer to the
chapter Multimedia system and/or the mbrace
Terms and Conditions.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit‐
uations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
R Whether or not the driver and front
passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened
R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which accidents and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by
your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) is
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
special equipment is required. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the
special equipment, such as law enforcement,
can read the information by accessing the vehi‐
cle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat‐
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci‐
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the

extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with‐
out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les‐
see. Exceptions to this representation include
responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by
federal, state or local government; in connection
with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA
or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required
by law.
Warning: the EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys‐
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

General notes

Copyright
Free and open source software
Information on free and open source software
licenses for your vehicle's software can be found
on the data storage medium in your vehicle
document wallet and on the Internet together
with updates:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

R
R
R
R
R

Registered trademarks
R
R
R
R
R
R

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth SIG Inc.
DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
BabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg‐
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.

Burmester® is a registered trademark of
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis‐
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corporation.
Gracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
ZAGATSurvey® and related brands are regis‐
tered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

Occupant safety
Restraint system
Protection by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following:
R Seat belt system
R Air bags
R Child restraint system
R Child seat securing system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi‐
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of
the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In
the event of an accident, the restraint system
can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle
occupants are subjected.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the
detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐
ing Devices and/or air bags supplement the pro‐
tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt.
Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags
are not deployed in every accident.

In order for the restraint system to provide the
intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐
pant must observe the following information:
R Fasten seat belts correctly.
R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐
sible.
R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)
tall in an additional restraint system suitable
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can com‐
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
accident situation. In particular, the seat belt
and air bag generally do not protect against
objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
It is also not possible to completely rule out the
risk of injury caused by the air bag deploying.

Reduced restraint system protection
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from
modifications to the restraint system
The restraint system can no longer function
correctly after alterations have been made.
The restraint system may then not protect
the vehicle occupants as intended by failing
in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for
example
# Never alter the parts of the restraint
system.
# Never tamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their
software.
R

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to
accommodate a person with disabilities, con‐
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details.
USA only: for details, contact our Customer
Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1‑800‑367‑6372).

Occupant safety

Restraint system functionality
When the ignition is switched on, a system selftest is performed, during which the 6
restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes
out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle
is started. The components of the restraint sys‐
tem are then functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐
tem if:
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on.
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a
journey.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury
due to a malfunction in the restraint sys‐
tem
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig‐
gered unintentionally or might not be trig‐
gered at all in the event of an accident. This
may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device
or airbag, for example.
# Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Function of the restraint system in an acci‐
dent
How the restraint system works is determined by
the severity of the impact detected and the type
of accident anticipated:
R Frontal impact
R Rear impact
R Side impact
R Rollover

The activation thresholds for the components of
the restraint system are determined based on
the evaluation of the sensor values measured at
various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of
the components of the restraint system should
take place in good time at the start of the colli‐
sion.
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci‐
sive role in air bag deployment, nor do they pro‐
vide an indication of air bag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration
is not high. Conversely, an air bag may be
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts
such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam‐
ple, the vehicle deceleration may be high enough
for this to happen.

Occupant safety
The components of the restraint system can
be activated or deployed independently of
each other:
Component

Detected deploy‐
ment situation

Emergency Tension‐
ing Devices

Frontal impact, rear
impact, side impact,
rollover

Driver's air bag, front
passenger air bag

Frontal impact

Knee air bag

Frontal impact

Side air bag

Side impact

Window air bag

Side impact, rollover,
frontal impact

PRE-SAFE® Impulse
Side

Side impact

The front-passenger air bag can be deployed in
an accident only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, make sure, both before and during

the journey, that the status of the front
passenger air bag is correct (→ page 42).
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag
components
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed.
# Do not touch the air bag parts.
# Have a deployed air bag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon
as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐
ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐
gered or an air bag is deployed.
If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐
gered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a
bang, and powder may also be released:
R The bang will not generally affect your hear‐
ing.
R In general, the powder released is not haz‐
ardous to health but may cause short-term

breathing difficulties to persons suffering
from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
immediately or open the window in order to
prevent breathing difficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
Devices contain perchlorate material, which may
require special handling or environmental pro‐
tection measures. National guidelines must be
observed during disposal. In California, see
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Seat belts
Protection provided by the seat belt
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
not perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
# Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐
pants have their seat belts fastened
correctly and are sitting properly.
In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐
vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐
cle occupant must observe the following infor‐
mation:
R The seat belt must not be twisted and must
fit tightly and snugly across the body.
R The seat belt must be routed across the cen‐
ter of the shoulder and as low down across
the hips as possible.

R
R

The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck nor be routed under
your arm or behind your back.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
Push the lap belt down as far as possible
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐
der section of the belt. Never route the lap
belt across your abdomen.
Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐
ted, abrasive or fragile objects.
Only one person should use each seat belt at
any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐
dren to travel sitting on the lap of another
vehicle occupant.
Never secure objects with a seat belt if the
seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants. Always observe the
instructions for loading the vehicle when
securing objects, luggage or loads
(→ page 101).
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion,
are ever placed between a person and the
seat.

The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐
ped with a child seat safety feature:
R Front passenger seat
R Rear seats
The seat belts for the folding bench seat in the
cargo compartment are not equipped with a
child seat safety feature.
Activate or deactivate the child seat safety fea‐
ture of the seat belt (→ page 48).
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Children in the vehicle" (→ page 46).
Reduced seat belt protection
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved the
seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and

Occupant safety
sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐
ple.
# Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the center of your shoul‐
der.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when
additional restraint systems are not used
for persons with a smaller build
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear
the seat belt correctly without a suitable
additional restraint system.
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
not perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.

Always secure persons under 5 ft
(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys‐
tem.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt
anchorage
Objects next to the front seat that block the
seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt
anchorage on the front seat impair the func‐
tion of the Emergency Tensioning Devices.
The Emergency Tensioning Devices can,
then, not function as intended and the seat
belt can no longer provide the intended pro‐
tection.
# Before starting the journey, make sure
that there are no objects around the
seat belt buckle or between the front
seat and door.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the
following situations:
R If the seat belts are damaged, modified,
extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
R If the seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R If the Emergency Tensioning Devices,
seat belt anchorages or seat belt retrac‐
tors have been modified
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
due to splinters of glass.
Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or
fail, e.g. in an accident.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices can
accidentally trigger or fail to function as
intended.
# Never modify the seat belts, Emergency
Tensioning Devices, seat belt ancho‐
rages or seat belt retractors.

36
#
#

Occupant safety
Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn and clean.
Always have the seat belts checked
immediately after an accident at a
qualified specialist workshop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from
deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten‐
sioning Devices
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployed are no longer opera‐
tional and are unable to perform their inten‐
ded protective function.
# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi‐
ately replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident.

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it
may become trapped in the door or in the
seat mechanism.
# Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐
not be pulled out any further.
#

Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the
seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐
responding seat.
Press and hold the seat belt outlet release
and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired
position.
Let go of the seat belt outlet release and
ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into
position.

Occupant safety
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: If the front seat belt
is not pulled tight across your body, the seat belt
adjustment may automatically apply a certain
tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly
while it is adjusting. You can activate and deacti‐
vate the seat belt adjustment function using the
multimedia system.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger
front air bag shutoff:
* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency
Tensioning Device and side air bag when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front
passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning
Device and the side air bag may also deploy
in the event of an accident along with other
systems.
# Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Vehicles without automatic front passenger
front air bag shutoff:

* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency
Tensioning Device when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front
passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning
Device may also deploy in the event of an
accident along with other systems.
# Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Releasing seat belts
#

Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.

Activating or deactivating seat belt adjust‐
ment via the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
,
. î
#

Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

Seat belt warning function for the driver and
front passenger
The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru‐
ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐
pants must wear their seat belts correctly.
The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six
seconds after every engine start.
In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound.
When the driver's and front passenger doors are
closed and the driver and front passenger have
fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning
goes out.

Occupant safety

During a journey, the seat belt warning lights up
if:
R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the driver's or front
passenger seat belt is not fastened.
R The driver or front passenger unfastens their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
Airbags
Overview of air bags

1 Knee air bag
2 Driver's air bag

3 Front passenger front air bag
4 Window curtain air bag
5 Side impact air bag

The installation location of an air bag is identi‐
fied by the AIRBAG symbol.
When activated, an air bag can provide addi‐
tional protection for the respective vehicle
occupant.
AIRBAG

Potential protection for
…

Knee air bag

Thigh, knee and lower leg

Driver's air bag,
front passenger
front air bag

Head and ribcage

Window curtain
air bag

Head

Side impact air
bag

Ribcage, also pelvis for
front seat occupants

The front passenger front air bag can only be
deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both
before and during the journey, that the status of
the front passenger air bag is correct
(→ page 42).
* NOTE Important points to remember if
the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily
on the front passenger side if:
R There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the
seat belt buckle of the front passenger
seat and the front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
#
#

Stow objects in a suitable place.
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.

Occupant safety
Protection by the air bags
Depending on the accident situation, an air bag
may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot perform its intended pro‐
tective function and deployment may even
cause further injuries.
To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sure that all vehicle occupants:
R Have their seat belt fastened correctly,
including pregnant women.
R Are seated properly and that distance to
the air bags is as large as possible.
R Observe the following information.
#

Always make sure that there are no
objects between the air bag and the
vehicle occupant.

To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment
of an air bag, each vehicle occupant must
observe the following information:
R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front
passenger seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
When doing so, always observe the informa‐
tion on the correct driver's seat position
(→ page 83).
R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering
wheel rim. This allows the air bag to be fully
deployed.
R Always lean against the seat backrest when
the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards
or against the door or side window. You may
otherwise be in the deployment area of the
air bags.
R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not
put your feet on the cockpit, for example.
Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐
ment area of the air bag.
R If children are traveling in the vehicle,
observe the additional notes (→ page 46).

Always stow and secure objects correctly.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air
bag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle
occupant must always make sure of the follow‐
ing:
R There are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
R There are no objects between the seat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar).
R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
R There are no accessory parts, such as cup
holders, attached to the vehicle within the
deployment area of an air bag, e.g. on doors,
side windows or side trim.
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.

Occupant safety

Reduced air bag protection
& WARNING Risk of injury from modifica‐
tions to the airbag cover
If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects
such as stickers to it, the airbag can no lon‐
ger function correctly.
# Never modify an airbag cover and do
not affix objects to it.
The installation location of an air bag is identi‐
fied by the AIRBAG symbol (→ page 38).
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
the use of unsuitable seat covers
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐
vent the deployment of air bags integrated
into the seats.
Consequently, the air bags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do. In addition, operation of the automatic
front passenger air bag shutoff may be
restricted.

You should only use seat covers that
have been approved for the correspond‐
ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions of the sensors in the door paneling
Sensors to control the airbags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per‐
formed correctly to the doors or door panel‐
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to
the function of the sensors being impaired.
The airbags might therefore not function
properly any more.
Consequently, the airbags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do.
# Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors.
# Always have work on the doors or door
paneling carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
airbag
A deployed airbag no longer has a protective
function and cannot protect as intended in
the event of an accident.
# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
specialist workshop in order to have the
deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed air bags replaced immediately.
Status of the front passenger airbag
Function of the front passenger front air bag
shutoff
The automatic front passenger front air bag
shutoff is able to detect whether the front
passenger seat is occupied by a person or a
child restraint system. The front passenger air
bag is enabled or deactivated accordingly.

Occupant safety
When installing a child restraint system to the
front passenger seat, always make sure of the
following:
R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐
tioned correctly (→ page 46).
R Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
R Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or
behind the child restraint system.
R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐
ment.
R The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
front passenger seat.
R The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the front
passenger seat.
R The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be put under strain by the head
restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐
tion and the head restraint setting accord‐
ingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects between the sitting surface and
the child restraint system
Objects between the sitting surface and the
child restraint system could affect the func‐
tion of the automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff.
This could result in the front passenger air‐
bag not functioning as intended during an
accident.
# Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and the child restraint
system.
# The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the sitting
surface of the front passenger seat.
# The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must lie as flat as pos‐
sible against the backrest of the front
passenger seat.
# Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.

A person on the front passenger seat must
observe the following information:
R Fasten seat belts correctly.
R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐
sible.
Otherwise, the front passenger air bag may be
deactivated by mistake, for example in the fol‐
lowing situations:
R The front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
R The front passenger sits in such a way that
their weight is raised from the sitting sur‐
face.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
deactivated front passenger airbag
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa‐
bled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function.

Occupant safety

A person in the front passenger seat could
then, for example, come into contact with
the vehicle interior, especially if the person is
sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐
bled in accordance with the person in the
front passenger seat.
R The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
R The person is seated correctly.
#

Ensure, both before and during the jour‐
ney, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct.

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐
tor lamps

System self-test
When the ignition is switched on, a system selftest is performed during which the two
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator
lamps light up simultaneously.

The status of the front passenger air bag is dis‐
played after the system self-test:
R PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps are off:
the front passenger air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐
ously: the front passenger air bag is deactiva‐
ted. It will then not be deployed in the event
of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front passenger air
bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
and the 6 restraint system warning lamp
light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat
may not be used. Also in this case, do not install
a child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. Have the automatic front passenger air bag
shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.

Occupant safety
Status display
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that the sta‐
tus of the front passenger air bag is correct for
the prevailing situation.
After installing a rearward-facing child
restraint system to the front passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐
tinuously.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from
using a rearward-facing child restraint
system when the front passenger air bag
is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is off, the front passenger air bag
can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the air bag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air
bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIR
BAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
to the child can occur.
When installing a child restraint system to the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information .
Depending on the child restraint system and the
stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do
not fit the rearward-facing child restraint system
to the front passenger seat.
Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint
system to a suitable rear seat.
After installing a forward-facing child
restraint system to the front passenger
seat: depending on the child restraint system
and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off.
Always observe the following information.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect positioning of the forwardfacing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
and you position the front passenger seat too
close to the cockpit, in the event of an acci‐
dent, the child could:
R Come into contact with the vehicle inte‐
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is lit, for example.
R Be struck by the air bag if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is off.
#

Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible and fully retract
the seat cushion length adjustment.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat
belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul‐
der belt guide on the child restraint sys‐
tem. The shoulder belt strap must be
routed forwards and downwards from

Occupant safety
the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary,
adjust the seat belt outlet and the front
passenger seat accordingly.
Always observe the child restraint sys‐
tem manufacturer's installation instruc‐
tions.

When installing a child restraint system to the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information .
If a person is sitting in the front passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐
tinuously or be off, depending on the person's
stature.
A person on the front passenger seat must
always observe the following information:
R If the front passenger seat is occupied with
an adult or a person with a stature corre‐
sponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This
indicates that the front passenger air bag is
enabled.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person

with a build corresponding to that of an adult
should not use the front passenger seat.
Instead, they should use a rear seat.
If the front passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp either lights up continuously
or remains off, depending on the result of the
classification.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF is off: move the
front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble or a person of smaller stature should
use a rear seat.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously: a person of
smaller stature should not use the front
passenger seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test,
the front passenger air bag is deactivated. It

will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
dent. In this case, the front passenger air bag
cannot perform its intended protective func‐
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front
passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle interior, especially if
the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger air bag is enabled or
deactivated in accordance with the per‐
son in the front passenger seat.
R The person is seated properly with a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
R The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
Further related subjects:
Child restraint system on the front passenger
seat (→ page 53).

Occupant safety
PRE-SAFE® system
PRE-SAFE® (Pre-Crash Safety-System)
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv‐
ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐
ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas‐
ures independently of each other:
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
R Closing the side windows.
R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the
sliding sunroof.
R Vehicles with memory function: moving
the front passenger seat to a more favorable
seat position.
R Vehicles with multicontour seat: increas‐
ing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters
of the seat backrest.
R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi‐
media system is switched on, generates a
brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐
tective mechanism of a person's hearing.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐
tion may result in damage to the seat and/or
the object.
# Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
You will need to perform certain settings your‐
self.
# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly.
The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts,
particularly an imminent rear impact, and take
pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle

occupants. These measures cannot necessarily
prevent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following
measures independently of each other:
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle
is stationary. This brake application is can‐
celed automatically when the vehicle pulls
away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
System limitations
The system will not initiate any action in the fol‐
lowing situations:
R when reversing
The system will not initiate any braking applica‐
tion in the following situations:
R whilst driving
or

46
R

Occupant safety
when entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist

Information on PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
If an imminent side impact is detected, PRESAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the
front-seat vehicle occupant's upper body
towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by
rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat
side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on
which the impact is anticipated. This increases
the distance between the door and the vehicle
occupant.
If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or
is defective, the
display message is
shown (→ page 409).

Children in the vehicle
Notes on the safe transportation of children
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If you leave children unaccompanied in the
vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion, for example by:
R Releasing the parking brake.
R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j.
R Starting the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐
ment.
# Never leave children and animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to
exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If people – particularly children – are
exposed to extreme heat or cold over an
extended period of time, there is a risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
# Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐
dren – unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child
seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
Children could suffer burns from these parts,
particularly on metallic parts of the child
restraint system.
# Always make sure that the child
restraint system is not exposed to
direct sunlight.
# Protect it with a blanket, for example.

Occupant safety
#

If the child restraint system has been
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
cool before securing a child into it.
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
R All 50 states
R The U.S. territories
R The District of Columbia
R All Canadian provinces
All child restraint systems must meet the follow‐
ing standards:
R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any author‐
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

To improve protection for children younger than
12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height,
Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the
following information:
R Only secure children using a child restraint
system which is appropriate to the height,
age and weight of the child and suitable for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Be sure to observe
the instructions for correct use of the child
restraint system.
R Always install a child restraint system on a
rear seat if possible.
R Only use the following securing systems for
child restraint systems:
the seat belt system
the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brack‐
ets
the Top Tether anchorages
R The manufacturer's installation instructions
for the child restraint system.
R The warning labels in the vehicle interior and
on the child restraint system.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by incorrect installation of the child
restraint system
If the child restraint system is incorrectly
installed on a suitable seating position, it
cannot perform its intended protective func‐
tion.
The child cannot be restrained in the event of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction.
# Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions for the child
restraint system and its correct use.
# Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system always rests on
the sitting surface of the seat.
# Never place objects under or behind
the child restraint system, e.g. cush‐
ions.
# Always use child restraint systems with
the original cover designed for them.
# Always replace damaged covers with
genuine covers.

Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by
incorrectly installed child restraint sys‐
tems
If the child restraint system is not correctly
installed or secured, it could release in the
event of an accident, sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction.
The child restraint system could be flung
around and hit vehicle occupants. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
# Always install child restraint systems
correctly, even when not in use.
# Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by the use of damaged child restraint
systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐
tems that have been subjected to a load in

an accident may then not be able to perform
their intended protective function.
The child cannot be restrained in the event of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction.
# Always replace child restraint systems
immediately that have been damaged or
involved in an accident.
# Have the securing systems for the child
restraint systems checked at a qualified
specialist workshop before installing a
child restraint system again.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a
height where a three-point seat belt can be fitted
properly without a booster seat.
The following notes must be observed:
R When installing a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, the information on
installing a child restraint system on the front
passenger seat (→ page 53).

R
R

Instructions and safety notes on the auto‐
matic front passenger airbag shutoff
(→ page 40).
Safety notes on the seat belt (→ page 33).
Information on the correct use of the seat
belt (→ page 37).

Activating/deactivating the child seat safety
feature of the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a
seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle
is in motion
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is
in motion, the child restraint system is no
longer correctly secured. The child seat
safety feature is deactivated and the seat
belt is drawn in a bit by the inertia reel.
It is therefore not possible to engage the seat
belt again.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as
soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions.

Occupant safety
#

Activate the child seat safety feature
again and correctly secure the child
restraint system.

When enabled, the child seat safety feature
ensures that the seat belts of the front
passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken
once the child restraint system is secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
# Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions when installing and
removing the child restraint system.
# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt
outlet.
# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt
buckle.
Activating the child seat safety feature:
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
When the child seat safety feature is activa‐
ted,you should hear a ratcheting sound.
# Push the child restraint system down until
the seat belt sits tightly.
#

Deactivating the child seat safety feature:
# Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle.
# Hold the seat belt tongue and guide it back
to the seat belt outlet.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat attachment
Notes on LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
attachments
& WARNING Risk of‑ injury or death if the
maximum permissible gross mass for
using a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system is exceeded
For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys‐
tems in which the child is secured using the
integrated seat belt integrated in the child
restraint system, the permissible gross mass
of the child and child restraint system is
73 lb (33 kg).
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lb (33 kg), the

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system
with integrated seat belt does not offer suffi‐
cient protection. An excessive load may be
placed on the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
attachments and the child may not be
restrained in the event of an accident, for
example.
# If the child and the child restraint sys‐
tem together weigh more than 73 lb
(33 kg), only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system which secures
the child with the vehicle seat belt.
# Also secure the child restraint system
with the Top Tether belt, if available.
Always comply with the information about the
mass of the child restraint system:
R in the manufacturer's installation and operat‐
ing instructions for the child restraint system
used
R on a label on the child restraint system, if
present

Occupant safety

Regularly check that the permissible gross mass
of the child and child restraint system is still
being adhered to.
When using a child restraint system, be sure to
observe the manufacturer's installation and
operating instructions as well as its correct use
and the suitability of the seats for attaching a
child restraint system.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed restraint systems. LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are
approved in accordance with ECE R44.
Only child restraint systems that have been
approved in accordance with ECE R44 may be
attached to LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting
brackets.

Installing LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
attachments
& WARNING Risk of‑ injury or death if the
maximum permissible gross mass for
using a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system is exceeded

Symbol for fitting a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system

For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys‐
tems in which the child is secured using the
integrated seat belt integrated in the child
restraint system, the permissible gross mass
of the child and child restraint system is
73 lb (33 kg).
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lb (33 kg), the
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system
with integrated seat belt does not offer suffi‐
cient protection. An excessive load may be
placed on the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
attachments and the child may not be
restrained in the event of an accident, for
example.
# If the child and the child restraint sys‐
tem together weigh more than 73 lb
(33 kg), only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX)

Occupant safety

child restraint system which secures
the child with the vehicle seat belt.
Also secure the child restraint system
with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the information about the
mass of the child restraint system:
R in the manufacturer's installation and operat‐
ing instructions for the child restraint system
used
R on a label on the child restraint system, if
present
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass
of the child and child restraint system is still
being adhered to.
When using a child restraint system, be sure to
observe the manufacturer's installation and
operating instructions as well as its correct use
and the suitability of the seats for attaching a
child restraint system.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type
(ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged cor‐
rectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting
brackets.

Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
ped.

Remove each cover for LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
mounting brackets 1.
Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system to both LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
mounting brackets 1.
After removing the child seat, replace each
cover for LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting
brackets 1.

Securing Top Tether
1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the
center seat
When installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt for the center seat could be dam‐
aged.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
rear seat backrests are not locked after
installing Top Tether belts
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an acci‐
dent or during braking or sudden changes of
direction.
As a result, child restraint systems cannot
perform their intended protective function.

Occupant safety

Rear seat backrests that are not locked can
also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the
event of an accident.
# Always lock rear seat backrests after
installing Top Tether belts.
# Observe the lock verification indicator.

If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked,
this will be shown on the multifunction display
on the instrument cluster.
The risk of injury can be reduced by Top Tether
as Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured with
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.
The child restraint system must be equipped
with a Top Tether belt.

If necessary, move head restraint 1
upwards Adjusting the rear seat head
restraints(→ page 90).
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system with Top Tether. Always comply with
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions when doing so.
Route Top Tether belt 5 under head
restraint 1 between the two head restraint
bars.
Guide Top Tether belt 5 downwards
between combined luggage cover and net 3
and backrest 2.
Hook Top Tether hook 6 of Top Tether belt
5 without twisting into Top Tether anchor‐
age 4.
Tension Top Tether belt 5. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur‐
er's installation instructions when doing so.
If necessary, move head restraint 1 down‐
wards Adjusting the rear seat head
restraints(→ page 90). Make sure that you do
not interfere with the routing of Top Tether
belt 5.

Occupant safety
Child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat
Notes on child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat
Accident statistics show that children secured in
the rear seats are safer than children secured in
the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz
strongly advises that you install a child restraint
system on a rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front passenger seat,
always observe the information on the automatic
front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 40).
By doing this, you can avoid risks caused by:
R A child restraint system that is not detected
by the automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff.
R The unintentionally deactivated front
passenger airbag.
R Incorrect positioning of the child restraint
system.

Notes on forward-facing and rearward-facing
child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat
When using a rearward-facing child restraint sys‐
tem on the front passenger seat, the front
passenger front air bag must always be deactiva‐
ted. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously
(→ page 42).
When using the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, it is essential to observe
the following:
R Move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible.
R Set the seat backrest to an almost vertical
position.
R Retract the seat cushion length as far as pos‐
sible.
R The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
front passenger seat.
R The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the seat backrest of the front

R
R

passenger seat. The child restraint system
must not touch the roof or be put under
strain by the head restraints.
If necessary, adjust the angle of the seat
backrest and the head restraint position
accordingly.
Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that
the front edge of the seat cushion is in the
highest position and the rear edge of the
seat cushion is in the lowest position.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat belt
outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt
guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the seat belt outlet.
If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and
the front passenger seat accordingly.
Never place objects under or behind the
child restraint system, e.g. cushions.

Always comply with the manufacturer's installa‐
tion and operating instructions for the child
restraint system used.

Occupant safety

Child safety locks
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
for the rear doors
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If you leave children unaccompanied in the
vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion, for example by:
R Releasing the parking brake.
R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j.
R Starting the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐
ment.
# Never leave children and animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to
exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If people – particularly children – are
exposed to extreme heat or cold over an
extended period of time, there is a risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
# Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐
dren – unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING There is a risk of accident
and injury if you leave children unatten‐
ded in the vehicle
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could:
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by
oncoming traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.

#
#

Always activate the child safety locks
available if children are traveling in the
vehicle.
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.

Child safety locks are available for the rear doors
and for the rear side windows.
The child safety lock on the rear doors secures
each door separately. The doors can no longer
be opened from the inside.

Occupant safety
Activating/deactivating the override feature
for the rear side windows

With indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch
on the corresponding rear door or driv‐
er's door.
% Vehicles with folding bench seat: The
switch for opening the tailgate which is loca‐
ted on the right-hand wheel arch when
viewed in the direction of travel is also
secured.
R

Notes on pets in the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
tended in the vehicle
#
#

Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or
2 (deactivate).
Make sure that the child safety locks are
working properly.

To activate/deactivate: press button 2.
Opening/closing the side window in the rear
is possible:
R With indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch
on the driver's door.

If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐
ded or unsecured, they could possibly press
down buttons or switches.
Thereby an animal may:
R activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users

Occupant safety

Unsecured animals may be thrown around in
the vehicle in the event of an accident or
sudden steering and braking maneuver and
injure vehicle occupants in the process.
# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
tended.
# Always correctly secure animals while
driving, for example using a suitable
animal carrier.

Opening and closing
SmartKey
Overview of SmartKey functions
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by
oncoming traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, children could also set the vehi‐
cle in motion, for example, by:
R Releasing the parking brake.
R Shifting the automatic transmission out
of park position j or shifting manual
transmission into neutral.
R Starting the engine

#
#

When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children and animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.
Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil‐
dren.

* NOTE Damage to the key caused by
magnetic fields
#

Keep the key away from strong mag‐
netic fields.

1
2
3
4
5

Locks
Battery check lamp
Unlocks
Opens/closes the tailgate
Panic alarm

The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following
components:
R The doors
R The tailgate
R The fuel filler flap

Opening and closing

If you do not open the vehicle within approx‐
imately 40 seconds after unlocking:
R The vehicle is locked again
R Anti-theft protection is reactivated
Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec‐
tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect
the SmartKey's functionality.
% If battery check lamp 2 does not light up
after pressing the % or & button, the
battery is discharged.
Changing the SmartKey battery (→ page 59).

Activating/deactivating the panic alarm
Requirements
% The panic alarm function is only available in
certain countries.
R The ignition is switched off.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking
verification signal
Multimedia system:
,
. î

.
#

Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

To activate: press button 1 for approx‐
imately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again.

or
#

Press the start/stop button on the dash‐
board (the SmartKey is inside the vehicle).

Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey:
Central unlocking
R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

To switch between settings: press the
% and & buttons simultaneously for
approximately six seconds until the battery
check lamp flashes twice.
If the unlocking function for the driver's door
and fuel filler flap has been selected:
R Pressing the % button a second time cen‐
trally unlocks the vehicle.
R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch
the inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel
filler flap are unlocked.
#

Reducing the energy consumption of the
SmartKey
All vehicles: if you do not use the vehicle or a
SmartKey for an extended period of time, you
can reduce the energy consumption of the

Opening and closing
respective SmartKey. To do so, deactivate the
SmartKey functions.
# To deactivate: press the & button on the
SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
flashes twice briefly and lights up once.
# To activate: press any button on the Smart‐
Key.
% When the vehicle is started with the Smart‐
Key in the stowage compartment of the cen‐
ter console, the SmartKey functions are
automatically activated (→ page 147).
Removing/inserting the mechanical key

#
#

To remove: press release knob 1.
Mechanical key 2 is pushed out slightly.
Pull out mechanical key 2 until it engages in
the intermediate position.

% You can use the intermediate position of
mechanical key 2 to attach the key to a key
ring.
# Press release knob 1 again and fully
remove mechanical key 2.
# To insert: press release knob 1.
# Insert mechanical key 2 to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages.
Replacing the SmartKey battery
& DANGER Serious damage to health
caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐
stances. Swallowing batteries may cause
serious damage to health.
There is a risk of fatal injury.

#
#

Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐
dren.
If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
#

Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.

Opening and closing

Requirements:
R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
# Remove the emergency key (→ page 59).

#
#
#

#
#

Press release button 2 down fully and slide
cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.
Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the
arrow and remove.
Remove battery compartment 3 and take
out the discharged battery.
Insert the new battery into battery compart‐
ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking
in the battery compartment and on the bat‐
tery.
Push in battery compartment 3.
Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it
engages.

Problems with the SmartKey
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle.

Possible causes are:
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.

Opening and closing
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
R The SmartKey is defective.
#
#
#

You have lost a SmartKey.

#
#

Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock.
Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Opening and closing

Doors
Unlocking and opening doors from the inside

To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door
handle.
The locking pin pops up when the rear door
is unlocked.
To open a rear door: pull the rear door han‐
dle again.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle
from the inside

#
#

To unlock: press button 1.
To lock: press button 2.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
The vehicle is not unlocked:
R If you have locked the vehicle using the
SmartKey.
R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐
LESS-GO.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐
LESS-GO
Requirements:
The SmartKey is outside the vehicle.
R The distance between the SmartKey and the
vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m).
R The driver's door and the door at which the
door handle is used are closed.
R

To unlock and open a front door: pull door
handle 2.
Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is
unlocked.

Opening and closing
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐
face of the door handle.
# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface
1 or 2.
# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐
sor surface 2 for an extended period.
% Further information on convenience closing
(→ page 74).
If you open the tailgate from outside it is auto‐
matically unlocked.
#

Problems with KEYLESS-GO
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.

Possible causes are:
KEYLESS-GO has been deactivated .
R The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.

Opening and closing

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
R The SmartKey is defective.
#
#
#
#

Activate KEYLESS-GO .
Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary .
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the vehicle .
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Activating/deactivating the automatic lock‐
ing feature
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐
ing faster than walking pace.

To activate: press and hold button 2 for
approximately five seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for
approximately five seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
There is a danger of being locked out if the func‐
tion is activated:
R While the vehicle is being tow started/
pushed.
R On a roller dynamometer.
#

Opening and closing
Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the
mechanical key

% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the mechanical key, first press the button for
locking from the inside while the driver's
door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐
er's door using the mechanical key.

#
#

Insert the mechanical key as far as it will go
into opening 1 in the cover.
Pull and hold the door handle.
Pull the cover on the mechanical key as
straight as possible away from the vehicle
until it releases.
Release the door handle.

#
#
#

To unlock: turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1.
To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise
to position 1.
Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐
der until it engages and is seated firmly.

Load compartment
Opening the tailgate
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐
gate is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate.
# Never drive with the tailgate open.

Opening and closing

* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by
obstacles above the vehicle

For a tailgate stopped in an intermediate
position, pull it upwards and release it as
soon as it starts to open.

Vehicles with folding bench seat: Pull
switch 1 for the tailgate twice.
The tailgate is unlocked.

The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
when it is opened.
# Make sure that there is sufficient space
behind and above the tailgate.
To open the tailgate, the following options
are available:

#
#
#
#

Pull remote opening switch 1 for the tail‐
gate.
Press and hold the p button on the
SmartKey.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Move
your foot below the bumper (→ page 69).
If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate
handle and release it again immediately.

Opening and closing
If the tailgate has been locked from the outside,
or the child safety lock has been activated, the
tailgate cannot be unlocked with switch 1.
The tailgate is equipped with an automatic
obstacle detection function. If a solid object
blocks or restricts the tailgate when automati‐
cally opening, this process is stopped. The auto‐
matic obstacle detection function is only an aid.
It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when
opening the tailgate.
Closing the tailgate
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.

#
#

Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
during automatic closing of the tailgate
Parts of the body could become trapped dur‐
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More‐
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing
in the closing area or may enter the closing
area during the closing process.
# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
of the closing area during the closing
process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R Press the p button on the SmartKey.
R Press or pull the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.

R
R

Press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Pull the tailgate handle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also
possible to stop the closing process by moving
your foot in a kicking motion under the rear
bumper.
To close the tailgate, the following options
are available:
# Pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release
it as soon as it begins to close.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Move
your foot below the bumper (→ page 69).
# Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press and hold
the p button on the SmartKey (with the
SmartKey in the vicinity of the vehicle).

Opening and closing
matically closing, the tailgate automatically
opens again slightly. The automatic obstacle
detection with reversing function is only an aid.
It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when
closing the tailgate.
# When closing, make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite the reversing function

Press remote operating switch 1 for the
tailgate.

#
#

Press closing button 1 on the tailgate.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press locking
button 2 in the tailgate.
If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle,
the tailgate closes and the vehicle is locked.

Automatic reversing function for the tailgate
The tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle
detection with reversing function. If a solid
object blocks or restricts the tailgate when auto‐

The reversing function does not react:
R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐
gers.
R Over the last Ó in (8 mm) of the closing
path.
In these situations in particular, the reversing
function cannot prevent someone being trap‐
ped.
# When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.

Opening and closing
If someone is trapped:
R Press the p button on the SmartKey,
or
R Press or pull the remote operating switch
on the driver's door, or
R Press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate, or
R Pull the tailgate handle.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

Observe the notes when opening (→ page 65)
and closing (→ page 67) the tailgate.
% Two warning tones sound when the tailgate
is opening or closing.
& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot
exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
system.
# Always ensure that you only make a
kicking movement within the detection
range of the sensors.

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close
or stop the closing process of the tailgate by
performing a kicking movement under the rear
bumper.
The kicking movement triggers the opening or
closing process alternately.

* NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten‐
tional opening of the tailgate
R
R
#

when using an automatic car wash
when using a high pressure cleaner
Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure
that the key located is at least 10 ft

Opening and closing
(3 m) away from the vehicle in such sit‐
uations.

When making the kicking movement, make sure
that your feet are firmly on the ground, other‐
wise you could lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
Requirements:
R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle.
R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
vehicle while performing the kicking move‐
ment.
R Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement.
R Do not carry out the kicking movement too
slowly.
R The kicking movement must be towards the
vehicle and back again.

1 Sensor detection range

If several consecutive kicking movements are
not successful, wait ten seconds.
System limitations
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
R The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due
to road salt or snow.
R The kicking movement is made using a pros‐
thetic leg.

The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in
the following situations:
R If persons' arms or legs move in the sensor
detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehi‐
cle, sitting on the edge of the cargo compart‐
ment, or picking up objects.
R If objects are moved or placed behind the
vehicle, e.g. charging cables, tensioning
straps or luggage.
R When working on the trailer coupling, trailers
or rear bicycle racks.
Deactivate KEYLESS-GO (→ page 58) or do not
carry the SmartKey about your person in such
situations.
Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate
Activating the opening angle limiter
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in
the top half of its opening range, to approx‐
imately 8 in (20 cm) before the end position.
# Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at
the desired position.

Opening and closing
#

Emergency release of the tailgate from the
inside (vehicles with a folding bench seat)

Press and hold the closing button in the tail‐
gate until you hear a short acoustic signal.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate then stops in the stored position
when opened.

To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the
outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped
automatically.
Deactivating the opening angle limiter
Press and hold the closing button in the tail‐
gate until two short acoustic signals sound.

Unlocking the tailgate with the mechanical
key
#
#

Fold the rear seat backrest forwards.
Remove the combined luggage cover and net
(→ page 108).

Insert mechanical key 2 into opening 1 in
the trim and push it in.
The tailgate is unlocked.

Press the cover down in the direction of
arrow 1 and pull in the direction of arrow
2 and remove it.
Pull the emergency release lever in the direc‐
tion of arrow 3.
The tailgate is unlocked.

Opening and closing

Roller sun blinds
Extending the rear side window roller sun‐
blinds

Side windows
Opening and closing the side windows
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening a side window

* NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to
it snapping back

When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
# When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
# If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or pull it in order to
close the side window again.

If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel
may be damaged.
# Always move the roller sun blind by
hand.
# Do not drive with the roller sun blind
hooked in and side windows opened at
the same time.
#

Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and
hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the
window.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts
could be trapped in the closing area in the
process.
# When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.

Opening and closing
#

If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or press the button in
order to reopen the side window.

Requirements
R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.

To interrupt automatic operation: press or
pull the W button again.

When the vehicle is switched off, the side win‐
dows can continue being operated.
The function is available for around five minutes
or until a front door is opened.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they oper‐
ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐
tended.
# Activate the child safety lock for the
rear side windows.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.

1 Closes
2 Opens

The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐
dence.
# To start automatic operation: press the
W button beyond the point of resistance
or pull and release it.

Automatic reversing function of the side win‐
dows
If an object blocks a side window during the
closing process, the side window opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing function
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
# When closing, make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
The reversing function does not react:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers

74
R

Opening and closing
during resetting

This means that the reverse function cannot
prevent someone from becoming trapped in
these situations.
# When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
# If someone becomes trapped, press the
W button to open the side window
again.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle
before starting a journey)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
# When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
# Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.

Press and hold the % button on the
SmartKey.
The following functions are performed:
R The vehicle is unlocked.
R The side windows are opened.
R The sliding sunroof is opened.
R The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened.
R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
switched on.

If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding
sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are
opened first.
# To continue convenience opening: press
the % button again.
# To interrupt convenience opening: release
the % button.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle
from outside)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by
inadvertent convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side win‐
dow and the sliding sunroof.
# Observe the complete closing proce‐
dure when using convenience closing.
# When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#

Press and hold the & button on the
SmartKey.
The following functions are performed:
R The vehicle is locked.
R The side windows are closed.
R The sliding sunroof is closed.
R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.

Opening and closing
#

To close the roller sunblinds: press the
& button again.

To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button.

% Convenience closing can also be operated
with KEYLESS-GO (→ page 62).

Problems with the side windows
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A side window cannot be closed and
you cannot see the cause.

Check to see if any objects are in the window guide.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes
with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active.
Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side win‐
dow.
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
# Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has
closed, and hold the button for an additional second.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:

Opening and closing

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Repeat the previous step.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or
closed using the convenience opening
feature.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary .

Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while opening and closing the sliding
sunroof
During opening and closing, parts of the
body could get caught in the sweep of the
sliding sunroof.
# When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep.

Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.

or
#

#
#

Press the button in any direction during
the automatic opening/closing process.
The opening/closing process is stop‐
ped.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the sliding sunroof is operated by chil‐
dren
Children operating the sliding sunroof could
get caught in the moving parts, particularly if
unattended.

Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while opening and closing the roller sun
blind
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts become trapped between the
roller sun blind and frame or the sliding sun‐
roof.

Opening and closing
#

When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep of
the roller sun blind.
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.

Do not allow anything to protrude from
the sliding sunroof.

or
#

* NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and
ice

Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of
the sliding sunroof.
# Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
of snow and ice.

Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐
roof may damage the sealing strips.

Press the button in any direction during
the automatic opening/closing process.
The opening/closing process is stop‐
ped.

* NOTE Damage caused by protruding
objects

1 To raise
2 To open
3 To close/lower

Use the 3 button to operate the panoramic
sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.

The panoramic sliding sunroof can be
opened only when the roller sunblind is open.
The roller sunblind can be operated only
when the panoramic sliding sunroof is
closed.
To start automatic operation: press the
3 button beyond the pressure point or
pull and release it.
To interrupt automatic operation: briefly
press the 3 button in any direction.
The opening/closing process is stopped.
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sun‐
roof: The automatic raising feature is availa‐
ble only when the sliding sunroof is closed or
raised.
Vehicles without a panoramic sliding sun‐
roof: The automatic opening and raising fea‐
ture is available only when the sliding sun‐
roof is closed.

Automatic reversing function of the sliding
sunroof
If there is an object obstructing the sliding sun‐
roof during the closing process, the sliding sun‐

Opening and closing

roof opens again automatically. The automatic
reverse function is only an aid and is not a sub‐
stitute for your attentiveness.
# When closing, make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment even with
the reversing feature active
The reverse function does not react in partic‐
ular:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
R over the last ã in (4 mm) of the closing
path
R during resetting
This means that the reverse function cannot
prevent someone from becoming trapped in
these situations.
# When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
# Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.

or
#

Briefly press the button in any direction
during automatic operation.
The closing process is stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the roller
sunblind
If there is an object obstructing the roller sun‐
blind during the closing process, the roller sun‐
blind opens again automatically. The automatic
reverse function is only an aid and is not a sub‐
stitute for your attentiveness.
# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of move‐
ment.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing function
In particular, the reversing function does not
react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers.
This means that the reversing function can‐
not prevent entrapment in these situations.

When closing the roller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in the range
of movement.
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.

or
#

Press the button in any direction during
the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.

Automatic features of the sliding sunroof
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can
interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing
function when driving" and "Automatic lowering
feature".
Rain closing function when driving
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If
it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof is
automatically lowered while the vehicle is in
motion.

Opening and closing
Automatic lowering feature
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If
the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, the slid‐
ing sunroof is automatically lowered slightly at
higher speeds. At low speeds, it is raised again
automatically.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto‐
matic lowering of the sliding sunroof

This could trap you or other persons.
# Make sure that nobody reaches into the
sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
# If somebody becomes trapped, briefly
push the sliding sunroof button for‐
wards or backwards.
The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.

Problems with the sliding sunroof
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.

At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof
automatically lowers slightly at the rear.
Problem
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause.

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injury by closing the sliding sunroof again
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof
closes with increased force.
Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or

Opening and closing

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#

Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the pressure point
until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:
Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof is closed again with increased force.

Vehicles without a panoramic slid‐
ing sunroof: The sliding sunroof does
not operate smoothly.

Vehicles with a panoramic sliding
sunroof: The sliding sunroof or the
roller sunblind does not operate
smoothly.

#
#

Pull the 3 button up repeatedly to the pressure point until the sliding sunroof is fully open.
Press the 3 button for another second.
Close the sliding sunroof.
Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

Opening and closing
Anti-theft protection
Function of the immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being
started without the correct SmartKey.
The immobilizer is automatically activated when
the ignition is switched off and deactivated when
the ignition is switched on.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart‐
Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can
start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left
inside the vehicle.
% In the event the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s starter battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Function of the ATA system
If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible
alarm is triggered in the following situations:
R When a door is opened
R When the tailgate is opened
R When the hood is opened
The ATA system is armed automatically after
approximately 10 seconds:
R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey.
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system
is activated.
The ATA system is automatically deactivated:
R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart‐
Key
R After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the stowage compartment
(→ page 147)

82
R

Opening and closing
After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO.

% When the mbrace service (→ page 301) is
active and the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a message is automatically sent
to the Customer Assistance Center.
Deactivating the ATA
# Press the %, & or p button on the
SmartKey.
or
# Press the start/stop button with the Smart‐
Key in the stowage compartment
(→ page 147)
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
Grasp the outside door handle with the
SmartKey outside the vehicle.

Seats and stowing
Notes on the correct driver's seat position

& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion

R
R

You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#

Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.

R
R
R
R

Ensure the following when adjusting the steering
wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
R you are as far away from the driver's air bag
as possible
R you are sitting in a normal upright position
R your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion

your legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly
the back of your head is supported at eye
level by the center of the head restraint
you can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
you can move your legs freely
you can see all the displays on the instru‐
ment cluster clearly
you have a good overview of the traffic con‐
ditions
the seat belt is pulled snugly against the
body and is routed across the center of your
shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic
area

Seats and stowing

Seats
Adjusting the front seat mechanically and
electrically (without Seat Comfort Package)
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
The seats can be adjusted when the ignition is
switched off.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" and "Chil‐
dren in the vehicle".

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
driver's seat not being engaged
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
motion.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
# Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.

Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you
or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
and thereby injured.

Seats and stowing
Children in particular could accidentally
press the electrical seat adjustment buttons
and become trapped.
# While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints which are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can‐
not provide protection as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
accident or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints
installed.
# Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot
adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved the
seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐
ple.
# Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the center of your shoul‐
der.

* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving
the seats back
The seats may be damaged by objects when
moving the seats back.
# When moving the seats back, make
sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or under or behind the seats.

Seats and stowing
Adjusting the front seat manually and elec‐
trically (with Seat Comfort Package)

#
#

1 Seat backrest inclination
2 Seat height
3 Seat fore-and-aft position
#

To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
lift lever 3 and slide the seat into the
desired position.
Make sure that the seat is engaged.

1
2
3
4
5

Seat backrest inclination
Seat height
Seat cushion inclination
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Seat cushion length

To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
lift lever 4 and slide the seat into the
desired position.
Make sure that the seat is engaged.
To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever
5 and slide the front section of the seat
cushion forwards or backwards.

Seats and stowing
Adjusting the front seat electrically

Save the settings with the memory function
(→ page 100).

Adjusting the front passenger seat from the
driver's seat electrically
Requirements:
R The power supply is switched on.
This function is only available on vehicles with an
electrically adjustable front passenger seat.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Head restraint height
Seat backrest inclination
Seat height
Seat cushion length
Seat cushion inclination
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

You can call up the following functions for the
front passenger seat:
R Seat adjustment
R Seat heating
R Seat ventilation
R Memory function

88
#

Seats and stowing
To select the front passenger seat: press
button 1.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front
passenger seat is selected.
Adjust the front passenger seat using the
buttons in the door control panel on the driv‐
er's side.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Head restraints
Adjusting the front seat head restraints man‐
ually
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#

1
2
3
4

To raise
To soften
To lower
To harden

Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour
of the backrest individually to suit your back.

Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.

Seats and stowing
Adjusting the front seat luxury head
restraints manually

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints which are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can‐
not provide protection as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
accident or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints
installed.
# Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot
adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.

#
#

To raise: pull the head restraint up.
To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down.
To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards.
To move backwards: press release knob 2
and push the head restraint backwards.

To adjust the side bolsters of the head
restraint: pull or push right or left-hand side
bolster 2.
To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards.

90
#

Seats and stowing
To move backwards: press release knob 1
and push the head restraint backwards.

Adjusting the head restraints of the rear
seats mechanically

Removing

Lowering the rear seat head restraints from
the front

#
#
#

Press button 1.

Installing/removing the outer rear seat head
restraints

To raise: pull the head restraint up.
To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down.

#
#
#

Release the rear seat backrest and fold it
slightly forwards (→ page 103).
Pull the head restraint up to the stop.
Push release knob 1 in the direction of the
arrow and pull out the head restraint.

Seats and stowing
Installing
# Insert the head restraint so that the notches
on the bar are on the left when viewed in the
direction of travel.
# Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
engages.
Configuring seat settings
Multimedia system:
,
. a
# Select
or

Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
# Select
.
# Select the setting.
Adjusting the seat contour in the lumbar
region of the seat backrest
# Select
.
# Adjust the air cushion.

Memory function
# Save the seat settings with the memory func‐
tion (→ page 100).
Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral
support (active multicontour seat)
Multimedia system:
,
. a
With this function, the lateral support of the
active multicontour seat is automatically adjus‐
ted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the
vehicle.
# Select
or
.
# Select
.
# Select setting:
,
or
.
Overview of massage and workout programs
Massage programs
The following programs can be selected:
R
R

R
R
R
R

Active Workout
The
and
programs require your active cooperation.
Tensing and releasing also helps to improve
blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pres‐
sure point as soon as you feel it.
Selecting the massage program for the front
seats
Multimedia system:
,
. a
# Select
or
.
# Select
.
# Select a massage program.
The massage program runs for approximately
9 to 15 minutes, depending on the setting.

92
#

Seats and stowing
To set the massage intensity: switch
on O or off ª.

Resetting seat and massage settings
Multimedia system:
,
. a
# Select
or .

Depending on whether the settings for the driver
or front passenger seat are selected, only the
selected seat can be reset.
Switching the seat heating on/off
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐
edly switching on the seat heater
Repeatedly switching on the seat heater can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest
padding to become very hot.
The health of persons with limited tempera‐
ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to
excessively high temperatures may be affec‐
ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heater.

* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by
objects or documents when the seat
heater is switched on
When the seat heater is switched on, over‐
heating can occur due to objects or docu‐
ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions
or child seats. This could cause damage to
the seat surface.
# Make sure that no objects or docu‐
ments are on the seats when the seat
heater is switched on.
Requirements
R The power supply is switched on.

Seats and stowing

To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating
is switched off.
% The seat heating automatically switches
down from the three heating levels after 8,
10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is
switched off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Requirements:
R The power supply is switched on.
#

To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
Depending on the heating level, up to three
indicator lamps light up.

To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐
tion level is set.
Depending on the ventilation level, up to
three indicator lamps light up.

94
#

Seats and stowing
To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐
tion level is set.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventila‐
tion is switched off.

Folding bench seat in the cargo compart‐
ment
Notes on the folding bench seat
& WARNING Risk of injury when the seat
backrest is not upright and locked in
position
If the seat backrests of the rear bench seat
are not locked in the upright position, the
seat backrest of the folding bench seat may
fold down while driving.
In this case, the seat belts may not perform
their intended protective function.
# Make sure that the seat backrests of
the rear bench seat are locked in the
upright position.

Observe the notes on "Seat belts" (→ page 37),
"Head restraints" (→ page 88) and "Children in
the vehicle" (→ page 46).
The folding bench seat is only approved for use
with child seats designed for children up to six
years old . Information on suitable child restraint
systems on the folding bench seat can be
obtained at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter.
The folding bench seat may only be used when
the combined luggage cover and net is installed.
The tailgate can be opened from the folding
bench seat. The switch is located on the wheel
arch on the right-hand side when viewed in the
direction of travel.
Folding out the folding bench seat
Requirements:
R The seat backrests of the rear bench seat are
locked in the upright position.
R The handle for the combined luggage cover
and net has been moved up. To improve the
rear view, the upper part of the plate has
been folded down.

Seats and stowing
#
#

Push down the seat cushion until the seat
backrest engages fully.
Fold the head restraints upwards.

Removing or installing the seat cushion
If you want to open the cargo compartment floor
while the folding bench seat is folded back, you
must first of all remove the seat cushion.

#
#
#
#

Pull release handle 1 and fold the seat
backrest of the folding bench seat upwards.
Hook the seat belts into retainers 3.
Secure the seat belt buckles in the back of
the seat backrest.
Pull release 2 and fold the seat cushion of
the folding bench seat into the seat position.

To remove: fold seat cushion 2 vertically
upwards and remove it from seat cushion
guide 1.

Installing

#
#

Push seat cushion 2 into seat cushion
guide 1 at a slight angle from the rear 3.
Fold seat cushion 2 back into its starting
position 4 until it engages.

Seats and stowing

Folding back the folding bench seat

* NOTE Damage to the folding bench seat
when folding back
The folding bench seat may be damaged
when it is folded back.
# Fully insert the head restraints into the
guides.
# Make sure that the seat belt buckles
engages in their guides.

#
#
#

Press release knob 3 and fold the head
restraints down.
Press release knob 4 and push the head
restraints all the way in.
Fold back seat backrest 2 of the folding
bench seat into its starting position.

Opening/closing the cargo compartment
floor
& WARNING Risk of injury due to an open
cargo compartment floor

Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab 1 and
fold it back into its starting position until it
engages.

If you drive when the cargo compartment
floor is open, objects could be thrown around
and thereby strike vehicle occupants. There
is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in direc‐
tion.
# Always close the cargo compartment
floor before a journey.

Seats and stowing
Opening
# Press the release knob in the middle of the
cargo compartment floor and turn to the
OPEN position.
# Pull the loop on the cargo compartment floor
and fold the cargo compartment floor up.
% If the seat cushions are not installed
(→ page 95), the cargo compartment floor
can be completely removed.
Closing
# Reinstall the cargo compartment floor, if nec‐
essary, and fold down.
# Press the release knob and turn to the
CLOSE position.

Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion

#
#

Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.

Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐
dren when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel.

Push release lever 1 down as far as it will
go.
The steering column is unlocked.

98
#
#
#

Seats and stowing
Switching the steering wheel heater on/off

Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the
steering wheel.
Push release lever 1 up as far as it will go.
The steering column is locked.
Check and make sure that the steering col‐
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.

Requirements
R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
The steering wheel can be adjusted when the
power supply is switched off.

1 Adjusts the distance to the steering wheel
2 Adjusts the height
#

Save the settings with the memory function
(→ page 100).
#

To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc‐
tion of arrow 1 or 2.
If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering
wheel heater is switched on.

Seats and stowing
Easy entry and exit feature

Function of the easy entry and exit feature
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving
off while adjusting the easy exit feature
‑ If you drive off while the easy entry and exit
feature is making adjustments, you could
lose control of the vehicle.
# Always wait until the adjustment proc‐
ess is complete before driving off.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when
adjusting the easy entry and exit feature
‑
‑ When the easy entry and exit feature
adjusts the steering wheel, you and other
vehicle occupants – particularly children –
could become trapped.
# ‑ While the easy entry and exit feature
is making adjustments, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the steering wheel.

#
#

Move the adjustment lever of the steer‐
ing wheel if there is a risk of becoming
trapped by the steering wheel.
The adjustment process is stopped.
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles with memory function: you can stop
the adjustment process by pressing one of the
memory position buttons of the memory func‐
tion.
If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the
steering wheel will move upwards in the follow‐
ing situations:
R You switch the ignition off.
R You open the driver's door when the ignition
is switched on.
The steering wheel moves back to the last drive
position in the following cases:
R You switch the ignition on when the driver's
door is closed.

You close the driver's door when the ignition
is switched on.

The last drive position of the steering wheel is
stored in the following situations:
R You switch the ignition off.
R Vehicles with memory function: save the
seat settings via the memory function.
Vehicles with memory function: press one of
the memory function saved position buttons to
stop the adjustment process.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Multimedia system:
,
. î
.
#

Select

100 Seats and stowing
Using the memory function
& WARNING Risk of an accident if memory
function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driv‐
er's side while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made.
# Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station‐
ary.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐
ting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat
or steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped.
# During the setting procedure of the
memory function, ensure that no body
parts are in the sweep of the seat or
the steering wheel.

If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐
ately release the memory function posi‐
tion button.
The adjustment process is stopped.

R
R
R

Steering wheel
Outside mirrors
Head-up Display

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti‐
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
The memory function can be used when the igni‐
tion is switched off.
Storing
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be
stored and called up using the memory function.
The following systems can be selected:
R Seat, backrest and head restraint

Set the seat, the steering wheel, the head-up
display and the outside mirror to the desired
position.

Seats and stowing 101
#

Press memory button M together with one of
the memory position switches 1, 2 or 3.
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are
stored.
To call up: press and hold the relevant pre‐
set position button 1, 2 or 3 until the front
seat, the steering wheel, Head-up Display
and outside mirror is in the stored position.

Stowage areas
Notes on loading the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐
gate is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate.
# Never drive with the tailgate open.

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
# Always stow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
# Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or
too large in the cargo compartment.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly

& WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes
and tailpipe trim

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
all objects they contain.

The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become
very hot. If you come into contact with these
parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.
# Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim.

102 Seats and stowing
#

Allow the vehicle parts to cool down
before you touch them.

The handling characteristics of your vehicle are
dependent on the distribution of the load within
the vehicle. You should bear the following in
mind when loading the vehicle:
R never exceed the permissible gross mass or
the permissible axle loads for the vehicle
(including occupants). The values are speci‐
fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
vehicle's B-pillar.
R the load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
R when transporting objects in the cargo com‐
partment, the combined cargo cover and net
must always be installed (cargo compart‐
ment cover and safety net).
R always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and
distribute the load evenly.

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Locking or unlocking the glove box

Overview of the front stowage compart‐
ments

1 Stowage compartment in the doors
2 Stowage/telephone compartment in the

armrest with multimedia connections and
stowage compartment, e.g. for an MP3
player
3 Stowage compartment in the front center
console with a USB port (depending on the
vehicle's equipment)
4 Glove box

Turn the mechanical key a quarter turn clock‐
wise 2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to
unlock).

Seats and stowing 103
Opening the spectacles compartment

Opening the stowage compartment in the
rear armrest

Rear bench seat through-loading feature
Folding the rear seat backrests forward
& WARNING Risk of injury if the rear
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged

Press button 1.

Press release catch 1 and swing the cover
of the armrest upwards.

If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
R Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
#

Make sure that the seat backrest and
the rear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.

104 Seats and stowing
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked,
this will be shown on the multifunction display
on the instrument cluster.
Requirements:
R The rear seat backrest head restraints are
fully inserted.
The center and outer seat backrests can be fol‐
ded forwards separately.
The right seat backrest can only be folded for‐
wards together with the center seat backrest.
The outer seat backrests are unlocked electri‐
cally. Depending on the equipment, the release
buttons are located either in the load compart‐
ment or beside the seat backrests.
#

Left and right seat backrest: press the
right or left button 1.
The corresponding seat backrest folds for‐
wards.

Seats and stowing 105
Folding the rear seat backrest back
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt
The seat belt could become trapped and thus
damaged when folding back the seat back‐
rest.
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
ped when folding back the seat back‐
rest.
#

#
#

Center seat backrest: pull release 3 of
seat backrest 2 forwards.
Fold seat backrest 2 forwards.

Move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐
wards, if necessary.

Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back
until it engages.
Left and right seat backrests: if the seat
backrest is not engaged and locked, this will
be shown in the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster.
Center seat backrest: if the seat backrest is
not engaged and locked, red lock verification
indicator 2 will be visible.

106 Seats and stowing
Blocking the release catch of the center rear
seat backrest

Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr‐
ests (cargo position)
To enlarge the load compartment, you can adjust
the seat backrests so that they are 10 degrees
steeper (cargo position).

Requirements:
R The left and center seat backrest are
engaged and joined together.
Lock the center seat backrest release catch if
you want to secure the cargo compartment from
unauthorized access. The center seat backrest
can then only be folded forwards together with
the left seat backrest.

#
#

Fold the center and left seat backrest for‐
wards.
To lock: slide catch 1 upwards.
The release mechanism of the center seat
backrest is locked.
To unlock: slide catch 1 downwards.

#
#

Fold the seat backrest forwards
(→ page 103).
Move bar 1 in the direction of the arrow.

Seats and stowing 107
#

Push seat backrest 2 back to bar 1 until
the backrest engages.

Load compartment cover with safety net
(combined cargo cover and net)
Notes on the cargo compartment cover
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects being poorly secured
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load during
sudden changes in direction, braking or in
the event of an accident.
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
# Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie-downs, even if you are using
the cargo compartment cover.

* NOTE Damage to the cargo compart‐
ment cover when loading the vehicle

Extending/retracting the cargo compart‐
ment cover

The cargo compartment cover may be dam‐
aged when loading the vehicle.
# Do not place any objects above the
lower edge of the side windows or on
the cargo compartment cover.
The cargo compartment cover and the safety net
form the combined luggage cover and net.
When the cargo compartment cover is clipped
in, no objects in the cargo compartment should
obstruct the downwards movement of the cover
when the tailgate is closed. The cargo compart‐
ment cover will otherwise be raised again auto‐
matically.

To extend: pull cargo compartment cover 1
back by grab handle 2 and clip it into the
brackets on the left and right.
The cargo compartment cover raises auto‐
matically when the tailgate is opened and
lowers again when the tailgate is closed.

Retraction
Remove the cargo compartment cover 1
from the brackets on the left and right.

108 Seats and stowing
Installing
Slide the combined luggage cover and net
into right-hand bracket 4 up to the stop.
# Place the combined luggage cover and net
into the left-hand bracket and slide it into
catch 1 until the combined luggage cover
and net engages audibly.
Red lock verification indicator 3 must no
longer be visible.

Guide the cargo compartment cover 1 for‐
wards on the grab handle 2 until it is fully
retracted.
The contour plate of the extended cargo com‐
partment cover 1 can be used in three posi‐
tions:
R folded up by 45° (loading position)
R horizontal position (driving position)
R folded down and locked in place (rattle-free
position when driving)
#

Attaching the combined luggage cover and
net to the rear seat backrest

Installing/removing the combined luggage
cover and net
Requirements:
R The cargo compartment cover and safety net
are retracted.
Removing
Remove the combined luggage cover and net
from the cargo compartment, or from the lefthand rear door if the seat backrests are folded
forwards.

#
#
#

Press button 2.
Fold the combined luggage cover and net
backwards with the seat backrest folded up.
First, detach the combined luggage cover
and net from left-hand catch 1 and then
remove it from right-hand bracket 4.

* NOTE Damage to the combined luggage
cover and net when attaching it to the
seat backrest
When the combined luggage cover and net is
attached to the seat backrest, it may be
damaged when the seat backrest is folded
back.
# Do not fold the seat backrests back.
Requirements:
R The seat backrests are folded forwards.

Seats and stowing 109
Attaching the safety net
& WARNING Risk of injury due to poorly
secured objects

Insert combined luggage cover and net 2
into both guides 1 and push it up to the
stop in the direction of the arrow.

To disassemble the combined luggage cover and
net, follow the instructions in reverse order.

Safety net without cargo compartment
enlargement

On its own, the safety net cannot secure or
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or
heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load during
sudden changes in direction, braking or in
the event of an accident. There is an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
# Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using lashing material, even if you are
using the safety net.
For safety reasons, always use a safety net when
transporting a load.
Damaged safety nets can no longer fulfill their
protective functions and must be replaced. Visit
a qualified specialist workshop.

#
#

Pull the safety net from the rear bench seat
back to the rear using tab 1.
Hook the safety net into eyelets 2, first on
the left, then on the right.

110 Seats and stowing
Safety net with cargo compartment enlarge‐
ment

Objects or items of luggage could be thrown
around and thereby hit vehicle occupants
when braking or abruptly changing direc‐
tions.
# Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks.
# Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(→ page 101).
The bag hook can bear a maximum load of
6.6 lbs (3 kg). Do not use it to secure a load.
1 Tie-down eyes

#
#

Guide the safety net upwards on the tab 1.
Hook the safety net into the eyelets 2.

Overview of the tie-down eyes
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(→ page 101).

Overview of bag hooks
& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag
hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage.

Seats and stowing 111

1 Bag hook

Hooking the luggage net
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown

around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
# Always stow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
# Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or
too large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

#
#

Vehicles with a cargo compartment package:
insert the brackets with the tie-down eyes
into the load rails (→ page 112).
Fold up the tie-down eyes.
Hook luggage net 1 into the front and rear
tie-down eyes.

EASY-PACK load-securing kit
Notes on the EASY-PACK load-securing kit
The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to
use your cargo compartment for a variety of pur‐
poses. The components are located in the stow‐
age space under the cargo compartment floor.

112 Seats and stowing
Inserting the brackets into the load rail

Press locking button 4.
Bracket 1 has been secured in the selected
position in the load rail 5.
If necessary, fold tie-down eye 2 upwards.

Installing or removing the luggage holder
Requirements:
Select a load size that can be secured by the
luggage holder.

The luggage holder is used to secure loads
against the side wall of the load compartment to
prevent them from moving around.
You can subject the load holder to a maximum
load of 15.4 lbs (7 kg).
1 Bag containing the brackets and luggage

holder

2 Telescopic rod

#
#
#

Insert bracket 1 into the center of load rail
5.
Press release knob 3 and slide bracket 1
into the desired position in load rail 5.
Let go of release knob 3.

Seats and stowing 113
Installing
# Press and hold release knob 3 of first
bracket 5.
# Insert luggage holder 2 into first bracket 5
and slide it downwards until it engages.
# Let go of release knob 3.
# Repeat the process with second bracket 5
and the handle.
Loading
Press and hold release knob 1 on luggage
holder 2.
# Pull the belt on the handle out.
# Place the load between the strap and the
load compartment side wall.
# Press and hold release knob 1 on luggage
holder 2.
# Hold the belt on the handle firmly and slowly
guide it back until the load has been
secured.
# Let go of release knob 1.
# On both brackets 5, press locking button
4.
#

#
#
#
#

Insert two brackets 5 into the load rail
(→ page 112).
Press and hold release knob 1 on luggage
holder 2.
Pull the belt on the handle out slightly.
Let go of release knob 1.

To remove: press release knob 3 on
respective bracket 5 and remove luggage
holder 2 by pulling it out.

Installing or removing the telescopic rod
Installing
The telescopic rod is used to secure loads
against the rear seats to prevent them from
moving around.

114 Seats and stowing
#

#
#
#
#

Insert one bracket 2 into both the left and
right load rails and slide it to the desired
position.
Press and hold release knob 3.
Insert the telescopic rod 1 into brackets 2
and slide it downwards until it engages.
On both brackets 5, press locking button
4.
To remove: press release knob 3 on
respective bracket 2 and remove telescopic
rod 1 by pulling it upwards and out.

Always close the cargo compartment
floor before a journey.

Opening

Fold out hook on the underside of the cargo
compartment floor.
Clip hook into drip rail.

Closing
Unhook the hook from the drip rail and fas‐
ten it to the bracket on the underside of the
load compartment floor.
# Fold the load compartment floor downwards
and then press handle 1 down until it
engages.
#

Attaching the roof rack

Opening or closing the stowage space under
the cargo compartment floor

& WARNING Risk of injury by exceeding
the maximum roof load

& WARNING Risk of injury due to an open
cargo compartment floor
If you drive when the cargo compartment
floor is open, objects could be thrown around
and thereby strike vehicle occupants. There
is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in direc‐
tion.

#
#

Pull handle 1 upwards.
Lift the load compartment floor upwards by
handle 1.

When you load the roof, the vehicle center of
gravity rises and the driving characteristics
change.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the
driving characteristics, as well as the steer‐
ing and braking, will be greatly impaired.

Seats and stowing 115
#

Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from nonapproved roof racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof racks
which have not been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
# Only use roof racks tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
# Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that when the roof rack is fitted:
R The sliding sunroof can be fully
raised.
R The tailgate can be opened com‐
pletely.
# Position the load on the roof rack in
such a way that the vehicle will not sus‐
tain damage even when it is in motion.

* NOTE Damage to the panoramic sliding
sunroof when a roof rack is fitted
The panoramic sliding sunroof may be dam‐
aged by the roof rack if you attempt to open
it when the roof rack is fitted.
# Do not open the panoramic sliding sun‐
roof if a roof rack is fitted.
In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle
interior, you can raise the panoramic sliding
sunroof.
#
#

Secure the roof rack to the roof railing.
Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.

Cup holder
Installing the cup holder in or removing it
from the center console (automatic trans‐
mission)
& WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the
vehicle is moving
The cup holder cannot secure containers
while the vehicle is moving.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is
moving, the container may be flung around
and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu‐
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
could be distracted from traffic conditions
and you may lose control of the vehicle.
# Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
# Only use the cup holder for containers
of the right size.
# Close the container, particularly if the
liquid is hot.

116 Seats and stowing
Opening the cup holder in the rear armrest
* NOTE Damage to the cup holder
When the rear armrest is folded back the cup
holder could become damaged.
# Only fold the rear armrest back when
the cup holder is closed.

#
#

Press cup holder 1 or 2.
Place a container in or remove a container
from cup holder 1 or 2.

Ashtray and cigarette lighter
Using the ashtray in the front center console
* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart‐
ment under the ashtray

To remove: slide catch 2 forwards and pull
out cup holder 1.
# To install: insert cup holder 1 and slide
back catch 2.
% The cup holder rubber mat can be removed
for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm
water.
#

The stowage compartment under the ashtray
is not heat resistant and could be damaged if
you rest a lit cigarette on it.
# Make sure that the ashtray is fully
engaged.

Seats and stowing 117
Using the rear ashtray

Using the cigarette lighter
& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
hot cigarette lighter

#
#
#

To open: push up the cover 2 of the ash‐
tray on its right or left side.
To remove the insert: press insert 1
upwards slightly and pull it out upwards.
To refit the insert: press insert 1 into the
holder until it engages.

#
#

To open: pull cover 2 out by its top handle
edge.
To remove the insert: push ribbing 3 from
the left side and pull insert 1 upwards and
out.
To install the insert: install insert 1 from
above and press down into the holder until it
engages.

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the ciga‐
rette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials may ignite
if:
R you drop the hot cigarette lighter
R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
#
#
#

Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette
lighter is out of reach of children.
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.

Requirements:
R the ignition is switched on.

118 Seats and stowing

Press in cigarette lighter 1.
The cigarette lighter will pop out automati‐
cally when the heating element is red-hot.

Sockets
12 V socket in the front center console
Requirements
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 watts (15 A).

Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the
plug of the device.

If you have connected a device to the 12 V
socket, leave the cover of the stowage compart‐
ment open.
Using the 12 V socket in the rear passenger
compartment
Requirements
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 watts (15 A).

#
#

Briefly press the trim element of cover 2.
Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the
plug of the device.

Using the 12 V socket in the front passenger
footwell
Requirements
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 watts (15 A).

Seats and stowing 119

Lift up socket cap 1.

Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger
compartment

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐
rect handling of the socket

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐
aged connecting cables or sockets

You could receive an electric shock:
R if you reach into the socket.
R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket.

If a suitable device is connected, the 115 V
socket will be carrying a high voltage. If the
connecting cable or the 115 V socket is
pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet,
you could receive an electric shock.
# Only use dry and damage-free connect‐
ing cables.
# When the ignition is switched off,
ensure that the 115 V socket is dry.
# If the 115 V socket is damaged or gets
pulled out of the paneling, immediately
have the socket checked or replaced at
a qualified specialized workshop.
# Never plug the connecting cable into a
115 V socket that is damaged or has
been pulled out of the trim.

Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.

Requirements
R Only connect devices with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards specific to
the country you are in.
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
150 watts.
R Do not use multiple socket outlets.

120 Seats and stowing
Using the 12 V socket in the load compart‐
ment

USB port in the rear passenger compartment

Requirements
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 watts (15 A).

#
#

Open flap 3.
Insert the plug of the device into 115 V
socket 1.
When the on-board electrical system voltage
is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up.

You can charge a USB device, e.g. a mobile
phone, at USB ports 1 using a suitable charg‐
ing cable. The devices can be charged with 5 V
(2.1 A) and when the ignition is switched on.
#

Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the
plug of the device.

Seats and stowing 121
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and
connection with the exterior antenna
Notes on wireless charging of the mobile
phone
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
# Always stow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.

#
#

Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or
too large in the cargo compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of fire from placing
objects in the mobile phone stowage
compartment
If you place objects in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, they may heat up
excessively and even catch fire.
# Do not place additional objects, espe‐
cially those mode of metal, in the
mobile phone stowage compartment.

* NOTE Damage to objects caused by
placing them in the mobile phone stow‐
age compartment
If you place objects in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, these may be dam‐
aged by electromagnetic fields.
# Do not place credit cards, storage
media or other objects sensitive to
electromagnetic fields in the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone
stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage
compartment, the compartment may be
damaged.
# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
R

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's
exterior antenna via the charging module.

122 Seats and stowing
R

The charging function and wireless connec‐
tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's
exterior antenna are only available if the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Small mobile phones may not be able to be
charged in every position of the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in
the mobile phone stowage compartment may
not be able to be charged or connected with
the vehicle's exterior antenna.
The mobile phone may heat up during the
charging process. This depends on the appli‐
cations (apps) currently running.
The mobile phone can be cooled in the
mobile phone stowage compartment when
the air conditioning system is switched on.
The cooling output in the mobile phone stow‐
age compartment is highest when the con‐
troller in the glove box is closed.
To ensure more efficient charging and con‐
nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna,
remove the protective cover from the mobile

phone. Protective covers which are designed
for wireless charging are excluded.
When charging, the mat should be used if
possible.

Wireless charging of the mobile phone in the
front
Requirements
R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone).
% A list of Qi-compatible mobile phones can be
found at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
connect.

Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐
ter of mat 1 as possible with the display
facing upwards.
When the charging symbol is shown in the
multimedia system, the mobile phone is
being charged.
Malfunctions during the charging process are
shown in the multimedia system display.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.
using clean, lukewarm water.

Installing or removing the floor mats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.

Seats and stowing 123
#

To install: press stud 1 into holder 2.

To remove: pull the floor mat off the holders
2.

124 Light and visibility
Exterior lighting
Lighting systems and your responsibility

Light switch
Operating the light switch

5 L Low beam/high beam
6 R Switches the rear fog light on or off

When low beam is activated, the T indicator
lamp for the parking lights is deactivated and
replaced by the L indicator lamp for the low
beam.
# Always park your vehicle safely and in a welllit area, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations.

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are
only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible
for correct vehicle illumination in accordance
with the prevailing light and visibility conditions,
legal requirements and traffic situation.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating
the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of
hours puts a strain on the battery.
# Where possible, switch on the
right X or left W parking light.
1
2
3
4

W Left-hand parking lights
X Right-hand parking lights
T Parking lights and license plate lighting
Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)

In the case of severe battery discharging, the
parking lights or standing lights are automati‐
cally switched off to facilitate the next engine
start.

Light and visibility 125
The exterior lighting (except parking and stand‐
ing lights) switches off automatically when the
driver's door is opened.
R Observe the notes on surround lighting
(→ page 128).
Automatic driving lights function
The parking lights, low beam and daytime run‐
ning lights are switched on automatically
depending on the ignition status, whether the
engine is running and the light conditions.

Activating/deactivating the rear fog light

Operating the light combination switch

Requirements
R The light switch is in the L or Ã posi‐
tion.
#

Press the R button.

Please observe the country-specific laws on the
use of rear fog lights.

& WARNING Risk of accident when the low
beam is switched off in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low
beam may not be switched on automatically
if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor
visibility such as spray.
# In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
are responsible for vehicle lighting.

1
2
3
4

High beam
Turn signal light, right
High-beam flasher
Turn signal light, left

Pull or push the combination switch in the
relevant direction following the arrow.

126 Light and visibility
Switching on the high beam manually
# Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
Turn the light switch to the L position.
R Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow 1.
When the high beam is activated, the indicator
lamp for low beam is deactivated and replaced
by the indicator lamp for the high beam.
# To switch off the high beam: move the
combination switch back to its starting posi‐
tion.
# To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly up to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The corresponding turn signal light flashes
three times.
# To indicate for a duration: press the combi‐
nation switch beyond the pressure point in
the direction of arrow 2 or 4.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning
light

Press button 1.

Cornering light
Cornering light function

The cornering light improves the illumination of
the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning
direction, enabling better visibility on tight
bends, for example. It can be activated only
when the low beam is switched on.
The function is active:
R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
the turn signal light is switched on or the
steering wheel is turned.

Light and visibility 127
R

At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and
45 mph (70 km/h) when the steering wheel
is turned.

Traffic circle and intersection function: the
cornering light is activated on both sides through
an evaluation of the current GPS position of the
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle
has left the traffic circle or the intersection.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Function of Adaptive Highbeam Assist
& WARNING Risk of accident despite
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog‐
nize the following road users:
R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐
trians
R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists
R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
with their own lighting, or may recognize
them too late.
In these or similar situations, the automatic
high beam is not deactivated or is activated
despite the presence of other road users.
# Always observe the traffic carefully and
switch off the high beam in good time.
System limitations
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Detection may be restricted if:
R Visibility is impaired, for example in fog,
heavy rain or snow.
R There is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to
the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐
tions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist switches automati‐
cally between:
R Low beam
R High beam
At speeds above 19 mph (30 km/h):
If no other road users are detected, high
beam is automatically switched on.

128 Light and visibility
High beam switches off automatically:
R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h).
R If other road users are detected.
R If street lighting is sufficient.

Switching the daytime running lights on/off

At speeds above approx. 31 mph (50 km/h):
R The headlamp range of low beam is regulated
automatically based on the distance to other
road users.

The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Multimedia system:
,
. ÷

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off
To switch on: turn the light switch to
the Ã position.
# Switch on the high beam using the combina‐
tion switch.
When the high beam is switched on automat‐
ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp in
the multifunction display comes on.
# To switch off: switch off the high beam
using the combination switch.
#

Multimedia system:
,
. ÷

Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay
time

vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle,
the surround lighting is switched off and auto‐
matic driving lights are activated.
Interior lighting
Adjusting the interior lighting
Front overhead control panel

Set the switch-off delay time.

Setting the surround lighting
Multimedia system:
,
. ÷
#

Switch the function on O or off ª.

If the surround lighting is switched on, the exte‐
rior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after the

1
2
3
4
5

p Front left reading lamp
| Automatic interior lighting control
c Front interior lighting
u Rear interior lighting
p Front right reading lamp

Light and visibility 129
#

To switch on or off: press button 1 - 5.

Set a color.

Adjusting the brightness
Select
.
# Set a brightness value.

Control panel in the grab handle

Activating the brightness for zones
Select
.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
The
,
and
zones can be set
separately.
% Setting brightness zones is not available for
the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
#

1 p Rear reading lamp
#

To switch on or off: press button 1.

Adjusting the ambient lighting
Multimedia system:
,
. ÷
Setting the color
# Select
.

Activating multi-colored lighting
Select
.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
There are ten preset color combinations
available.

Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
The chosen color combination changes in a
predefined rhythm.

Activating climate-dependent lighting
Select
.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
The color of the ambient lighting adapts to
suit the air conditioning setting.
#

Activating welcome lighting
Select
.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
When the vehicle is unlocked, a special inte‐
rior lighting sequence runs.
#

Activating multi-colored animation
# Select
.

Setting the interior lighting switch-off delay
time
Multimedia system:
,
. ÷
#

Set the switch-off delay time.

130 Light and visibility
Windshield wiper and windshield washer
system
Switching the windshield wipers on/off

4 ° Continuous wiping, slow
5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
#
#

1 g Windshield wipers off
2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal
3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Turn the combination switch to the correct
position 1 - 5.
Single wipe/washing: push the button on
the combination switch in the direction of
arrow 1.
R í Single wipe
R î Wipes with washer fluid

1
2
3
4

b Wipes with washer fluid
° Switches on intermittent wiping
g Switches off intermittent wiping
b Wipes with washer fluid

Light and visibility 131
#

Turn the 1 è switch to the correct posi‐
tion 1 - 4.
If the rear window wiper is switched on, the
è symbol appears on the instrument clus‐
ter.

Removing the wiper blades
# Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐
shield.

#
#

Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the removal position.
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
arrow 4 away from the wiper arm.

Fitting the wiper blades

Changing the windshield wiper blades
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the windshield wipers are switched on
while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can
be trapped by the wiper arm.
# Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the
wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms to a vertical position
# Set the windshield wipers to the ° slow
continuous wiping position on the combina‐
tion switch.
# As soon as the wiper arms are vertical rela‐
tive to the hood, switch off the ignition.

Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐
tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm to
the stop.

Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper
arm in the direction of arrow 1.

132 Light and visibility
#
#
#

Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the locking position.
Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly.
Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐
shield.

Maintenance display

Remove protective film 1 of the mainte‐
nance display on the tip of the newly instal‐
led wiper blades.

Replacing the rear window wiper blades
Removing the wiper blade

If the color of the maintenance display changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
% The duration of the color change varies
depending on the usage conditions.

#
#
#

Switch the ignition off.
Fold wiper arm 4 away from the rear win‐
dow.
Press both release clips 2.

Light and visibility 133
#
#

Fold wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow
3 away from wiper arm 4.
Remove wiper blade 1 in the direction of
arrow 5.

Installing the wiper blades

#
#

Fold wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow
3 onto the wiper arm until retaining clips
2 engage in bracket 4.
Make sure that wiper blade 1 sits correctly.
Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win‐
dow.

Mirrors
Operating the outside mirrors
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion

Position new wiper blade 1 with recess 6
on lug 5.

Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the

steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐
judgment of distances when using the
passenger mirror
The outside mirror on the front passenger
side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The
objects in view are in fact closer than they
appear.
As a result, you may misjudge the distance
between you and the road user driving
behind you, for example, when changing
lanes.
# Therefore, always look over your shoul‐
der in order to ensure that you are
aware of the actual distance between
you and the road users driving behind
you.

134 Light and visibility
Folding the outside mirrors in/out

Adjusting the outside mirrors
Press the 3 or 4 buttons to select the out‐
side mirror to be set.
# Press the 2 button to set the position of the
mirror glass.
#

Engaging the outside mirrors
Press and hold button 1.
You will hear a click and the mirror audibly
engage in position. The outside mirror is set
in the correct position.

Automatic anti-glare mirrors function
& WARNING Risk of burns and poisoning
due to the anti-glare mirror electrolyte
Briefly press switch 1.
% If the battery has been disconnected or com‐
pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must
be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror
folding function work properly.

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an
automatic anti-glare mirror breaks.
The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita‐
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or
be swallowed.

If you come into contact with electro‐
lyte, observe the following:
R Rinse the electrolyte from your skin
and seek medical attention immedi‐
ately.
R If electrolyte comes into contact
with your eyes, rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water and seek
medical attention immediately.
R If the electrolyte is swallowed,
immediately rinse your mouth out
thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
R Immediately change out of clothing
which has come into contact with
electrolyte.
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐
ror on the driver's side automatically go into
anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the
inside rearview mirror.

Light and visibility 135
System limitations
The system does not go into anti-glare mode in
the following situations:
R the engine is switched off.
R reverse gear is engaged
R the interior lighting is switched on

The front-passenger outside mirror moves back
to its original position in the following situations:
R if you shift the transmission to another trans‐
mission position
R at speeds greater than 9 mph (15 km/h)
R if you press the button for the outside mirror
on the driver's side

Storing the parking position of the
passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
Storing

Function of the front-passenger outside mir‐
ror parking position
% The parking position is available only in vehi‐
cles with a memory function.
The parking position makes parking easier.
The front-passenger outside mirror tilts down‐
wards and shows the rear wheel on the front
passenger side in the following situations:
R the parking position is stored (→ page 135)
R the passenger mirror is selected
R reverse gear is engaged

#
#
#

Select the passenger outside mirror using
button 2.
Engage reverse gear.
Move the passenger outside mirror into the
desired parking position using button 1.

136 Light and visibility
Calling up
# Select the passenger outside mirror using
button 2.
# Engage reverse gear.
The passenger outside mirror moves to the
stored parking position.

Operating the sun visors
Using the single sun visor

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror
folding function
#

Multimedia system:
,
. î
.
#

Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

#
#

Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1
down.
Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to
the side.

Vehicles with an extendable sun visor: slide
sun visor 1 horizontally as required.

Using the additional sun visor

Light and visibility 137
#

Vehicles with an additional sun visor: fold
additional sun visor 2 down.

Infrared reflective windshield

The infrared reflective windshield is coated and
prevents an excessive build-up of heat in the
vehicle interior.
The coating shields the vehicle interior against
radio waves up into the gigahertz range.
Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys‐
tems, can only be mounted on areas of the wind‐
shield which are permeable to radio waves 1.

Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi‐
ble from outside the vehicle when the windshield
is illuminated using an external light source.

138 Climate control
Overview of climate control systems
Dual-zone climate control panel overview
The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that
the current function is activated.

7 ¤ To switch the rear window heater

on/off

8 0 To activate or deactivate synchroniza‐

tion (→ page 140)

9 g To activate/deactivate air-recirculation

mode (→ page 141)

A ¿ To switch the A/C function on/off

(→ page 139)

B w To set the front passenger side tem‐

perature

3-zone automatic climate control panel over‐
view
1 w To set the driver's side temperature
2 _ To set the air distribution
3 H To set the airflow or switch off climate

control

4 Ã To set climate control to automatic

mode (→ page 139)

5 ¬ To defrost the windshield
6 t To call up the air conditioning menu

The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that
the current function is activated.

1 w To set the driver's side temperature
2 _ To set the driver's side air distribution
3 H To set the airflow or switch off climate

control

4 Ã To set climate control to automatic

mode (→ page 139)

5 ¬ To defrost the windshield
6 ! To call up the air conditioning menu

To switch the residual heat on or off
(→ page 141)
7 ¤ To switch the rear window heater
on/off
8 ¿ To switch the A/C function on/off
(→ page 139)

Climate control 139
9 g To switch air-recirculation mode on/off

(→ page 141)
A _ To set the front passenger side air dis‐
tribution
B w To set the front passenger side tem‐
perature
Rear operating unit

Operating the climate control system
Activating/deactivating climate control
To activate: set the airflow to level 1 or
higher using the H button.
# To deactivate: set the airflow to level 0
using the H button.
% If climate control is deactivated, the win‐
dows can fog up more quickly. Deactivate
climate control only briefly.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via
the control panel
The A/C function cools, heats and dehumidifies
the interior air in the vehicle.
# Press the ¿ button.
1 To set the temperature
2 Display
3 To set the airflow

Deactivate the A/C function only briefly other‐
wise the windows can fog up more quickly.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is
not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function
using the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
,
. b
.
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies
the vehicle's interior air.
# Switch the function on O or off ª.
Setting climate control to automatic
In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐
trolled and maintained at a constant level by the
air supply.
# Press the Ã button.
# To switch to manual mode: press the H
or _ button.

140 Climate control
Climate style

Overview of air distribution settings

Climate style function
In automatic mode, you can select the following
climate style settings for the driver's and front
passenger areas:
R FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting
R MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting
R DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and
draft-free setting

The symbols in the display indicate which vents
the airflow is being directed through:
R ¯ demister vents
R P center and side air vents
R O footwell vents
R S center, side and footwell vents
R a defroster and footwell vents
R _ all vents
R b defroster, middle and side air vents
R W automatic air distribution

Adjusting the climate style settings
Multimedia system:
,
. b

Select
,
or
.
% In order to feel the effect of the climate
style, the Ã function must be active
(→ page 139).

Setting the rear climate control using the
multimedia system
Multimedia system:
,
. b
.

Setting the airflow
Select
.
# Set the airflow.
#

Setting the temperature
# Select
.
# Set the temperature.
Activating/deactivating the climate control
synchronization function via the control
panel
Climate control can be set centrally using the
synchronization function. The temperature and
air distribution setting for the driver's side is
adopted automatically for the front passenger
side.
# Press the 0 button.
The synchronization function is deactivated if the
settings for one of the other climate zones are
changed.

Climate control 141
Activating/deactivating the climate control
synchronization function using the multime‐
dia system
Multimedia system:
,
. b
.

Climate control can be set centrally using the
synchronization function. The temperature set‐
ting is automatically adopted for all climate
zones.
# Switch the function on O or off ª.
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
# Press the Ã button.
# If the windows continue to fog up: press the
¬ button.
Windows fogged up on the outside
Switch on the windshield wiper.
# Press the Ã button.
#

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
#

Press the g button.
The interior air will be recirculated.

Activating and deactivating ionization
Multimedia system:
,
. b

Air-recirculation mode is switched off automati‐
cally.
% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on
air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Ionization cleans and refreshes the interior air of
the vehicle. The ionization of the interior air is
odorless.
# Switch the function on O or off ª.

Switching the residual heat on or off

Fragrance system

Requirements:
R The vehicle is parked.

Setting the fragrance system

It is possible to make use of the residual heat
from the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐
ing the front compartment of the vehicle for
approximately 30 minutes.
# To switch on: press the ! button.
Residual heat is switched off automatically.

Requirements
R Automatic climate control is activated.
R The glove box is closed.
Multimedia system:
,
. b

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐
grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla‐
con located in the glove box.

142 Climate control
#

To set the intensity: select
or .

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of full
flacons

Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra‐
grance system
& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per‐
fume
If children open the flacon, they could drink
the liquid perfume or it could come into con‐
tact with their eyes.
# Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
perfume has been drunk.
# If liquid perfume comes into contact
with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes
with clean water.
# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

Full flacons must not be disposed
of with household waste.
#

Full flacons must be taken to
a harmful substance collection point.
1 Cap
2 Flacon
#
#

To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as
far as it will go.
To remove: pull out the flacon.

If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety
notices on the perfume packaging.

Climate control 143
Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill
it.
Refillable flacon
# Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.
# Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.
(15 ml).
# Screw the cap back on to the flacon.
Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the
same perfume. Observe the separate informa‐
tion sheet attached to the flacon.
Information on the windshield heater
The windshield heater is switched on automati‐
cally if the ¬ button is activated.
After the vehicle is started the windshield heater
is switched on automatically as needed.

Air vents
Adjusting the front air vents
& WARNING ‑ Danger of burns or frostbite
due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents.
This could result in burns or frostbite in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents.
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance to
the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.

To open or close: turn controller 2 to
clockwise or anti-clockwise as far as it will
go.
To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1
in the center and move it up or down or to
the left or right.

144 Climate control
Adjusting the rear air vents

#
#

Close the air vent when you heat the
vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the
air vent and switch on the A/C func‐
tion.

Requirements:
R Automatic climate control is activated.

#
#

To open or close: turn controller 2 to the
left or right as far as it will go.
To adjust the air direction: hold rear air
vent 1 in the center and move it up or down
or to the left or right.

Opening/closing the air vent in the glove box
* NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive
objects in the glove box
Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the
glove box may be damaged by the air vent
located inside it.

1 Air vent controller
2 Air vent
#

To open or close: turn controller 1 to the
left or right.

Driving and parking 145
Driving
Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Observe the notes on the following topics in the
Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recognize
dangers.
R Rear axle locking differential
R AMG Performance exhaust system
R AMG ceramic high-performance composite
brake system
R RACE START
R DRIFT MODE
R AMG adaptive sport suspension system

Switching on the power supply or ignition
using the Start/Stop button
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users
R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by
oncoming traffic
R Operate vehicle equipment
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example, by:
R Releasing the parking brake
R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j
R Starting the engine.
#

Never leave children and animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
Keep the SmartKey out of the reach of
children.

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases causes poisoning.
# Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by flam‐
mable material on the exhaust system
Flammable materials brought in by either ani‐
mals or environmental influences may ignite
if they come into contact with hot parts of
the engine or exhaust system.
# Therefore, check regularly that there
are no flammable materials in the

146 Driving and parking
engine compartment or on the exhaust
system.
Requirements:
R The SmartKey is located in the vehicle and
the SmartKey battery is not discharged.

To switch on the power supply: press but‐
ton 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) once.
You can activate the windshield wiper, for
example.

The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐
lowing conditions are met:
R you open the driver's door.
R you press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada)
twice.
To switch on the ignition: press button 1
(USA) or 2 (Canada) twice.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the
following conditions is met:
R You do not start the vehicle within
15 minutes.
The transmission is in position j.
or
The electric parking brake is applied.
R You press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada)
once.
#

Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐
ton
Requirements:
R The SmartKey is located in the vehicle and
the SmartKey battery is not discharged.
#
#
#

Shift the transmission to position j or i.
Depress the brake pedal and push button 1
(USA) or 2 (Canada) once.
If the vehicle does not start: switch off nonessential consumers and press button 1
(USA) or 2 (Canada) once.
If the vehicle still does not start and the
display message also
appears in the multifunction display: start
the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

You can switch off the engine while driving by
pressing button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) for
about three seconds. Be sure to observe the
safety notes under "Driving instructions".

Driving and parking 147
Starting the vehicle in emergency operation
mode
If the vehicle does not start and the

display message appears in the multifunction
display, you can start the vehicle in emergency
operation mode.

must be located in marked space 2 during
the entire journey.
Have SmartKey 1 checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start:
Leave SmartKey 1 in marked space 2.
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle
using the start/stop button.
# Start the vehicle using the start/stop button.
% You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with the start/stop button.
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv‐
ices

#
#
#

Ensure that marked space 2 is empty.
Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring.
Lay SmartKey 1 in marked space 2.
The vehicle will start after a short while.
If you remove SmartKey 1 from marked
space 2, the engine starts again. For fur‐
ther vehicle starts, however, SmartKey 1

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before
starting a journey
% This function is not available in all countries.
If you start the vehicle via your smartphone, the
previously selected air conditioning setting is
active.

Ensure the following before starting the engine:
The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
R It is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked.
R The fuel tank is sufficiently filled.
R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
R

Starting the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐
ment due to unintentional starting of the
engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during
service or maintenance work.
# Always secure the engine against unin‐
tentional starting before carrying out
maintenance or repair work.
Requirements:
R park position j is selected.
R the anti-theft alarm system is not activated.

148 Driving and parking
R
R
R
R
R
#

R
R
R
R

the panic alarm is not activated.
the hazard warning lights are switched off.
the hood is closed.
the doors are closed and locked.
the windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
Start the vehicle using the smartphone:
after every vehicle start, the engine runs for
ten minutes.
you can carry out a maximum of two consec‐
utive starting attempts.
you can stop the vehicle again at any time.
further information can be found in the
smartphone app.

Securing the engine against starting before
carrying out maintenance or repair work:
# Switch on the hazard warning lights.
or
# Unlock the doors.
or
# Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.

Running-in notes
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
To preserve the engine during the first
1,000 miles (1,500 km):
R drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds.
R drive in drive program C or E.
R change gear before the rev counter needle is
Ô of the way to the red area of the rev coun‐
ter.
R do not shift down a gear manually in order to
brake.
R avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle.
R do not depress the accelerator pedal past
the pressure point (kickdown).
R only increase the engine speed gradually and
accelerate the vehicle to full speed after
1,000 miles (1,500 km).

This also applies when the engine or parts of the
drivetrain have been replaced.
Please also observe the following running-in
notes:
R In certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐
tain distance is driven after the vehicle has
been delivered or after repairs. Full system
effectiveness is not achieved until the end of
this teach-in process.
R Brake pads, brake discs and tires that are
either new or have been replaced only ach‐
ieve optimum braking effect and grip after
several hundred kilometers of driving. Com‐
pensate for the reduced braking effect by
applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Notes on driving
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

Driving and parking 149
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
# Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
unsuitable footwear
Operation of the pedals may be restricted
due to unsuitable footwear such as:
R Shoes with platform soles
R Shoes with high heels
R Slippers
#

When driving always wear suitable
shoes in order to be able to operate the
pedals safely.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
ignition being switched off whilst the
vehicle is in motion

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
accident due to shifting down on slippery
road surfaces

If you switch off the ignition whilst the vehi‐
cle is in motion safety-relevant functions will
be restricted or no longer available. This may
effect the power steering system and brake
force boosting, for example.
You will need to use considerably more force
to steer and brake.
# Do not switch off the ignition whilst the
vehicle is in motion.

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
# Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
faces to increase the engine braking
effect.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐
sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐
cle. This is the case if the vehicle gets stuck
in snow, for example.
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the
engine or the stationary heater are run‐
ning.

150 Driving and parking
#

Open a window on the windward side of
the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup‐
ply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to being under the influence of alco‐
hol and drugs while driving
Driving when under the influence of alcohol
and/or drugs is an extremely dangerous
combination. Even small quantities of alcohol
or drugs may affect your reflexes, perception
and judgment.
The probability of a serious or even fatal acci‐
dent greatly increases if you drive when
under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
# Do not drink alcohol or take drugs while
driving, and do not allow anyone to
drive who has been drinking alcohol or
taking drugs.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal
when driving, the brake system may over‐
heat.
This increases the braking distance and the
brake system may even fail.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
# Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time
while driving.
* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by
continuously depressing the brake pedal
#
#

Do not depress the brake pedal contin‐
uously whilst driving.
To use the braking effect of the engine,
shift to a lower gear in good time.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and the
engine when pulling away
#

Do not warm up the engine when the
vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐
ately.
Avoid high engine speeds and driving at
full throttle until the engine has reached
operating temperature.
Do not allow the wheels to spin.

* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is
misfiring.
Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐
lytic converter.
# Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly.
# Have the cause rectified immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving and parking 151
Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads:
R due to salt build-up on the brake discs and
brake lining, the braking distance can
increase considerably or result in braking
only on one side.
R maintain a much greater safe distance to the
vehicle in front.
To prevent salt build-up:
R brake occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions.
R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next
journey.
ECO start/stop function
Operating the ECO start/stop function
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.

The engine is automatically switched off if the
following conditions are met:
R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐
mission position h or i.
R All vehicle conditions for an automatic
engine stop are met.

do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is
automatically switched off after one minute.
Deactivating or activating the ECO start/
stop function

The è symbol appears in the multifunction
display when the vehicle is stationary.
The engine is restarted automatically if:
R You release the brake pedal in transmission
position h when the HOLD function is not
active.
R You shift from transmission position j.
R You engage transmission position h or k.
R You depress the accelerator pedal.
R You change the vehicle level.
R An automatic engine start is necessary.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/
stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐
ing tone sounds. The
display message
also appears in the multifunction display. If you

Press button 1.
If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/
stop function is switched on.

152 Driving and parking
% Depending on the model, the button may
also be located at a different position in the
center console.
Function of the ECO display
The ECO display summarizes the driving style
from the start of the journey to its completion
and assists you in achieving the most economi‐
cal driving style.
You can influence consumption if you:
R drive with particular care
R drive the vehicle in drive program E
R observe the gearshift recommendations

The inner segment lights up green and the outer
segment fills up:
R 1 Moderate acceleration
R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling
R 3 Consistent speed
The inner segment is grey and the outer seg‐
ment empties:
R 1 Sporty acceleration
R 2 Heavy braking
R 3 Fluctuations in speed
You have driven economically when:
the three outer segments are completely fil‐
led simultaneously.
R the ECO display border lights up.

The additional range achieved as a result of your
driving style in comparison to a driver with a
very sporty driving style is shown under
. The range displayed does not indicate a
fixed reduction in consumption.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
between the following drive programs:
R I (Individual): individual settings
R S+ (Sport Plus): particularly sporty driving
style
R S (Sport): sporty driving style
R C (Comfort): comfortable and economical
driving style
R E (Eco): particularly economical driving style
Depending on the drive program selected, the
following vehicle characteristics will change:
R Drive system
Engine and transmission management
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R ESP®

Driving and parking 153
R
R

Suspension
Steering

Selecting the drive program

Configuring drive program I

Multimedia system:
,
. e

.
#

Select the individual setting.

Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system:
,
. e
# Select
.
Displaying engine data

Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards
or backwards.
The drive program selected appears in the
multifunction display.

Sea level
Fuel grade
Outside temperature

Multimedia system:
,
. e
# Select
.
% The values for engine output and engine tor‐
que may deviate from the nominal values.
Items that can influence this are, for exam‐
ple:
R Engine speed

Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users
R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by
oncoming traffic
R Operate vehicle equipment

154 Driving and parking
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example, by:
R Releasing the parking brake
R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j
R Starting the engine.
#
#

pedal firmly and do not accelerate at
the same time.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans‐
mission position. The current transmission posi‐
tion is displayed in the multifunction display.

Never leave children and animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
Keep the SmartKey out of the reach of
children.

Engaging reverse gear R
Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point
of resistance.
The transmission position display shows k
in the multifunction display.

Shifting to neutral N
Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display shows i
in the multifunction display.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will
allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
it or tow it away.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi‐
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
# If you engage the transmission position
h or k always depress the brake

i Neutral
h Drive position

j Park position
k Reverse gear

If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N even if the ignition is
switched off:
# Start the vehicle.

Driving and parking 155
Depress the brake pedal and shift to neutral
i.
# Release the brake pedal.
# Switch the ignition off.
% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in
the vehicle, the automatic transmission
remains in neutral i.
#

Engaging park position P

Press button 1.
The transmission position display shows j
in the multifunction display.
Park position j is engaged automatically if one
of the following conditions is met:
R you switch the engine off with the transmis‐
sion in position h or k.
R you open the driver's door when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving at a very low
speed and the transmission is in position h
or k.
#

Engaging drive position D
Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display shows h
in the multifunction display.
When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐
sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐
cally. This depends on the following factors:
R the selected drive program
R the position of the accelerator pedal
R the road speed
#

Manual gearshifting
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
accident due to shifting down on slippery
road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
# Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
faces to increase the engine braking
effect.

156 Driving and parking
To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 1 or 2.
Manual gearshifting is activated for a short
time. The current gear is displayed in the
multifunction display.
# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 2.
# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 1.
# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 2 and hold it in place.
The transmission position h appears in the
multifunction display.
% If you select the Manual drive setting in
drive program I, manual gearshifting is per‐
manently activated.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
#

Shift recommendation

Using kickdown

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐
erator pedal beyond the pressure point.
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The auto‐
matic transmission shifts up to the next gear
when the maximum engine speed is reached to
protect the engine from overrevving.
# Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
Glide mode function

If gearshift recommendation message 1 is
shown in the multifunction display, shift to
the recommended gear.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode
helps you to reduce fuel consumption.

Driving and parking 157
Glide mode is characterized by the following:
R The combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain and the vehicle continues to
roll in neutral.
R The transmission position h is displayed in
green in the multifunction display.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐
tions are met:
R Drive program E is selected.
R The speed is within a suitable range
R The course of the road is suitable, e.g. no
steep uphill or downhill gradients or tight
bends.
R You are no longer depressing the accelerator
or brake pedal.
% Glide mode can also be activated if you have
selected the "Eco" setting for the drive
(engine management) when in drive program
I.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the
conditions is no longer met.

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package,
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active
Brake Assist: glide mode is also deactivated
depending on the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle then switches to overrun mode. This further
reduces fuel consumption.
Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐
ing parameters:
R Uphill gradient
R Downhill gradient
R Temperature
R Height
R Speed
R Obstruction detection
R Operating status of the engine

Refueling
Refueling the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion
caused by fuel
Fuels are highly inflammable.
# You must avoid fire, open flames, creat‐
ing sparks and smoking.
# Before refueling, switch off the engine
and, if installed in your vehicle, the sta‐
tionary heater.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuel
Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your
health
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
# Do not inhale fuel vapors.
# Keep children away from fuel.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:

158 Driving and parking
#
#

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical
attention immediately.
If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing.
Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.

& WARNING Risk of explosion or fire due
to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and
thereby ignite fuel vapors.
# Always touch the metal vehicle body
before opening the fuel filler cap or
touching the pump nozzle.
This discharges any electrostatic charge that
may have built up.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Fuel that does not conform to the required
quality can lead to increased wear as well as
damage to the engine and exhaust system.
# Only use the fuel recommended.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a gasoline engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
# The RON octane rating can be found on
the fuel filler flap.
# Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded
fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10 % ethanol.
Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.
Do not refuel using:
R Diesel

E15, E85, E100
Gasoline containing methanol (M15, M30,
M85, M100)
Gasoline with additives containing metal

If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
# Do not switch the ignition on.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐
cles with a gasoline engine.
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
R Do not switch on the ignition. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#
#

Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Have the fuel tank and fuel lines
drained completely.

Driving and parking 159
#

* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused
by overfilled fuel tanks.
#

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
nozzle switches off.

* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
remove the fuel pump nozzle.
#

Parking
Switching off the vehicle

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
nozzle switches off.

& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot
exhaust system parts

Requirements:
R Unlock the vehicle.
% Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 400).

Insert the fuel filler cap into holder 2.
Completely insert the fuel pump nozzle into
the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
Only top up the fuel tank until the fuel pump
nozzle switches off.

1
2
3
4
5

Fuel filler flap
Bracket for the fuel filler cap
Tire pressure table
QR code for rescue card
Fuel type

Press fuel filler flap 1.
Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and
remove it.

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system or
exhaust gas flow.
# Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot
vehicle components.
# In particular, do not park on dry grass‐
land or harvested grain fields.

160 Driving and parking
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If you leave children unaccompanied in the
vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion, for example by:
R Releasing the parking brake.
R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j.
R Starting the engine.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle or the driv‐
etrain caused by the vehicle rolling away
#

Always properly secure the vehicle
against rolling away.

Apply the electric parking brake.
Press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) once.
% When you switch off the vehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the panoramic
sliding sunroof for five minutes.

#
#

Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door
opener
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐
ment.
# Never leave children and animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases causes poisoning.
# Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.

#
#

On uphill or downhill inclines, turn the front
wheels towards the curb.
Select transmission position j.

Driving and parking 161
#

& WARNING Risk of injury and entrapment
when opening the garage door using the
garage door opener
When you operate or program the garage
door with the integrated garage door opener,
persons in the range of movement of the
garage door can become trapped or struck
by the garage door.
# When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody
is within the sweep of the garage door.
Only operate the garage door opener on the fol‐
lowing garage doors:
R Garage doors with a safety stop and revers‐
ing feature.
R Garage doors which conform to the current
U.S. safety standards.
Requirements:
R The vehicle is parked outside of the garage.
R The engine is switched off.

Check if the transmitter frequency of the
remote control has the frequency range of
280 to 868 MHz.
Radio equipment approval number:
R NZLMUAHL5 (USA)
R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)

Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you
wish to program.
Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.

% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐
cator lamp flashes yellow.
# Release the previously pressed button.
Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.
# Point remote control 5 at a distance of 1 in
(1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards buttons 1, 2
or 3.
# Press and hold button 6 of remote control
5 until:
R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐
uously. Programming is complete.
R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐
gramming was successful. Additionally,
synchronization of the rolling code with
the garage door system must also be car‐
ried out.
# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash
green: repeat the procedure.
# Release all of the buttons.

162 Driving and parking
% Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door drive.

% The remote control for the garage door drive
is not included in the scope of delivery of the
garage door opener.

Troubleshooting when programming the
remote control

Synchronizing the rolling code
Requirements:
R The garage door system uses a rolling code.
R The vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or exterior gate drive.
R The vehicle as well as persons and objects,
are located outside the sweep of the garage
door.

Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Initiate the next step within approximately
30 seconds.
Press previously programmed button 1, 2
or 3 repeatedly, until the door closes.
When the door closes, programming is com‐
pleted.

#
#
#

Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control 5 is supported.
Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
Hold remote control 5 at various angles at
a distance between 1 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm)
in front of the inside rearview mirror. You
should test every position for at least 25 sec‐
onds before trying another position.

Driving and parking 163
Hold remote control 5 at the same angles
at various distances in front of the inside
rearview mirror. You should test every posi‐
tion for at least 25 seconds before trying
another position.
# Note that some remote controls transmit
only for a limited period, press button 6 on
remote control 5 again before transmission
ends.
# Align the antenna line of the garage door
opener unit with the remote control.
% Support and additional information on pro‐
gramming:
R On the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on
1-800-355-3515.
R On the Internet at http://
www.homelink.com/mercedes.

Clearing the garage door opener memory

Opening/closing the garage door
Requirements
R The corresponding button is programmed to
operate the garage door.

#
#

Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until
the garage door opens or closes.
If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after
approximately 20 seconds: press and hold
the previously pressed button again until the
garage door opens or closes.

#
#

Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release
buttons 1 and 3.

164 Driving and parking
Radio equipment approval numbers for the
garage door opener
Radio equipment approval numbers

Country

Radio type approval number

Country

Liechten‐
stein

South
Africa

Mexico

RCPGEMU15-0448

Monaco

Radio type approval number

Country

Radio type approval number

Egypt

TAC.2511151293.WIR

Andorra

Australia

R-NZ

New Zea‐
land

R-NZ

Turkey

not required

Barbados

MED1578

Norway

ER41849/15
Dealer No: DA35176/14

Chile

2488/DFRS20576/F-74

not required

European
Union

Russian
Federa‐
tion

United
Arab Emi‐
rates
United
States

FCC ID: NZLMUAHL5

Gibraltar

Saudi Ara‐
bia

TA 10525

Iceland

CE
TRC/LPD/2015/299

Switzer‐
land

Jordan
Canada

IC: 4112A-MUAHL5

Kuwait

TA-2015/1386

Driving and parking 165
Brazil

Electric parking brake
Electric parking brake function (applying
automatically)
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle

Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário,
isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interfer‐
ência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo
tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas
operando em caráter primário.
Para maiores informações acessar
www.anatel.gov.br
Further information on the declaration of con‐
formity for wireless vehicle components
(→ page 23).

If you leave children unaccompanied in the
vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion, for example by:
R Releasing the parking brake.
R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j.
R Starting the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐
ment.
# Never leave children and animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.

The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐
mission is in position j and one of the follow‐
ing conditions is fulfilled:
R The engine is switched off.
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the
electric parking brake.
In the following situations, the electric parking
brake is also engaged:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
the vehicle to a standstill.
R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐
tionary.
R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary.
This is only the case if one of the following con‐
ditions is also fulfilled:
R The engine is switched off.

166 Driving and parking
R

R
R
R

The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
There is a system malfunction.
The power supply is insufficient.
The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the
F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Electric parking brake function (releasing
automatically)
The electric parking brake is released when the
following conditions are fulfilled:
R The engine is running.
R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat.
R The transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or you

shift from transmission position j to h or
k.
If the transmission is in position k, the tail‐
gate must be closed.

Applying or releasing the electric parking
brake manually
Applying

If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the follow‐
ing conditions must be fulfilled:
R The driver's door is closed.
R You move the transmission out of transmis‐
sion position j or you have previously
driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
R If the transmission is in position k, the tail‐
gate must be closed.
If the electric parking brake is released, the
F (USA) or ! (CANADA) indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out.
#

Push handle 1.
The F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator
lamp appears in the instrument cluster.

Driving and parking 167
% The electric parking brake is only securely
applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu‐
ously.
Releasing
# Switch on the ignition.
# Pull handle 1.
The F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Emergency braking
# Press and hold handle 1.
When the vehicle has been braked to a
standstill, the electric parking brake is
applied. The F (USA) or ! (Canada)
indicator lamp appears in the instrument
cluster.
Notes on parking the vehicle for a long
period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the disconnected battery may be
damaged by deep discharge.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
weeks, it may suffer damage as a result of lack
of use.
% Further information can be obtained at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐
tery's period out of use)
Standby mode function
If standby mode is activated, the vehicle can be
parked for an extended period of time without
losing power.
Standby mode is characterized by the following:
R the starter battery is preserved.
R the maximum period out of use is displayed
in the multimedia system display.
R functions such as interior protection or towaway protection are not available.
R the connection to online services is interrup‐
ted.

If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby
mode can be activated or deactivated using the
multimedia system:
R the engine is switched off.
R the ignition is switched on.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed period out of
use may cause inconvenience, i.e. it cannot be
guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably
start the engine.
The starter battery must be charged first in the
following situations:
R the vehicle's period out of use must be
extended.
R the
message appears in the multimedia
system display.
% Standby mode is automatically deactivated
when the ignition is switched on.

168 Driving and parking
Activating or deactivating standby mode
Multimedia system:
,
. î
.
#

Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
When you activate the function, a prompt
appears.
Select
.
Standby mode is activated.

Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems
which assist you in driving, parking and maneu‐
vering the vehicle. The driving systems are tools
and do not relieve you of your responsibility. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions at all times
and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the
limitations regarding the safe use of these sys‐
tems.

Function of the radar sensors
Some driving and driving safety systems use
radar sensors to monitor the area in front of,
behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the
vehicle's equipment).
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar
sensors are integrated behind the bumpers
and/or behind the radiator grille. Keep these
parts free of dirt, ice and slush (→ page 342).
The sensors must not be covered, for example
by bicycle racks, overhanging loads or radarreflecting stickers. Following an impact and in
the event of associated damage, which may not
be visible, to the bumpers or radiator grille, have
the function of the radar sensors checked at a
qualified specialist workshop. The driver assis‐
tance system may no longer work properly.

Overview of driving systems and driving
safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving systems and driving safety
systems:
R 360° Camera (→ page 198)
R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(→ page 169)
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(→ page 177)
R AIR BODY CONTROL (→ page 187)
(→ page 188)
R Active Brake Assist (→ page 170)
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 212)
R ATTENTION ASSIST (→ page 206)
R BAS (Brake Assist System) (→ page 169)
R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (→ page 186)
R EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(→ page 170)
R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
R Hill Start Assist

Driving and parking 169
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

HOLD function (→ page 185)
STEER CONTROL (→ page 170)
Active Steering Assist (→ page 182)
Active Parking Assist (→ page 201)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 192)
Rear view camera (→ page 195)
Cruise control (→ page 175)
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
(→ page 210)
Traffic Sign Assist (→ page 208)

Functions of ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
ABS regulates the brake pressure in critical driv‐
ing situations:
R During braking, e.g. at maximum full-stop
braking or insufficient traction of the tires,
the wheels are prevented from blocking.
R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
pedal can be an indication of hazardous road

conditions and can serve as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.
System limitations
ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 mph
(8 km/h).
R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a
malfunction has occurred and the yel‐
low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin‐
uously in the instrument cluster after the
engine is started.

Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐
tem)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased.
# Depress the brake pedal with full force
in emergency braking situations. ABS
prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS supports your emergency braking situation
with additional brake force.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is
activated:
R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐
sure.
R BAS can shorten the braking distance.
R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐
bility Program)
Multimedia system:
,
. k
.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

170 Driving and parking
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument
cluster.
Observe the information on warning lamps and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster.
Functions of ESP® Crosswind Assist
ESP®

Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of
side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐
cle in the lane:
R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between 50 mph (80 km/h) and
125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight
ahead or cornering slightly.
R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ‐
ual brake application on one side.

Function of EBD (Electronic Brake force Dis‐
tribution)
EBD is characterized by the following:
R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels.
R Improved driving stability when braking,
especially on bends.
STEER CONTROL function
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in
the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steering recommendation is given particu‐
larly in the following situations:
R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you
brake.
R The vehicle starts to skid.

System limitations
STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not
function in the following situations:
R ESP® is deactivated.
R ESP® is malfunctioning.
R The steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electric power steering.
Function of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist consists of:
R Distance warning function
R Autonomous braking function
R Situation-dependent braking assistance
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: Evasive Steering Assist
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or
to reduce the effects of such a collision.

Driving and parking 171
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐
sion, you will be warned visually and acousti‐
cally.
If you do not react to the visual and audible colli‐
sion warning, autonomous braking can be initi‐
ated in critical situations.
In especially critical situations, Active Brake
Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly.
In this case, the visual and acoustic warning
occurs simultaneously with the braking applica‐
tion.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐
tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐
ing, situation-dependent braking assistance
occurs. This increases the brake pressure up to
maximum full-stop braking if necessary.
If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐
tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered,
additional preventive measures for occupant
protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated, if
the vehicle is equipped with these.

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
limited detection performance of Active
Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐
tions.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:
R Give a warning or brake without reason
R Not give a warning or not brake
#

Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake
Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only
an aid. The driver is responsible for
maintaining a suitable distance to the
vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for
braking in good time.
Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐
essary.

Also observe the system limitations of Active
Brake Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in
the following speed ranges:
Distance warning function
The distance warning function issues a warning
at speeds:
R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your
vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or
pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone
sounds and the · distance warning lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐
ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation
allows this.

172 Driving and parking
The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:
Vehicles traveling in
front

Stationary vehicles

Crossing vehicles

Crossing pedestrians

Stationary pedes‐
trians

Vehicles without Driv‐
ing Assistance pack‐
age

up to approx. 155 mph
(250 km/h)

up to approx. 50 mph
(80 km/h)

no reaction

up to approx. 37 mph
(60 km/h)

no reaction

Vehicles with Driving
Assistance package

up to approx. 155 mph
(250 km/h)

up to approx. 62 mph
(100 km/h)

up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)

Autonomous braking function
The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles traveling in
front

Stationary vehicles

Crossing vehicles

Crossing pedestrians

Stationary pedes‐
trians

Vehicles without Driv‐
ing Assistance pack‐
age

up to approx. 124 mph
(200 km/h)

up to approx. 31 mph
(50 km/h)

no reaction

up to approx. 37 mph
(60 km/h)

no reaction

Vehicles with Driving
Assistance package

up to approx. 155 mph
(250 km/h)

up to approx. 62 mph
(100 km/h)

up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)

Driving and parking 173
Situation-dependent braking assistance
Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles traveling in
front

Stationary vehicles

Crossing vehicles

Crossing pedestrians

Stationary pedes‐
trians

Vehicles without Driv‐
ing Assistance pack‐
age

up to approx. 155 mph
(250 km/h)

up to approx. 50 mph
(80 km/h)

no reaction

up to approx. 37 mph
(60 km/h)

no reaction

Vehicles with Driving
Assistance package

up to approx. 155 mph
(250 km/h)

up to approx. 62 mph
(100 km/h)

up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)

Canceling a brake application of Active Brake
Assist
You can cancel a brake application of Active
Brake Assist at any time by:
R Depressing the accelerator pedal fully.
R Releasing the brake pedal.
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐
cation when one of the following conditions is
fulfilled:
R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
R There is no longer a risk of collision.

An obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.

Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with
Driving Assistance package)
Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐
teristics:
R Can detect stationary or crossing pedes‐
trians.
R Can assist the driver with additional steering
assistance if it detects a swerving maneuver.

R
R
R

Can be activated by an abrupt steering move‐
ment during a swerving maneuver.
Can assist during swerving and straightening
of the vehicle.
Can react from a speed of approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx‐
imately 43 mph (70 km/h).
You can prevent the assistance at any time
by actively steering.

174 Driving and parking
& WARNING Risk of an accident despite
Evasive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐
tions.
In addition, the steering support of Evasive
Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to
avoid a collision.
In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can:
R give an unnecessary warning or provide
assistance
R not give a warning or not provide assis‐
tance
#

#
#

Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Evasive
Steering Assist alone.
Be ready to brake and take evasive
action if necessary.
Prevent the assistance by actively steer‐
ing in non-critical driving situations.

Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes‐
trians are close to the path of your vehi‐
cle.

Also observe the system limitations of Evasive
Steering Assist.
System limitations
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
light conditions.
R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged
or covered.
R If the sensors malfunction due to other radar
source interference, for example strong radar
reflections in parking garages.
R If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
has been detected and displayed.
The system may not react correctly:
R In complex traffic situations where objects
cannot always be clearly identified.

R
R
R
R
R

To pedestrians or vehicles if they move
quickly into the sensor detection range.
To pedestrians who are hidden by other
objects.
If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot
be distinguished from the background.
If a pedestrian is not recognized as such, e.g.
due to special clothing or other objects.
On bends with a tight radius.

Setting Active Brake Assist
Multimedia system:
,
. k

Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack‐
age: The settings can be made after starting the
vehicle.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package:
The settings can be made when the ignition is
switched on.
% It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist activated.

Driving and parking 175
Select one of the following settings:
#
: your selection is retained when the
vehicle is next started.
#
: your selection is retained when the
vehicle is next started.
#
: your selection is retained when the
vehicle is next started.
#
:
Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack‐
age: The distance warning function and the
autonomous braking function are deactiva‐
ted. When the vehicle is next started, the
middle setting is automatically selected.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance pack‐
age: The distance warning function and the
autonomous braking function are deactiva‐
ted. Evasive Steering Assist is unavailable.
When the ignition is next started, the middle
setting is selected automatically and Evasive
Steering Assist is available.
% When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the assistance
graphic in the multifunction display.

Speed control cruise control
Function of cruise control
Cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehi‐
cle automatically in order to maintain a previ‐
ously stored speed.
If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the
stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking,
cruise control will resume speed regulation back
to the stored speed.
You can operate cruise control with the cruise
control lever.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con‐
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take
into account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi‐
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay‐
ing in lane.
System limitations
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored
speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.

Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. Take particular
note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking effect
of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐
ing and wearing too quickly.
Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐
tions:
R In traffic situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on
winding roads.
R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause
the drive wheels to lose traction and the
vehicle could then skid.
R If you are driving when visibility is poor.
Operating cruise control
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
unknown stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is
lower than your current speed, the vehicle
decelerates.

176 Driving and parking
If you do not know the stored speed, the
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly.
# Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
# If the stored speed is not known, store
the desired speed again.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. Take particular
note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking effect
of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐
ing and wearing too quickly.
Requirements:
R Cruise control is selected.
R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening.
R The driving speed must be at least 15 mph
(20 km/h).

Store current speed 2 (once after starting
the vehicle).

or
#
#

Call up stored speed 2.
Deactivate cruise control 1.

Press the lever briefly: the stored speed is
increased 3 or reduced
4 by 1 mph (1 km/h).

or
Press the lever beyond the pressure point:
the stored speed is increased 3 or reduced
4 by 5 mph (10 km/h).
If cruise control has been deactivated, the cur‐
rent driven speed is adopted with 3 or 4.

Driving and parking 177
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP®
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated.
When you switch off the vehicle, the last
speed stored is cleared.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R Maintains the set speed and accelerates or
decelerates the vehicle if the distance from
the vehicle in front permits.
R Assists you in maintaining the distance from
the vehicle in front and can bring your vehi‐
cle to a standstill if necessary.
R Brakes your vehicle with up to 50 % of the
maximum possible braking power. If greater
deceleration performance is required, a vis‐
ual and acoustic warning is given and you
must then intervene yourself.
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age, Active Parking Assist and COMAND:
When driving in stop-start traffic, the driver is

supported by extended automatic re-start in
traffic jams.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: Responds to stationary vehicles in
urban speed ranges (except bicycles, motor‐
cycles and pedestrians) if conditions are suf‐
ficient to enable detection.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC can neither reduce the
risk of an accident nor override the laws of phys‐
ics. It cannot take into account road, weather or
traffic conditions. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi‐
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay‐
ing in lane.
If all activation conditions are met, you can acti‐
vate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC during a
journey or while stationary. When Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, a speed is
stored which the driver can increase or reduce
at any time. The speed can be adjusted between
15 mph (20 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).

Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: The speed can be adjusted between
15 mph (20 km/h) and 130 mph (210 km/h).
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package,
Active Parking Assist and COMAND: Up to 30
seconds after stopping, the vehicle automatically
follows the vehicle ahead without the interven‐
tion of the driver. This is only possible if the vehi‐
cle is traveling on a motorway or a high-speed
major road. If an obstacle is detected in front of
the vehicle during the driving-off procedure, a
takeover warning is given. Acceleration is
reduced, the driver is given a visual and acoustic
warning and must stop the vehicle before reach‐
ing the obstacle or take evasive action.
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: In conjunction with navigation systems,
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC prevents pro‐
hibited overtaking on the right at speeds over
50 mph (80 km/h) in right-hand traffic and over‐
taking on the left in left-hand traffic on freeways
and high-speed major roads.
If you activate the turn signal indicator to change
lanes, the vehicle will accelerate more briskly to
the set speed under the following conditions:

178 Driving and parking
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
If the driving speed is higher than 45 mph
(70 km/h).
If the driven speed drops below the stored
speed.
The system cannot detect a vehicle in the rel‐
evant area of the overtaking lane.

tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher
than the set speed are adopted.
Pulling the cruise control lever will set the dis‐
played speed limit as the speed, provided that:
R Active Speed Limit Assist has been activated
in the multimedia system and
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been
activated.

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package
and Traffic Sign Assist: Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC also has the Active Speed Limit
Assist function. This function can be configured
in the multimedia system. If a change in the
speed limit is detected and Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC is activated, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC assumes this new speed.
The driven speed is adapted when the vehicle is
level with the traffic signs. The speed limit dis‐
play in the Instrument Display is always updated
when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been
put into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐

If no speed limit is displayed when the lever is
operated, the speed set by the driver is adopted.

R
R
R
R

Drive program
The DYNAMIC SELECT switch allows you to
change the driving style of Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC. Depending on which drive
program is selected, the driving characteristics
can be geared towards fuel economy, comfort or
dynamic performance (→ page 152).
System limitations
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active
in the 0 mph (0 km/h) to 130 mph (210 km/h)
speed range.

The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following instances, for example:
R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
light conditions.
R The windshield in the area of the camera is
dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
R On slippery roads, braking or accelerating
can cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle could then skid.
R In parking garages, toll stations or on roads
with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in
these situations.
Tips
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations. In such situations, brake if necessary.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is then deacti‐
vated:
R When cornering, entering and exiting a bend.
R When not driving in the center of the lane.

Driving and parking 179
R
R
R
R

When other vehicles are changing lane.
If there are narrow vehicles.
If there are obstacles and stationary vehi‐
cles.
If there are crossing vehicles, pedestrians,
motorcyclists or cyclists.

3 Set specified distance
4 Your vehicle

Display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
in the assistance graphic and in the speed‐
ometer

the ç symbol. When distance control is
active, the symbol is shown in green.
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: On freeways or high-speed major roads the
ç symbol is displayed cyclically when the
vehicle is ready to pull away.
Vehicles with Active Speed Limit Assist: If a
speed limit is automatically adopted, this is
shown as the stored speed with the ê sym‐
bol.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

1 Speed of vehicle ahead
2 Stored speed

1 Vehicle ahead
2 Distance indicator

Displays in the multifunction display
When activating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC or when changing the stored speed,
the new stored speed is shown for around five
seconds in the multifunction display ç
50 mph (70 km/h).
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
active, the set stored speed is displayed next to

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection
function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react:
R To people or animals.
R To stationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
stopped or parked vehicles (vehicles with‐
out the Driving Assistance Package).

180 Driving and parking
R

To stationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
stopped or parked vehicles, if conditions
are not sufficient to enable detection
(vehicles with the Driving Assistance
Package).
To oncoming vehicles and crossing traf‐
fic.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can nei‐
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐
uations.
# Always carefully observe the traffic con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all
times.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐
ted detectability of road users and traffic
situations
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot
always clearly identify other road users and
complex traffic situations.

In these conditions, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may:
R Give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle.
R Neither give a warning nor intervene.
R Accelerate or brake unexpectedly.
#

Continue driving with care and be ready
to brake, particularly if Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC warns you.

& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐
ation or braking by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐
erate or brake in the following cases, for
example:
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC.
R If the stored speed is called up and is
considerably faster or slower than the
currently driven speed.

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects.

Always carefully observe the traffic con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all
times.
Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient deceleration by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
your vehicle with up to 50 % of the maximum
possible deceleration. If this deceleration is
not sufficient, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and
acoustic warning.
# In these cases, adjust your speed and
keep a sufficient distance.
# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.

Driving and parking 181
#

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being
activated when you leave the driver's
seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
is being braked by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
# Always deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐
cle to prevent it from rolling away
before you leave the driver's seat.
Requirements
R The vehicle's engine must be switched on.
R The electric parking brake must be released.
R Active Parking Assist is not being used to
park the vehicle or to exit from a parking
space.
R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening.
R The transmission must be in position h.
R The driver door, front passenger door and the
rear doors must be closed.
R The engine hood must be closed.

#
#

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
To store current speed 2.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the stored
speed.

or
#

Or on vehicles with Driving Assistance
Package and Traffic Sign Assist: the dis‐
played speed limit is adopted, if available 2.
Deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
1.

Call up stored speed 2.

Increase 3 or reduce 4 the speed.

182 Driving and parking
#

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you 2.

or
#

Reduce 5 or increase 6 the specified dis‐
tance from the vehicle in front.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Requirement: a speed must have been previ‐
ously stored.
# Remove your foot from the brake pedal.

Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to
the set speed.

Adopting the speed limit as the stored speed
Requirements:
R Active Speed Limit Assist is activated in the
multimedia system (→ page 209).
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
R The system detects a traffic sign indicating a
speed limit.
#

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you 2.
The displayed speed limit is adopted as the
stored speed. Your vehicle adapts its speed
to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to
the stored speed. If Active Speed Limit Assist

is activated, any detected changes in the
speed limit are adopted by the system.
Collision warning
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is unable to
sufficiently decelerate the vehicle in order to
prevent it from approaching the vehicle in front,
you will be warned visually and acoustically. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound and
the distance warning lamp will light up in the
instrument cluster.
# Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
# Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist
Active Steering Assist is only available for
vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐
age.
R Active Steering Assist is operational at
speeds up to 130 mph (210 km/h) and helps

Driving and parking 183

R
R

you to stay in the center of the lane by
means of moderate steering interventions.
It uses the vehicle in front and the lane mark‐
ings as a reference depending on the driven
speed.
Active Steering Assist requires you as the
driver, to keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times so that you are able to
intervene at any time to correct the course of
the vehicle and keep it in lane.
Active Steering Assist can be overridden at
any time by steering the vehicle yourself.
When the system is actively steering, the
è symbol is shown in green in the multi‐
function display.

System limitations of Active Steering Assist
Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐
que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the
steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the
vehicle in the lane.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles
ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist
switches to passive mode. The system provides
no support in this case. During the transition

from the active to passive status, the è sym‐
bol is shown as enlarged and flashes yellow.
Once the system is passive the è symbol is
shown as gray in the multifunction display.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following instances:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
cient illumination of the road, or due to snow,
rain, fog or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflection from other vehi‐
cles (e.g. if the carriageway is wet).
R If the windshield is dirty, misted up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera.
R If no, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, e.g. in a construction
area.
R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
R The distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected.

R
R
R

If the lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
The carriageway is narrow and winding.
If there are highly variable shade conditions
on the carriageway.
If there are obstacles such as object markers
on the lane or projecting out into the lane.

The system does not provide assistance in the
following conditions:
R On very sharp bends.
R When towing a trailer.
R If you actively change lane without switching
on the turn signal indicator.
R If you switch on the turn signal indicator and
the conditions for activating Active Lane
Change Assist are not fulfilled.
Activating Active Steering Assist
Requirements:
R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening.

184 Driving and parking
R

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.

If indicator lamp 1 is off: press button 2.

Function of Active Lane Change Assist
Active Steering Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in your lane. Before changing

lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is
free (shoulder view).
% The availability of the following function is
country-dependent.
Active Steering Assist remains active even if the
turn signal indicator is switched on. Active Steer‐
ing Assist then assists the driver when changing
lanes by applying steering torques to initiate the
lane change.
Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all
the following conditions are met:
R You are driving on a motorway or high-speed
multi-lane major road with multiple lanes in
the direction of travel.
R The neighboring lane is free and separated
by a broken lane marking.
R The driven speed is between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).
R The turn signal indicator is switched on for
longer than two seconds.
If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change
Assist may be canceled. If an interruption
occurs, display 1 appears in the multifunction

display along with a warning tone prompting you
to take control of the vehicle.

Steering and contact detection
Active Steering Assist requires you as the driver,
to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all
times so that you are able to intervene at any
time to correct the course of the vehicle and
keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change
from active to passive mode or vice versa at any
time.
If you are not steering yourself or if you take
your hands off the steering wheel for a pro‐
longed period of time, the system will, depend‐
ing on the situation, first alert you with a visual

Driving and parking 185
warning. 1 appears in the multifunction display.
If you are still not steering the vehicle yourself or
if you have not taken hold of the steering wheel,
a warning tone sounds in addition to the warning
message to remind you to take control of the
vehicle.
The warning message does not appear or disap‐
pears if one of the following conditions are met:
R The driver steers the vehicle.
R The driver presses a steering wheel button or
operates Touch Control.
Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the driver continues to ignore the acoustic
warning of Active Lane Change Assist, Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed.
If the driver still does not respond, the vehicle is
decelerated in stages to a standstill.
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any
time by performing one of the following actions:
R Steering
R Braking or accelerating
R Pressing a steering wheel button or operat‐
ing Touch Control

Activating or deactivating Active Steering
Assist or Distance Assist DISTRONIC

The driver must be ready to take control of the
vehicle at any time.
Information on Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short
time when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
R The transmission is in position h or k.
R The electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
caused by the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer
holds the vehicle and it can roll away.
# Therefore, swiftly move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator

pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi‐
cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
HOLD function
HOLD function
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐
still without requiring you to depress the brake
pedal, e.g. when pulling away on steep slopes.
System limitations
The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
HOLD function being activated when you
leave the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD
function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle
can roll away in the following situations:
R If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply.

186 Driving and parking
R

If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or the
brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
If the electrics in the engine compart‐
ment, the battery or the fuses are tam‐
pered with or if the battery is disconnec‐
ted.
Always deactivate the HOLD function
and secure the vehicle against rolling
away before leaving the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking
When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function are
activated, the vehicle brakes autonomously
in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit‐
uations:
# During towing
# In a car wash

Requirements:
R The vehicle is stationary.
R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened.
R The engine is running or has been automati‐
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
R The electric parking brake is released.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not acti‐
vated.
R The transmission is in position h, k or i.
Activating the HOLD function
# Depress the brake pedal and after a short
time depress further until the ë display
appears in the multifunction display.
# Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function
Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or
# Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐
play disappears from the multifunction dis‐
play.
#

The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐
ing situations:
R When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
activated.
R The transmission is switched to position j.
R When the vehicle is secured with the electric
parking brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by
the transmission position j or by the electric
parking brake:
R When the seat belt is unfastened and the
driver's door is opened.
R When the engine is switched off.
R When there is a malfunction in the system or
if the power supply is insufficient.
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL has the following
characteristics:
R Variable damping characteristics
R Continual adjustment of the damping forces

Driving and parking 187
The damping characteristics adapt to the current
operating and driving situation.
The damping is tuned individually for each wheel
and is affected by the following factors:
R The road surface conditions
R Vehicle load
R The drive program selected
The drive program can be adjusted using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

AIR BODY CONTROL
AIR BODY CONTROL function
AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system
with variable damping for improved driving com‐
fort. The all-round level control system ensures
the best possible suspension and constant
ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.
When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered
automatically to improve driving safety and to
reduce fuel consumption. The option of manually
adjusting the vehicle level is also available.

AIR BODY CONTROL comprises:
Air suspension with variable spring rate
R Automatic level control system
R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
consumption
R Manual level adjustment
R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
constant damping force adjustment)
R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button
R

Available suspension settings
Drive program

Characteristics

C
(Comfort)

R
R
R
R

E
(Economy)

R
R
R

The suspension tuning is comfortable.
The vehicle is set to the normal level.
When driving at speeds of above 78 mph (125 km/h) the vehicle is lowered.
When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised.
The suspension tuning is comfortable.
The vehicle is set to the low level.
The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds.

188 Driving and parking
Drive program

Characteristics

S
(Sport)

R
R
R

S+
(Sport Plus)

R
R
R

The suspension tuning is firmer.
The vehicle is set to the low level.
The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds.
The suspension tuning is even firmer.
The vehicle is set to the low level.
The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds.

AIR BODY CONTROL function
AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system
with variable damping for improved driving com‐
fort. The all-round level control system ensures
the best possible suspension and constant
ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.
When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered

automatically to improve driving safety and to
reduce fuel consumption. The option of manually
adjusting the vehicle level is also available.
AIR BODY CONTROL comprises:
R Air suspension with variable spring rate
R Automatic level control system

R
R
R
R

Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
consumption
Manual level adjustment
ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
constant damping force adjustment)
DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button

Driving and parking 189
Available suspension settings
Drive program

Characteristics

C
(Comfort)

R
R
R
R

E
(Economy)

R
R
R

S
(Sport)

R
R
R

The suspension tuning is comfortable.
The vehicle is set to the normal level.
When driving at speeds of above 78 mph (125 km/h) the vehicle is lowered.
When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again.
The suspension tuning is comfortable.
The vehicle is set to the low level.
The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds.
The suspension tuning is firmer.
The vehicle is set to the low level.
The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds.

190 Driving and parking
Drive program

Characteristics

All vehicles except All-Terrain
vehicles: S+
(Sport Plus)

All-Terrain vehicles: AT
(All-Terrain)

R
R
R
R
R
R

The suspension tuning is even firmer.
The vehicle is set to the low level.
The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds.
Suspension tuning is for easily negotiable offroad terrain.
The vehicle is set to the high level.
When driving at speeds of above 22 mph (35 km/h) the vehicle is lowered to the normal level.
When driving at speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h), the vehicle is raised again.

Setting the vehicle level
& WARNING Risk of accident because
vehicle level is too high
If you drive at a higher vehicle level, the driv‐
ing characteristics may be impaired due to
the higher vehicle center of gravity.
The vehicle can drift outwards, for example,
when steering or cornering.

Always choose a vehicle level which is
suited to the driving style and the road
surface conditions.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐
cle lowering
When lowering the vehicle, people could
become trapped if their limbs are between
the vehicle body and the tires or underneath
the vehicle.

Make sure no one is underneath the
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of
the wheel arches when you lower the
vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐
cle lowering
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or
level control system: When you unload lug‐
gage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first

Driving and parking 191
rises slightly and then returns to the set level
shortly afterwards.
You or anyone else in the vicinity of the
wheel arches or the underbody could thus
become trapped.
The vehicle can also be lowered after being
locked.
# When leaving the vehicle, make sure
that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arches or the underbody.

Raising the vehicle

The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐
uations:
R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
R When driving between 37 mph (60 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately
three minutes.
R After selecting a drive program using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last
active drive program.
Lowering the vehicle
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to the height of the last active drive
program.

Requirements
R The vehicle has been started.
R The vehicle must not be moving faster than
37 mph (60 km/h).

Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 lights up.
The vehicle is raised by 1 in (25 mm) com‐
pared to the normal level.

Your selection is saved.

192 Driving and parking
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking assistance system with ultrasound. It
monitors the area around your vehicle using six
sensors 1 in the front bumper and six sensors
in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
indicates visually and audibly the distance
between your vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a substitute for paying attention to your sur‐
roundings. You are always responsible for safe
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking
space. Make sure that there are no persons, ani‐

mals or objects in the maneuvering area while
maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking
spaces.
In the standard setting, an intermittent warning
tone sounds from a distance of approximately
1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle. A continuous tone
sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 ft
(0.2 m). You can set the warning tone in the mul‐
timedia system so that it will sound earlier at a
greater distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
(→ page 195).
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
Active Parking Assist is unavailable.

Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a 360°
Camera

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the
multimedia system
If Active Parking Assist is not activated and an
obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a
pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds
up to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a 360°
Camera

Driving and parking 193
System limitations
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐
rily take into account the following obstacles:
R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.
persons, animals or objects.
R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading
ramps of trucks.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush.
Otherwise, they may not function correctly.
Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them.
Function of the passive side impact protec‐
tion
Passive side impact protection is an additional
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which
warns the driver about obstacles at the side of
the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles
are detected between the front and rear detec‐
tion range. In order for an object to be detected,
the sensors in the front and rear bumper must
detect the object while you are driving past it.

During the parking procedure or maneuvering,
objects are detected as the vehicle drives past.
If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta‐
cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a
warning is issued. The lateral segments light up
orange or red, depending on the distance to the
obstacle.
Segment color depending on distance
Color

Lateral distance in
cm

Red

Approx. < 30

Orange

Approx. 30 - 60

In order for lateral front or rear segments to be
displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance
of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the
vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all
of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis‐
played.

Vehicles without 360° Camera

1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera‐

tional in the front and rear

2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational

and can also warn the driver about obstacles
at the side of the vehicle
3 Obstacle detected at the front right (orange)
and rear (red)

194 Driving and parking

Vehicles with 360° Camera

1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera‐

tional in the front and rear

2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational

and can also warn the driver about obstacles
at the side of the vehicle
3 Obstacle detected at the front right (orange)
and rear (red)
Saved obstacles are deleted in the following sit‐
uations, for example:
R You switch off the vehicle
R You open the doors

After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be
detected again, before a new warning can be
issued.

The vehicle or other objects could oth‐
erwise be damaged.

System limitations
The system limitations for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC apply for passive side impact pro‐
tection.
The following objects are not detected, for exam‐
ple:
R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from
the side
R Objects placed next to the vehicle

If indicator lamp 1 is not lit, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit
or the é symbol appears in the multifunction
display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not
active.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects
at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect
certain objects at close range.
# When parking or maneuvering the vehi‐
cle, pay particular attention to any
objects which are above or below the
sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars.
#

Press button 2.

Driving and parking 195
% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located in the center
console.
% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the vehicle is started.
Adjusting the warning tones of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC
Multimedia system:
,
. k
.
.

Adjusting the volume of the warning tones
Select
.
# Adjust the value.

when the vehicle is further away from an obsta‐
cle.
# Select
.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

Reversing camera
Function of the rear view camera

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout
You can specify whether the volume of a media
source in the multimedia system is to be
reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives
an audible warning.
# Select
.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones
Select
.
# Adjust the value.
#

Specifying the starting point for the warning
tones
You can specify whether the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence

When you engage reverse gear, the image from
rear view camera 1 is shown in the multimedia
system. Dynamic guide lines show the path the
vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its
current position. This helps you to orientate

196 Driving and parking
yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing
up.
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the maneu‐
vering area while maneuvering and parking in
parking spaces.
You can select from the following views:
R Normal view
R Wide-angle view
R Trailer view
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
System limitations
The rear view camera will not function or will
only partially function in the following situations:
R If the trunk lid or tailgate is open.
R There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.

The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis‐
ted up. Observe the notes on cleaning the
rear camera (→ page 342).
The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam‐
aged. In this case, have the camera and its
position and setting checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.

The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate bracket or bicycle rack).
% The display contrast may be impaired due to
incident sunlight or other light sources. In
this case, pay particular attention.
% If the display operation is considerably
impaired due to pixel errors, for example,
have the display repaired or replaced.
Vehicles without Active Parking Assist
The following camera views are available in the
multimedia system:

Normal view

1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
2
3
4
5

face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐
imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area
Bumper
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area

Driving and parking 197
5 Red warning display of Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close
(approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less)
6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis‐
tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft
(0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m))

Wide-angle view
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist
The following camera views are available in the
multimedia system:

Normal view

1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will

take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
4 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are at a distance of
between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and
3.3 ft (1.0 m)

% If the entire system fails, the inner segments
of the warning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button
lights up and the é symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
If the system fails at the rear:
R The rear segments are shown in red
when backing up.
R The rear segments are hidden when driv‐
ing forwards.
When Active Parking Assist is active, the
lanes are displayed in green.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
the warning display fades out.

198 Driving and parking
vering area while maneuvering and parking in
parking spaces.
The system evaluates images from the following
cameras:
R Rear view camera
R Front camera
R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
Wide-angle view

Views of the 360° Camera
You can select from different views:

360° camera
Function of the 360° Camera
The 360° Camera is a system that consists of
four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate
vehicle surroundings. The system supports you,
e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil‐
ity.
The 360° Camera is only an aid. It is not a sub‐
stitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the maneu‐

1 Wide-angle view, front
2 Top view with image from the front camera

3 Top view with images from the side cameras

in the outside mirrors

4 Wide-angle view, rear
5 Top view with image from the rear view cam‐

era

6 Top view with trailer view (if trailer hitch is

fitted)

Driving and parking 199
Top view

1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will

take with the steering wheel in its current
position
2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of
approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) or less
3 Your vehicle from above
If the distance to the object lessens, the color of
the warning display changes 2. From a dis‐
tance of approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) the warn‐
ing display is shown in orange. From a distance
of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) the warning dis‐
play is shown in red.

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational
and no object is detected, the segments of the
warning display are shown in gray.
% If the entire system fails, the segments of
the warning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button
lights up and the é symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
If the system fails at the rear, the display of
the segments changes as follows:
R The rear segments are shown in red
when backing up.
R The rear segments are hidden when driv‐
ing forwards.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
the warning display fades out.

Guide lines

1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will

take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
4 Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
% When Active Parking Assist is active, the
lanes are displayed in green.

200 Driving and parking
The guide lines in the multimedia system dis‐
play show the distances to your vehicle. The
distances only apply to road level.
Side view of the mirror cameras
The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.

R
R
R
R
R
R

1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions

with outside mirrors folded out
2 Marker of the wheel contact points

System limitations
The 360° Camera will not function or will only
partially function in the following situations:
R If the doors are open.

The side mirrors are folded in.
If the trunk lid or tailgate is open.
There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐
ged up.
Cameras, or vehicle components in which
the cameras are installed, are damaged. In
this event, have the cameras, their positions
and their setting checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° Camera under such circum‐
stances. You could otherwise injure others or
collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension or
if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the
standard height can result in inaccuracies in the
guide lines and in the display of the generated
images, depending on technical conditions.
The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to addi‐
tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate bracket, bicycle rack).

See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera
(→ page 342).
Selecting a view for the 360° Camera
Requirements
The
function is selec‐
ted in the multimedia system.

R
#
#

Engage reverse gear.
In the multimedia system, select the desired
view.

Opening the camera cover of the reversing
camera
Multimedia system:
,
. k
.
Select
.
% The camera cover closes automatically after
some time or after an ignition cycle.

Assigning the camera as a favorite
You can call up the camera view directly in the
multimedia system by assigning it as a favorite.

Driving and parking 201
#

#
#
#
#

Press the ò button on the touchpad or
controller.
The main functions are displayed.
Navigate downwards twice.
The Favorites menu appears.
Select
.
Select
.
Select
.

Active Parking Assist
Function of Active Parking Assist
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
assistance system which uses ultrasound and is
automatically activated during forward travel.
The system is operational at speeds of up to
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). When all the
conditions are fulfilled, the c symbol appears
in the multifunction display and the system auto‐
matically searches for and measures parking
spaces on both sides of the vehicle parallel and
perpendicular to the direction of travel. If Active
Parking Assist is activated, suitable parking
spaces are displayed in the multimedia system.

The ë symbol appears in the multifunction
display. The arrows show on which side of the
carriageway free parking spaces are located.
The parking space and, if necessary, the parking
direction can be selected as desired. Active
Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path
and assists you in parking and exiting the park‐
ing space.
Active Parking Assist changes gear, accelerates,
brakes and steers the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
maneuvering range.
Active Parking Assist is canceled if, among other
things, one of the following actions is carried
out:
R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC.
R You deactivate Active Parking Assist.
R You begin steering.
R You apply the parking brake.

R
R
R

You engage j.
ESP® intervenes.
You open the tailgate.

System limitations of Active Parking Assist
Objects located above or below the detection
range of Active Parking Assist are not detected
when the parking space is being measured.
These are also not taken into account when the
parking maneuver is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or
the boundaries of parking spaces. In some cir‐
cumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore
guide you into the parking space prematurely.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects located above or below the
detection range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the
detection range, the following situations may
arise:
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.

202 Driving and parking
R

Vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of
these objects.

This could cause a collision.
# In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately. Parking
spaces that are partially occupied by trailer draw
bars might not be identified as such or be meas‐
ured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist
on level, high-grip ground.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following
situations:
R If you are driving in extreme weather condi‐
tions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy
rain.
R If you are transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle.
R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient.
R If you have installed snow chains.

Active Parking Assist may also display parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking, e.g.:
R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
Active Parking Assist will not assist you with
parking spaces at right angles to the direction of
travel in the following situations:
R If two parking spaces are located immedi‐
ately next to each other.
R If the parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low curb.
Active Parking Assist will not assist you with
parking spaces at right angles to the direction of
travel in the following situations:
R If the parking space is on a curb.
R If the parking space is bordered by an obsta‐
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer.
Parking with Active Parking Assist
% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located at a different
position in the center console.

Press button 1.
The Active Parking Assist view appears on
the multimedia system display. Area 2 dis‐
plays detected parking spaces 4 and vehi‐
cle path 3.

% Vehicle path 3 shown on the multimedia
system display may differ from the actual
vehicle path.

Driving and parking 203
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐
cle swinging out while parking or pulling
out of a parking space

#
#
#

If you have driven past a suitable parking
space: bring the vehicle to a standstill.
Select desired parking space 4.
Where necessary, select the parking direc‐
tion: forwards or backwards.
Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on the
selected parking space and parking direc‐
tion.
Confirm the selected parking space.

While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas
of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects
or other road users.
# Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with
Active Parking Assist.
#

If, for example, the
message appears in the multimedia system
display: select the corresponding transmis‐
sion position.
The vehicle drives into the selected parking
space.

On completion of the parking procedure, the

display message appears. Further maneuvering
may still be necessary.
# After completion of the parking procedure,
safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
When required by legal requirements or local
conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb.
% You can stop the vehicle and change the
transmission position during the parking pro‐
cedure. The system then calculates a new
vehicle path. The parking procedure can
then be continued. If no new vehicle path is
available, the transmission position will be
changed again. If the vehicle has not yet
reached the parking space, the parking pro‐
cedure will be canceled, should a gear be
changed.
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking
Assist
Requirement
You can only exit a parking space with Active
Parking Assist if you have previously parked the
vehicle with Active Parking Assist.

204 Driving and parking
Please note that you are responsible for the vehi‐
cle and surroundings during the entire parking
procedure.
# Start the vehicle.

If the vehicle has been parked at right angles
to the direction of travel: in area 2, select
direction of travel 3.

% The vehicle path shown on the multimedia
system display may differ from the actual
vehicle path.
# Confirm to start the exiting process.

Press button 1.
The Active Parking Assist view appears on
the multimedia system display.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐
cle swinging out while parking or pulling
out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas
of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects
or other road users.
# Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with
Active Parking Assist.
#

If, for example, the
message appears in the multimedia system
display: select the corresponding transmis‐
sion position.
The vehicle moves out of the parking space.

Driving and parking 205
symbol appears on the camera image of the mul‐
timedia system.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by
limited detection performance of Drive
Away Assist

Example: vehicles with 360° Camera

After the exiting procedure has been completed,
the
message appears in the display of the
multimedia system. A warning tone and display
4 in the multimedia system prompt you to take
over control of the vehicle. You have to acceler‐
ate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.
Function of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is
detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's
speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph
(2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, a

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐
tify objects and traffic situations.
In such cases, Drive Away Assist might:
R Warn you without reason and limit the
vehicle speed.
R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle
speed.
#

Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away
Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐
essary, provided the traffic situation
permits and that it is safe to take eva‐
sive action.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐
stitute for your attention to the surroundings.

The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
maneuvering range.
A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit‐
uations, for example:
R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and
brake pedals.
R If the wrong gear is selected.
The Drive Away Assist function is active under
the following conditions:
R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
R Every time the gear is changed to k or h
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.
3.3 ft (1.0 m) away.
R If the maneuvering assistant function is acti‐
vated in the multimedia system.
System limitations
Drive Away Assist is not available on inclines.

206 Driving and parking
Function of Cross Traffic Alert
% Also read the instructions on Blind Spot
Assist (→ page 210).
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: Drivers can
also be warned of any crossing traffic when
backing out of a parking space. If a critical situa‐
tion is detected, a warning symbol appears on
the camera image of the multimedia system. If
the driver does not respond to the warning, the
vehicle's brakes can be applied automatically. To
do this, the function uses the radar sensors in
the bumper. The area adjacent to the vehicle is
continually monitored.
If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles
or other objects, detection is not possible.
The Cross Traffic Alert function is active under
the following conditions:
R If Blind Spot Assist is activated.
R If the vehicle is backing up at walking pace.
R If the maneuvering assistant function is acti‐
vated in the multimedia system.
The Cross Traffic Alert function is not available
on inclines.

Deactivating/activating the maneuvering
assistant
Multimedia system:
,
. k
.
.
#

Switch the function on O or off ª.

ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐
nous journeys, e.g. on freeways and trunk roads.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati‐
gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the
part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration
until too late. The system is not a substitute for a
well-rested and attentive driver. On long jour‐
neys, take regular breaks in good time that allow
for adequate recuperation.
You can choose between two settings.
R Standard: normal system sensitivity.

Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The
driver is warned earlier and the attention
level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐
ted accordingly.

If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐
tion are detected, the
warning appears in the Instrument Dis‐
play. You can acknowledge the message and
take a break where necessary. If you do not take
a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to
detect increasing lapses in concentration, you
will be warned again after a minimum of
15 minutes.

Driving and parking 207
You can have the following status information for
ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance
menu of the on-board computer:
R The length of the journey since the last
break.
R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the
attention level and cannot issue a warning, the
message appears.
If a warning is given in the Instrument Display,
the multimedia system offers to search for a rest
area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐
tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐
ted and deactivated in the multimedia system.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é
symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the
Instrument Display when the engine is running.
ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically
when the engine is re-started. The last selected
sensitivity level remains stored.

System limitations
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph
(60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all in the following situations:
R If you have been driving for less than 30
minutes.
R If the road condition is poor (uneven road
surface or potholes).
R If there is a strong side wind.
R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC is active.
R If the time has been set incorrectly.
R In active driving situations, if you change
lanes and vary your speed frequently.
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness
assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐
tinuing the journey in the following situations:
R If you switch off the engine.

If you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. change drivers or take a
break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
Multimedia system:
,
. k
Setting options
# Select

Suggesting a rest area
Select
.
# Activate O or deactivate the function ª.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or
increasing lack of attention, it suggests a
rest area in the vicinity.
# Select a suggested rest area.
You are guided to the selected rest area.
#

208 Driving and parking
Traffic Sign Assist
Function of Traffic Sign Assist

Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data
stored in the navigation system, it can update
the display in the following situations without
detecting traffic signs:
R When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. slip
road or motorway exit.
R When a village or town boundary is passed
which is stored in the digital map.
The camera also detects traffic signs with a
restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g.
relating to wet conditions).

Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs using
multifunction camera 1. It assists you by dis‐
playing detected speed limits and overtaking
restrictions in the instrument cluster.

Warning when the maximum permissible
speed is exceeded
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do
this, you can specify in the multimedia system
by how much the maximum permissible speed
can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You
can specify whether the warning is to be just a
visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the Instrument Display

1 Permissible speed
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3 Additional sign with restriction

% The illustration shows the Instrument Display
in the Widescreen Cockpit

Driving and parking 209
R

R
R

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun‐
tries. If it is unavailable, display 1 is shown in
the speedometer.
System limitations
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
cient illumination of the road, highly variable
shade conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or
heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.

If there is dirt on the windshield in the vicin‐
ity of the multifunction camera or the camera
is fogged up, damaged or obscured.
If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due
to dirt or snow, or because they are covered,
or due to insufficient lighting.
If the information in the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs
on construction sites or in adjacent lanes.

Setting Traffic Sign Assist
Multimedia system:
,
. k

Select

Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign
Assist are automatically adopted by Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

Displaying detected traffic signs in the
media display
# Select
.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Adjusting the type of warning
Select
,
or

Activating /deactivating automatic adoption
of speed limits
Requirements
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
#

Adjusting the warning threshold
This value determines the speed at which a
warning is issued when exceeded.
# Select
.
# Set the desired speed.

210 Driving and parking
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot
Assist
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active
Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing
radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft
(40 m) behind your vehicle and 10 ft (3 m)
directly next to your vehicle.
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐
imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse‐
quently enters the monitoring range directly next
to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside
mirror lights up red.
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in
the lateral monitoring range and you switch on
the turn signal indicator in the corresponding
direction, a warning tone sounds once. The red
warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the
turn signal indicator remains on, all other detec‐
ted vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of
the red warning lamp.
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is
given.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind
Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles
approaching and overtaking you at a greatly
different speed.
As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn
drivers in this situation.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi‐
cles and are no substitute for attentive driving.
Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to
the side for other road users and obstacles.
System limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
R the sensors are dirty or covered
R poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
snow or spray

narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles, are within the
monitoring range

Warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐
ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a pro‐
longed time.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
gear is engaged.
Function of braking applications (Active
Blind Spot Assist)
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐
recting brake application is carried out. This is
designed to help you avoid a collision.
The course-correcting brake application is availa‐
ble in the speed range between approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).

Driving and parking 211
& WARNING Risk of accident despite
brake application of Active Blind Spot
Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision.
# Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐
self, especially if Active Blind Spot
Assist warns you or makes a coursecorrecting brake application.
# Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei‐
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐
uations.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite
Active Blind Spot Assist
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the
following:
R Overtaking vehicles closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area.
R Vehicles approaching and overtaking you
at a very different speed.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐
ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐
play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision
appears in the multifunction display.
In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐
priate brake application. This brake application

may be interrupted at any time if you steer
slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
System limitations
Either a course-correcting brake application
appropriate to the driving situation, or none at
all, may occur in the following situations:
R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle.
R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
R You brake or accelerate significantly.
R A driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP® or Active Brake Assist.
R ESP® is deactivated.
R A loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.

212 Driving and parking
Activating or deactivating Blind Spot Assist
or Active Blind Spot Assist
Multimedia system:
,
. k
.
#

Active Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

and a course-correcting brake application guides
you back into your lane.
You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer‐
ing wheel in the following circumstances:
R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings.
R A front wheel passes over the lane markings.
You will also be guided back into your lane by
means of a course-correcting brake application
if the following conditions are met:
R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on both sides.
R A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark‐
ing.

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin‐
tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned
by means of a vibration in the steering wheel

Whether a warning is issued and when this
occurs also depends on the selected sensitivity
setting (standard or adaptive).
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics. It can‐
not take into account road, weather or traffic
conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the

Driving and parking 213
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in lane.
Vehicles with Lane Tracking package: If the
lane markings are solid lines and you do not
react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake
application can bring the vehicle back into the
original lane.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or
Driving Assistance Plus package: If you do not
react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake
application can bring the vehicle back into the
original lane. In the case of a broken lane mark‐
ing being detected, a brake application will only
be made if a vehicle has been detected in the
adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking
vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be
detected.
The brake application is available in the speed
range between 40 mph (60 km/h) and 120 mph
(200 km/h).

R
R

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis‐
play 1 appears in the multifunction display.
System limits
No lane-correcting brake application occurs in
the following situations:
R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐
erate.
R You have switched on the turn signal indica‐
tor.
R A driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind
Spot Assist.

You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐
eration.
ESP® is deactivated.
When driving with a trailer, the electrical con‐
nection to the trailer has been correctly
established.
If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
has been detected and displayed.

The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R There is poor visibility, for example due to
insufficient illumination of the road, highly
variable shade conditions, or due to rain,
snow, fog or heavy spray.
R There is glare, for example from the sun,
reflections or oncoming traffic.
R There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity
of the multifunction camera or the camera is
fogged up, damaged or obscured.
R No or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, for example in a con‐
struction area.

214 Driving and parking
R
R

R
R

The lane markings are worn, dark or covered.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected.
The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge.
The road is very narrow and winding.

Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or
Driving Assistance Plus package: Active Lane
Keeping Assist uses radar sensors to monitor
several areas around the vehicle. If the radar
sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered
with snow, the system may be impaired or may
not function. If an obstacle in the lane in which
you are driving has been detected, no lane-cor‐
recting brake application occurs.
Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist
& WARNING Risk of accident despite
Active Lane Keeping Assist warning
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the origi‐
nal lane.

Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐
self, especially if Active Lane Keeping
Assist warns you or makes a lane-cor‐
recting brake application.

In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
R give an unnecessary warning
R not give a warning
#

& WARNING Risk of accident despite inter‐
vention of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
cases, the system may make an inappropri‐
ate brake application, e.g. after intentionally
driving over a solid lane marking.
The brake application can be interrupted at
any time if you steer slightly in the opposite
direction.
# Always make sure that there is suffi‐
cient distance to the side for other traf‐
fic or obstacles.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Lane
Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
detect lane markings.

Always pay particular attention to the
traffic situation and keep within the
lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping
Assist alerts you.

Requirement
The driving speed is at least 40 mph (60 km/h).

Driving and parking 215
In both the standard and adaptive settings, no
warning vibration occurs in the following situa‐
tions:
R You have switched on the turn signal indica‐
tor.
R A driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®.

Press button 2.
If indicator lamp 1 lights up, Lane Keeping
Assist is activated. When lane markings are
detected, the lines in the assistance graphic
are shown in white.

Sensitivity of Active Lane Keeping Assist
With the standard or adaptive setting, you can
influence when the warning vibration of Lane
Keeping Assist takes place.

In the adaptive setting, there will also be no
warning vibration in the following situations:
R The vehicle is accelerated or braked consid‐
erably.
R You steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lane quickly.
R You cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Setting the sensitivity of Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assist
Multimedia system:
,
. k
.
#

Select a setting.

216 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Instrument Display overview
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may not recognize dangers.

Instrument Display (standard)

Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cock‐
pit

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an
instrument display malfunction
If the instrument display has failed or mal‐
functioned, you cannot recognize function
restrictions applying to safety relevant sys‐
tems.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as pos‐
sible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

1
2
3
4
5

Speedometer
Multifunction display
Tachometer
Coolant temperature display
Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐
tor

1
2
3
4
5

Speedometer
Multifunction display
Example: area for additional values
Coolant temperature display
Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐
tor

% Further display content can be shown in dis‐
play 3 for additional values (→ page 219).
The segments in speedometer 1 indicate the
system status for the following:
R Cruise control (→ page 175)

Instrument Display and on-board computer 217
R

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(→ page 177)

* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively
high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with
the engine in the overrevving range.
# Do not drive with the engine in the over‐
revving range.

#
#

Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.

Overview of the buttons on the steering
wheel

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band in tachometer 3
(overrevving range) is reached.
During normal operating conditions, coolant
temperature display 4 may rise to the red
mark.

Operating the on-board computer
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment

& WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.

W Increases the volume
X Decreases the volume
2 Touch Control (on-board computer)
3 Touch Control (multimedia system)
4 Button group:
¤ Main menu and back button (multime‐
dia system)
£ LINGUATRONIC or voice control sys‐
tem
6 Makes/accepts a call
~ Rejects/ends a call

1 Button group:

¤ Main menu and back button (on-board
computer)
8 Switches sound off/on

If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.

218 Instrument Display and on-board computer
#
#

Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the on-board computer.
% The on-board computer displays appear on
the multifunction display (→ page 219).

The on-board computer can be operated using
Touch Control 2 and back button 1 on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
Different acoustic signals provide feedback
when operating the on-board computer, e.g:
R reaching the end of a list
R scrolling through a list
The following menus are available:
R

R
R

R
#

R
R
R

Vehicles with an instrument display in
the widescreen cockpit:

The menus can be called up from the menu bar
on the multifunction display.

To call up the menu bar: press the back
button on the left 1.
To scroll in the menu bar: swipe to the left
or right on the left-hand Touch Control 2.
To call up the menu or confirm the selec‐
tion: press the left-hand Touch Control 2.
To scroll through displays or lists on the
menu: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control2.
To call up a submenu or confirm the
selection: press the left-hand Touch Control
2.

Instrument Display and on-board computer 219
#

To exit a submenu: press the back button
on the left 1.

If you are browsing a submenu and you press
and hold the back button on the left 1, the
menu bar appears.
Setting the additional value range

Example: G-Meter
1 Additional value range
2 Index points
#

To select display content: swipe to the
right on the left-hand Touch Control.

Swipe upwards or downwards on the lefthand Touch Control to select display content.
When display content is selected, the addi‐
tional value range 1 is briefly highlighted.
The index points 2 display the selected list
item.
The following display content can be selected in
the
and
designs:
R Tachometer
R Navigation
R ECO display
R Consumption
R G-Meter
#

The following content can be selected in the
design:
R Date
R Navigation
R ECO display
R Consumption
R G-Meter

Overview of displays on the multifunction
display

1
2
3
4
5

Outside temperature
Drive program
Transmission position
Time
Display section

% Vehicles with the Instrument Display in
the Widescreen Cockpit: the position of
the displays deviates from those displayed
here.

220 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Further displays on the multifunction display:
Gearshift recommendation (→ page 156)
Z
ë Active Parking Assist activated
(→ page 202)
é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(→ page 194)
¯ Cruise control (→ page 175)
ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(→ page 177)
è Active Steering Assist (→ page 182)
è ECO start/stop function (→ page 151)
ë HOLD function (→ page 185)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (→ page 127)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected
instructions and traffic signs (→ page 208).

Adjusting the instrument lighting

Menus and submenus
Functions in the Service menu of the onboard computer
On-board computer:
,

To select the function: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Functions in the
menu:
R Message memory (→ page 408)
R
:
Checking tire pressure with the tire pres‐
sure monitoring system (→ page 372)
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring
system(→ page 373)
R
: Calling up the service due
date (→ page 332)
#

Turn brightness control 1 up or down.
The lighting of the Instrument Display and in
the control elements in the vehicle interior is
adjusted.

Instrument Display and on-board computer 221
Calling up the assistant display

On-board computer:

% Vehicles with the Instrument Display in
the Widescreen Cockpit: when you have
the design set to
, you can view
the assistant display in the left-hand portion
of the Instrument Display.
The following displays are available from the
assistant display menu:
R Assistant display
R Attention level (→ page 206)
#

To switch between the displays: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.

Gray radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot
Assist activated
Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot
Assist active
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays
(→ page 177)

Calling up displays in the Trip menu
On-board computer:
,

Status displays on the assistant display:
é: ATTENTION ASSIST deactivated
R æ: Active Brake Assist deactivated
R Light lane markings: Active Lane Keeping
Assist activated
R Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping
Assist active

% Vehicles with an Instrument Display in
the Widescreen Cockpit: when you have
the design set to
, you can view
information on the journey in the left-hand
area of the Instrument Display.
# To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Displays in the
menu:
R Standard display
R Range and current fuel consumption

222 Instrument Display and on-board computer

R
R
R

When glide mode is active (→ page 156),
is displayed instead of the cur‐
rent fuel consumption.
A recuperation display is also available for
certain engines. If there is only a small
amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the dis‐
play shows a vehicle being refueled instead
of the range.
ECO display (→ page 152)
Trip computer
and
Digital speedometer

% Vehicles with an Instrument Display in
the Widescreen Cockpit: the digital speed‐
ometer only appears in the
and
designs.

Example: standard display

1 Trip distance
2 Total distance recorder

1
2
3
4

Example: trip computer
Total distance recorder
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption

Instrument Display and on-board computer 223
Resetting values on the Trip menu of the onboard computer

Calling up navigation instructions in the onboard computer

On-board computer:

% The spelling may differ in the main menu dis‐
played. Therefore, observe the menu over‐
view for the Instrument Display
(→ page 217).
You can reset the values of the following func‐
tions:
R Trip distance
R Trip computer
and
R ECO display (→ page 152)
#

#
#
#

To select the function to be reset: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Select
.
Press the left-hand Touch Control.

If you press and hold the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol, the function will be reset immediately.

1
2
3
4

Example: no change of direction announced
Distance to the next destination
Estimated arrival time
Distance to the next change of direction
Current road

Example: change of direction announced
Road to which the change of direction leads
Distance to the change of direction
Change-of-direction symbol
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction (white)
5 Possible lane
6 Lane not recommended (dark gray)
1
2
3
4

Further possible displays on the
menu:
R
: display of direction of
travel and road currently being traveled on.

224 Instrument Display and on-board computer
R
R
R
R
R
R

or
: a new
route is calculated.
: the road is unknown, e.g.
for newly built roads.
: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
: the map for the current location is
not available.
: you have
reached the area of destination.
O: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.

To exit the menu: press the back button on
the left.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys‐
tem: You can also start navigation to one of the
recent destinations on the
menu:
# Press the left-hand touch control.
# Select a destination: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand touch control.
# Press the left-hand touch control.
Route guidance is started.

#
#

If route guidance has already been activated,
a request will appear asking whether you
wish to end the current route guidance.
Select
.
Press the left-hand touch control.
Route guidance is started.

Selecting radio stations using the on-board
computer
On-board computer:
,

1
2
3
4

Frequency range
Station
Name of track
Name of artist

When you select a station in the memory pre‐
sets, the preset appears next to the station
name. When you select a saved station in the
frequency range, an asterisk appears next to the
station name.

Instrument Display and on-board computer 225
#

To select a radio station: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

Selecting the frequency range or station pre‐
set
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
# To select the frequency range/station
preset: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

Media playback using the on-board computer
On-board computer:
,

Changing a media source
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
# To select a media source: swipe upwards
or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Dialing telephone numbers using the onboard computer
Requirements:
R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system.

1
2
3
4

Media source
Current track and track number
Name of artist (example)
Name of album

To change tracks on an active media
source: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control.

On-board computer:
,

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the

226 Instrument Display and on-board computer
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys‐
tem: The most recent telephone connections
(dialed, received and missed calls) are displayed
on the
menu.
# Select an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand touch control.
# Press the left-hand touch control.
If there is only one telephone number
saved to an entry: the telephone number is
selected.
# If there are multiple telephone numbers
saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down‐

wards on the left-hand touch control to
select the desired telephone number.
# Press the left-hand touch control.
The telephone number is dialed.
The following displays may appear instead of the
telephone numbers dialed:
R
: the application is starting.
When a Bluetooth® connection to the mobile
phone is not established, the menu for
authorizing and connecting a mobile phone is
displayed in the multimedia system
(→ page 288).
R
: the call list is being upda‐
ted.
R
: the contacts from the
mobile phone or from a storage medium are
being imported.
Accepting/rejecting a call
When you receive a call, the
mes‐
sage appears on the head-up display.
# Swipe upwards or downwards on the lefthand touch control and select 6 (Accept)
or ~ (Reject).

Press the left-hand touch control.

The call may be accepted/rejected using the
6 or ~ buttons on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the Head-up Display settings via
the on-board computer
On-board computer:
,

The following Head-up Display settings can be
adjusted:
R
R
R
#
#
#
#

To select a setting: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
To adjust a value: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press the left-hand Touch Control.

Instrument Display and on-board computer 227
Setting the design
On-board computer
,

% This function is only available for vehicles
with a Widescreen Cockpit.
The following designs can be selected:
R

The Head-up Display projects into the driver's
field of vision:
R Information from the navigation system
R Information from the driver assistance sys‐
tems
R Some warning messages
Display elements

R
R
#
#

1
2
3
4

Setting currently selected
Digital speedometer
Traffic Sign Assist
Navigation displays

To select a design: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The Instrument Display is shown in the selec‐
ted design.

Head-up Display
Function of the Head-up Display
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may not recognize dangers.

1
2
3
4

Navigation messages
Current speed
Detected instructions and traffic signs
Set speed in the driver assistance system
(e.g. cruise control)

228 Instrument Display and on-board computer
When you receive a call, the 6
message appears on the Head-up Display.
In audio mode, the station name or track is tem‐
porarily shown when the active audio source is
being operated.

Switching the Head-up Display on/off

System limitations
The visibility is influenced by the following condi‐
tions:
R Seat position
R The positioning of the display image
R Light conditions
R Wet roads
R Objects on the display cover
R Polarization in sunglasses
% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display
may appear washed out. You can correct this
by switching the Head-up Display off and on
again.

Press button 1.

Voice Control System 229
Notes on operating safety
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating mobile communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.

This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
Only operate this equipment when the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
For your own safety, always observe the follow‐
ing points when operating mobile communica‐
tions equipment and especially your voice con‐
trol system:
R Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐
try in which you are driving.
R While driving, only operate mobile communi‐
cations equipment and your voice control
system when the traffic conditions permit it.
You may otherwise be distracted from the
traffic conditions and cause an accident,
injuring yourself and others.
R Do not use the voice control system in an
emergency as your voice can change and
your telephone call can be unnecessarily
delayed.
R Familiarize yourself with the voice control
system functions before starting the journey.

Operation
Operating the multifunction steering wheel
The Voice Control System is operational approx‐
imately thirty seconds after the ignition is
switched on.

1 8 Switches the sound off/on (ends Voice

Control System)

2 ó Starts Voice Control System
3 6 Makes/accepts a call
4 ~ Rejects/ends a call (ends Voice Con‐

trol System)

230 Voice Control System
5 W Increases the volume
6 X Decreases the volume

Conducting a dialog
#

#
#
#
#
#

To start or continue a dialog: press the
ó button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
You can say a voice command after an
acoustic signal.
To correct an entry: say the
voice command.
To select an entry from the selection list:
say the line number or the contents.
To browse the selection list: say the
or
voice command.
To interrupt the dialog: say the
voice
command.
To cancel the dialog: say the
voice
command or press the 8 button on the
multifunction steering wheel.

Operable functions
You can use the Voice Control System to operate
the following equipment depending on the fea‐
tures:
R Telephone
R Text messages
R Navigation
R Address book
R Radio
R Audio (memory card, Media Interface, USB
and Bluetooth® audio)
R Vehicle
Overview of types of voice commands
A distinction is made between the following
voice commands:
R Global voice commands can be said at any
time and regardless of the current applica‐
tion, e.g. the voice commands
,
or
.

Application-specific voice commands are
only available for the active application.

1 Global voice commands
2 Application-specific voice commands

On the display next to the active application,
examples of global voice commands and the cor‐
responding application-specific voice commands
are displayed on an autocue. This makes entry
easier and supports interactive operation. The
list can be scrolled or it can be operated by
speech or the controller/touchpad.

Voice Control System 231
Number entry functions
R
R

The numbers allowed are
to
.
Telephone numbers can be entered as single
digits.

Information on the language setting
You can change the language of the Voice Con‐
trol System via the system language settings. If
the set system language is not supported by the
Voice Control System, English will be selected.
The Voice Control System is available in English,
French, Portuguese and Spanish.
Using the Voice Control System effectively
Features of audible help functions
You receive information and help for:
R Optimal operation: say the
voice command.

R
R

Current application: on the multifunction
steering wheel, press the ó rocker switch
up and say the
voice command.
Continued dialog: say the
voice com‐
mand during a voice dialog.
A specific system: say the voice commands
for the desired system, e.g.
.

Notes on how to improve speech quality
If The Voice Control System does not under‐
stand you:
R only operate The Voice Control System from
the driver's seat.
R say the voice commands coherently and
clearly, but do not exaggerate the words.
R avoid loud noises, e.g. the blower, that cause
interference while making a voice command
entry.

say the voice tag with the same intonation
when creating voice tags.

If an address book entry voice tag is not rec‐
ognized:
R only create sensible address book entries in
the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter sur‐
name and first name in the correct field.
R do not use any abbreviations, unnecessary
spaces or special characters.
If a station list entry is not recognized:
R say the
voice command.
Essential voice commands
Overview of switch voice commands
Switch voice commands can be used to open
certain applications. The voice command selec‐
tion can be used regardless of the application
that is currently active.

232 Voice Control System
Voice command

Function
To switch to navigation mode
To switch to map display
To switch to address book
To switch to telephone mode
To switch to text messages
To switch to radio mode
To switch to media mode
To switch to USB
To switch to memory card
To start a Mercedes-Benz online application. The application must be called up by touch once prior
to use.
To switch to Mercedes-Benz Apps
To switch to Internet mode

Voice Control System 233
Voice command

Function
To switch to vehicle settings
To switch to system settings

Overview of navigation voice commands

Voice command

Using navigation voice commands, you can enter
POIs or conventional addresses as well as
directly change important navigation settings.
Function
Universal search for all types of destinations. A search is also conducted in the address book con‐
tacts, the navigation database and on the Internet (POIs). The order of the details, e.g. city, street or
house number, can be changed.
Destination entry in a desired country, e.g. address in France.
Starts navigation to home address
Starts navigation to your workspace
Destination entry for a POI, e.g. the POI Brandenburg Gate. A search is also performed in the navi‐
gation database and on the Internet.
Conducts a POI search on the Internet only

234 Voice Control System
Voice command

Function
Destination entry to a contact in the address book
Enters a country/town/district/street/intersection/house number/ZIP code

Searches for nearby restaurants, parking lots, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations

Searches for restaurants, parking lots, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations along the route

Voice Control System 235
Voice command

Function
Searches for restaurants, parking lots, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations at the destination

Selects a destination from the list of last entered destinations
Switches route guidance to another route
Starts route guidance after entering a valid destination
Cancels route guidance
Switches the route guidance voice output on/off
Switches the traffic map on/off
Switches the POI symbols display on the map on/off

Overview of telephone voice commands

You can use the telephone voice commands to
make phone calls or search through the address

book.

236 Voice Control System

Voice command

Function
Makes a phone call. All address book names are available.
Searches for and displays a contact. All address book names are available.
Displays the last call
Selects the last phone number dialed

Overview of radio voice commands

Voice command

Radio voice commands can also be used when
the radio application is running in the back‐
ground.
Function
To call up receivable or saved stations
To enter a frequency directly
To switch to the next available station
To save a station in the station list

Voice Control System 237
Voice command

Function
To display the names of all receivable stations
To listen to the names of all receivable stations
To switch the traffic information service on/off
To switch the current station information on/off

Overview of media player voice commands

Media player voice commands can also be used
when the media player runs in the background.

238 Voice Control System
Voice command

Function
The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted dur‐
ing the search.

The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted dur‐
ing the search.

Voice Control System 239
Voice command

Function
Available albums, artists, composers, genres, tracks or playlists are searched for.

To select the next track
To select the previous track
To switch the random track list on/off

Overview of message voice commands

Text messages can be created, edited and lis‐
tened to using the message voice commands.

240 Voice Control System
Voice command

Function
To create a message. All address book names are available.
To reply to a message
To forward a message

Overview of vehicle voice commands

Voice command

You can use the vehicle voice commands to
directly call up the corresponding menus for the
vehicle settings.
Function
To display ambient light settings
To display the blue ambient light
To show display settings
To display assistance settings
To display fragrance settings
To display energy flow settings
To display ionization settings

Voice Control System 241
Voice command

Function
To display climate control settings
To switch on the automatic climate control settings on the driver's side
To display light settings
To display massage settings
To switch on the massage function for the driver's seat
To switch off the massage function for the driver's seat
To display the outside temperature
To display engine data
To display seat adjustment settings
To set the seat heating for the front passenger seat to level 2
To display consumption
To display vehicle data

242 Multimedia system
Overview and operation
Overview of the multimedia system

6 Main function button group (→ page 245)
7 Touchpad
8 Volume control

Adjusts volume and switches the sound
on/off
9 Ü button
Switches multimedia system on/off
A Controller

brightness is initially reduced automatically. The
media display may then switch off completely for
a while.
% If you are wearing polarized sunglasses, it
may be difficult to read the media display.
Central control elements overview

Notes on the media display
* NOTE Scratching of the display

1
2
3
4
5

8 Switches the sound on/off
X Decreases the volume
W Increases the volume
Touch Control
Media display

The display has a highly sensitive, high-gloss
surface. There is a risk of it becoming
scratched.
Avoid touching the display.
Observe the notes on cleaning.
Observe the notes on caring for the interior
(→ page 344).
Automatic temperature-controlled switchoff feature: if the temperature is too high, the

1 Touch Control
2 Controller
3 Touchpad

Multimedia system 243
Touch Control
Operating Touch Control

#
#

To call up the menu list/favorites: hold
button 2.
To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.

Operating the controller

Setting the sensitivity for Touch Control
Multimedia system:
,
. w
.
#

Select

1 % button
#
#
#
#

To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left
or right on Touch Control 1.
Press Touch Control 1.
To open a list: press Touch Control 1.
To close a list: press the 2 button.

Press briefly: returns to the previous display
Press and hold: calls up main functions
2 © button
To call up the main functions

244 Multimedia system
To call up favorites: when the main functions
are displayed, slide controller 3 down.
3 Controller

Press briefly: returns to the previous display
Press and hold: calls up main functions
You can navigate in menus and lists via touchsensitive surface 1 by using a single-finger
swipe.
# To open or close lists: swipe left or right.
# To select the menu item: swipe up, down,
left or right.
# Press touchpad 1.
# To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.

Controller operating options:
# Turn 3 left or right.
# Slide 1 left or right.
# Slide 4 up or down.
# Slide 2 diagonally.
# Press 7 briefly or press and hold.
Touchpad
Activating/deactivating the touchpad
Multimedia system:
,
. w
# Activate O or deactivate ª the
Operating the touchpad
Requirement:
For vehicles with a controller: the touchpad is
switched on (→ page 244).

1 Touchpad
2 Button ©

Calls up main functions and favorites

3 Button D

Calls up the control menu of the last active
audio source
4 Button %

Use the following functions with a two-finger
swipe:
# To call up main functions and favorites:
swipe down with two fingers.
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
# To call up the control menu of the last
active audio source: swipe up with two fin‐
gers.

Multimedia system 245
Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad
Multimedia system:
,
. w
# Select
.
# Select
,
or
.
# To set the pressure sensitivity: switch
on O or off ª.
If the function is switched on O, a tap on
the touchpad is enough to select a menu
item.

Activating/deactivating haptic feedback for
operation on the touchpad
Multimedia system:
,
. w
The function supports you when making entries
on the touchpad and when selecting menus.
# Switch
on or off.
When the function is activated, a tactile feed‐
back in the form of a vibration is effected
when the touchpad is operated.

Handwriting recognition: switching the readaloud function on/off
Multimedia system:
,
. õ
.
#

Switch
O or off ª.

Selecting a station and track using the
touchpad
# Press the D button on the touchpad.
or
# Swipe upwards using two fingers on the
touchpad.
The control menu appears for the audio
source that was last selected.
# Use one finger to swipe up or down.
Radio: the previous or the next station is set.
Media source: the previous or the next music
track is selected.

To hide the control menu: swipe down on
the touchpad using two fingers.

Main functions
Calling up the main functions

1 ß button

To call up navigation

2 $ button

To call up the radio

3 Õ button

To call up media

4 % button

To call up the telephone

246 Multimedia system
5 Ø button

To set vehicle functions

Alternatively: press the © button on the
controller, the touchpad or the Touch Con‐
trol.
The main functions are displayed.
Select the main function.

Calling up lists and menus on the multimedia
system
Call up a list
Call up a main function (→ page 245).
# To open a list: swipe left on the touchpad.
# To close a list: swipe right on the touchpad.
# To select a menu item: swipe up or down
on the touchpad.
# Press the touchpad.

Favorites
Overview of favorites
Favorites offer you quick access to frequently
used applications. It is possible to create 20
favorites in total.
The following functions are available:
R add pre-defined favorites from the follow‐
ing categories (→ page 246):
-

R
R
R
R
R

add your own favorites (→ page 246).
rename a favorite (→ page 247).
move a favorite (→ page 247).
delete a favorite (→ page 247).
reset all favorites (→ page 247).

Calling up favorites
# Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
# Navigate downwards once.
Navigating means:
R Swiping on Touch Control or the touch‐
pad
R Sliding the controller
Leaving the favorites menu
# Press the © button.
Adding a favorite
Adding a pre-defined favorite
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
# Navigate downwards twice.
The Favorites menu appears.
# Select
.
The categories are displayed.
# Select a category.
The favorites are displayed.
# Select a favorite.
#

Multimedia system 247
#

Store the favorite at the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.

Example: adding your own favorite
# Select
.
# Select
.
# Press and hold the © button until the
favorites are displayed.
# Store the favorite at the desired position.
Renaming a favorite
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
# Navigate downwards once.
# Select a favorite.
# Navigate downwards once.
The Favorites menu appears.
# Select
.
# Enter the characters.
# To confirm the entry: select ¡.
#

Moving a favorite
# Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
# Navigate downwards once.
# Select a favorite.
# Navigate downwards once.
The Favorites menu appears.
# Select
.
# Move the favorite to the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Deleting a favorite
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
# Navigate downwards once.
# Select a favorite.
# Navigate downwards once.
The Favorites menu appears.
# To delete: select
.
# Select
.
#

#
#

To restore all favorites: select
.
A prompt appears.
Select
.
The favorites are reset to the factory set‐
tings.

Switching the sound on or off

248 Multimedia system
#

To mute: press volume control 1.
The 8 symbol appears in the status line.
You will also hear traffic announcements and
navigation announcements even when the
sound is muted.
To switch on: change the media source or
adjust the volume.

Adjusting the volume

Adjust this in the following situations:
during a traffic announcement
R during a navigation announcement
The volume of the navigation announce‐
ment changes in accordance with the vol‐
ume of the current media source.
R during a telephone call
R when entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
R

or
Select
.
Select
.
# Select a volume setting.
# Set the volume.
% The volume can also be set on the multifunc‐
tion steering wheel (→ page 217).
#
#

On the multimedia system
#

Turn volume control 1.
The volume of the current radio or media
source is set. The volume of other audio
sources can be adjusted separately.

Multimedia system 249
Entering characters
Using the character input function
Use the character input function in the following
situations, for example:
R To rename a favorite
R To enter a POI or address
R To make a phone call
The following functions are available:
Selecting a character in the character bar
R Writing a character on the touchpad

Character input can be started with a control
element and resumed with another.
# On the Touch Control and controller:
select a character in the character bar.
Depending on the target entry, the following
characters are available:
R The full set of characters is shown
R Only those characters which are useful
for the current input string are shown
Other characters are grayed out.

On the touchpad: select a character in the
character bar.

or
Write the characters on the touch-sensitive
surface of the touchpad.
Handwriting recognition supports you by
means of character suggestions and a readaloud function.
Examples of character entry:
R Rename a favorite
R Enter a POI or an address using free or stepby-step search
R Enter a web address

Entering characters using the controller.
Example: renaming a favorite

Call up the "Renaming a favorite" function
(→ page 247).
# To enter a character: turn 3, slide 4
and press the controller.
The character is entered in the input line.
Use the following entry functions:
% To delete a character: press the control‐
ler.
To delete an entry: press and hold the
controller until the entire entry is deleted.
#

250 Multimedia system
Ä To switch to special characters and sym‐
bols.
X To switch to upper-case or lower-case let‐
ters.
B To switch the language.

Example: renaming a favorite

#
#

Example: entering a destination (navigation)
Enter the POI or address (→ page 263).

Requirements
The touchpad is switched on (→ page 244).
R The entered or selected character should be
read out: the handwriting recognition readaloud function is switched on (→ page 245).

Press the % button.

Example: entering a destination (navigation)
# Enter the POI or address (→ page 263).
#
#

Entering characters on the touchpad
R

To delete a character: swipe left when the
cursor is located in the input line.
To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.
To finish character entry: swipe upwards.

v To switch to character entry on the touch‐
pad.
% The available editing functions depend on
the editing task, the language set and the
character level.
# To confirm the entry: select ¡.

#
#
#

Call up the "Renaming a favorite" function
(→ page 247).
To enter a character: use your finger to
write characters on the touchpad.
The character is entered in the input line. If
different interpretations are possible, charac‐
ter suggestions are displayed.
To select a character suggestion: turn the
controller.
Resume character input.
To enter a space: swipe right when the cur‐
sor is located in the input line.

System settings
Display
Configuring display settings
Multimedia system:
,
. G
Designs
Select
# Select

Adapting the ambient lighting for the style

Multimedia system 251
#

Select
.
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
This function adjusts the ambient lighting for
the selected display style.

Additional display area
Depending on the vehicle, various items of addi‐
tional information can be shown. The additional
display area comprises the left-hand or righthand third of the display.
# Select
.
The following display content can be selected:
R
R
R
R

Display brightness
Select
.
# Select a brightness value.
#

Switching the display off/on
# Off: select
.

On: press a button, %, for example.

Display design
Select
# Select
.

Time and date
Setting the time and date automatically
Multimedia system:
,
. &
# Deactivate ª
.
The time and date are set automatically for
the selected time zone and summer time
option.
% The correct time is required for the following
functions:
R Route guidance with time-dependent
traffic guidance.
R Calculation of expected time of arrival.

Setting the time zone
Multimedia system:
,
. &

The list of countries is displayed.
# Select a country #.
Depending on the country, time zones are
displayed.
# Select a time zone.
The time zone set is displayed after
.
Setting summer time
The
and
options cannot be selected in
all countries.
Multimedia system:
,
. &
Automatically
# Switch
O or off ª.

252 Multimedia system
Manually
# Deactivate ª
.
# Select
# Select
or .

Set the date and time format #.

Setting the time manually
Requirement
R The
switched on.
Multimedia system:
,
. &
#
#
#

Connectivity

Switching transmission of the vehicle posi‐
tion on/off
Multimedia system:
,
. ö
# Select
.
# Switch the function on O or off ª.

Bluetooth®
function is

Set the hours.
Navigate to the right to set the minutes.
Set the minutes.

Information about Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® technology is a standard for shortrange wireless data transfer up to approximately
32.8 ft (10 m). You can use Bluetooth® to con‐
nect your mobile phone to the multimedia sys‐
tem and use the following functions, for exam‐
ple:
R hands-free system with access to the follow‐
ing options:

contacts (→ page 291)
call lists (→ page 294)
text messages
Internet connection
listening to music via Bluetooth® audio
(→ page 319)
transferring business cards (vCards) into the
vehicle
-

The date is set automatically via GPS.

Setting the time and date format
Multimedia system:
,
. &
#

Confirm changes when exiting the menu.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
% Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not
available in all countries.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth®
Requirement
Apple CarPlay™ is not active.

Multimedia system:
,
. ö
#

Activate O or deactivate ª Bluetooth®.

Multimedia system 253
If Android Auto is active, a prompt appears ask‐
ing whether Bluetooth® should be deactivated.
# Select
.
Android Auto is closed and Bluetooth® is
deactivated.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi connection overview
You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with
a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or
other network devices.
The following connection options are available:
R Wi-Fi connection
The Wi-Fi connection to a Wi-Fi-capable
device, e.g. the customer's mobile phone or
a tablet PC is established.
R multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot
Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook
can be connected, for example.
To establish a connection, you can use the fol‐
lowing methods:
R WPS PIN

The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made via a PIN.
WPS PBC
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made by pressing a button (push button).
security key
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made via a security key.

Setting up Wi-Fi
Prerequisite
R The device to be connected supports one of
the three means of connection described
(→ page 253).
Multimedia system:
,
. ö
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi
# Switch
on O or off ª.
If
is deactivated ª, communication via
Wi-Fi to all devices is interrupted. This also
means that a connection to the HERMES
communication module cannot be estab‐

lished. Then functions such as dynamic route
guidance with Live Traffic Information are not
available.
Connecting the multimedia system with a
device via Wi-Fi
This function is available if a HERMES communi‐
cation module is not installed.
The type of connection established must be
selected on the multimedia system and on the
device to be connected.
% The connection procedure may differ
depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐
tions that are shown in the display. Further
information (see the manufacturer's operat‐
ing instructions).
# Select
.
# Select
.
Using a WPS PIN:
Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.
# Select ¥
.
The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN.
#

254 Multimedia system
#
#

Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
Confirm the entry.

Using a button:
Requirements
R This function is only available in a Wi-Fi fre‐
quency of 2.4 GHz.
#
#
#
#
#

Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.
Select ¥
.
Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options
on the device to be connected.
Press the WPS button on the device to be
connected.
Select
in the multimedia system.

Using a security key:
# Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.
# Select ¥
.
# Have the security key displayed on the device
to be connected (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).

Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐
tem.
# Confirm the entry with ¡.
% All devices support a security key as a
means of connection.
#

Device has already been connected:
To automatically connect: highlight a Wi-Fi
network in the list.
# Activate ¥
O.
# To connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the
list.
# Select ¥
.
The connection is established again. These
functions are possible when the device has
already been connected to the Wi-Fi network.
#

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Multimedia system:
,
. ö
Configuring the multimedia system as a WiFi hotspot
The type of connection established depends on
the device to be connected. The function must

be supported by the multimedia system and by
the device to be connected. The type of connec‐
tion established must be selected on the multi‐
media system and on the device to be connec‐
ted.
# Select
.
# Highlight
.
Generating a WPS PIN
Select ¥
.
# Enter the PIN shown in the multimedia sys‐
tem display on the device to be connected
and confirm.
#

Connecting using a WPS PIN
Select ¥
.
# Select
.
# Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device's display on the multimedia system.
# Select
.
#

Multimedia system 255
Connecting using a button
Requirements
R This function is only available in a Wi-Fi fre‐
quency of 2.4 GHz.
#
#
#

Select ¥
.
Press the WPS button on the device to be
connected or select
.
Select
in the multimedia system.

Connecting using a security key
Select
.
A security key is displayed.
# Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the
SSID
.
# Enter the security key which is shown in the
multimedia system display on the device to
be connected.
# Confirm the entry.
#

Connecting using NFC
Select

#
#
#

Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Bring the mobile device into the NFC area of
the vehicle (→ page 289).
Select
.
The mobile device is now connected to the
multimedia system hotspot via NFC.

To generate a new security key:
Select
.
# Select
.
A connection will be established with the
newly created security key.
# To save a security key: select
.
When a new security key is saved, all existing
Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If
the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐
lished, the new security key must be entered.
#

Managing COMAND Touch devices
Requirements
R The COMAND Touch app is installed on the
external device (e.g. tablet or smartphone).

Wi-Fi is activated (→ page 253) and the mul‐
timedia system is configured as a Wi-Fi hot‐
spot (→ page 254).

Multimedia system:
,

Connecting a new device
Select
.
# Select
.
#
the connection request from the new
device.
A security key is displayed.
# Enter the security key in the external device.
The device is authorized.
#

Selecting a connected device
Select
.
The devices already connected are displayed.
# Select
.
The
message
appears.
#

256 Multimedia system
#

Select
.
Follow the instructions to authorize the
selected device.

De-authorizing the device
Select a connected device from the list.
The
message
appears.
# Select
.
A prompt will appear asking whether you
would like to de-authorize the selected
device.
# Select
.
The device is de-authorized.
#

Activating/deactivating child safety lock
Multimedia system:
,

Locking an external device
Select an external device.

Select
.
The device connected via the COMAND
Touch App is locked O or unlocked ª.

System language
Notes on the system language
This function allows you to determine the lan‐
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
announcements. The selected language affects
the characters available for entry. The navigation
announcements are not available in all lan‐
guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐
tion announcements will be in English.
Setting the system language
Multimedia system:
,

Set the language.
% If you are using Arabic map data, the text
information can also be shown in Arabic on
the navigation map. To do so, select ‫ العربية‬as
the language from the language list. Naviga‐
tion announcements are then also made in
Arabic.

Setting the distance unit
Multimedia system:
,
. %
# Select
or .
# In the multifunction display of the Instrument
Display, switch the
display on O.
Data import and export
Data import/export function
The following functions are possible:
R transferring data from one system or vehicle
to another system or vehicle.
R creating a backup copy of your personal data
and loading it again.
R protecting your personal data against unwan‐
ted export with PIN protection.
% Please note that the NTFS file system is not
supported. The FAT32 file system is recom‐
mended.

Multimedia system 257
Importing/exporting data
* NOTE Data loss
#

Do not remove the data storage
medium when data is being exported.

Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
data.
Requirements
R The vehicle is stationary.
R The ignition is switched on or the vehicle has
been started.
R The SD card is inserted (→ page 312) or the
USB device is connected (→ page 314).

Select

Importing
Select a data storage medium.
A prompt appears asking whether you really
wish to overwrite the current data. If data

Exporting
If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques‐
ted.
# Enter the four-digit PIN.
# Select a data storage medium.
The data is exported. The data export may
take several minutes.

Activating/deactivating PIN protection

Multimedia system:
,

originates from another vehicle, this is recog‐
nized during data reading.
The multimedia system is restarted once the
data has been imported.
% Current vehicle settings can be edited after
the import.

Multimedia system:
,

Setting the PIN
# Select
.
# Enter a four-digit PIN.

Enter the four-digit PIN again.
If both PINs match, PIN protection is active.

Changing the PIN
Requirement
R A current PIN must be set.
#
#
#

Select
.
Enter the current PIN.
Select
.
Set a new PIN.

Activating PIN protection for data export
Select
.
Confirm with the PIN.
# Select
.
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
#

Activating PIN protection for offline mode
Select
.
Confirm with the PIN.
# Select
.
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
#

258 Multimedia system
Unblocking the PIN
Requirements
R There is an Internet connection.
R A Mercedes me account exists at http://
www.mercedes.me.
R The
service is active
(→ page 258).
If the PIN has been entered incorrectly three
times, the PIN will be blocked. You can have a
single-use password sent to you via the
Mercedes me connect online portal to reset the
PIN protection.
# Select
.
# Enter the single-use password.
PIN protection is reset, and you can set a
new PIN.
% Alternatively, you can have PIN protection
reset at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter.

User profile

Setting a user profile
Multimedia system:
,
. g

Displaying a user profile when starting
If this function is active, a prompt appears when
starting the system asking which user profile to
use.
# Select
.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

Creating a user profile
Multimedia system:
,
. g

Selecting a user profile
Select
or individual profile #.
% Some settings from the user profile are only
loaded when the vehicle is stationary or
when the ignition is switched on.

Automatic synchronization
Each time the ignition is switched off or on, the
individual user profiles are synchronized on the
multimedia system and on the server. This
ensures that the latest user profiles are always
available.

Select
.
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
% For more information about importing/
exporting user profiles (→ page 258).

Enter a name.
Select a.
Individual settings are saved in the user profile,
e.g.:
R System settings
R Settings in the TV tuner's channel list
R Navigation and traffic information
#
#

The settings differ depending on the vehicle
equipment.
Importing/exporting user profiles
Requirements:
R There is an Internet connection .

Multimedia system 259
R
R

A Mercedes me account exists at http://
www.mercedes.me.
The
service is active.

Multimedia system:
,
. g

Setting user profile options
Multimedia system:
,
. g
# Highlight a profile.
# Select ¥ options.
The following options are available:

This function is not available in all countries.
Only individual profiles can be imported or
exported.
The individual profiles are always collectively
imported or exported.
# Import: select
.
The

message appears.
Select
.
User profiles are imported.
# Export: select
.
User profiles are exported.
% Certain settings, such as address book
entries or previous destinations from the
navigation system, are not exported.

Information on software updates
The multimedia system provides a message
when an update is available.
Depending on the source, you can perform vari‐
ous updates:

R
R

% The guest profile cannot be deleted or
renamed.
Software update

Software update
Source of the
update

Update type

Internet

Navigation map, sys‐
tem updates, Digital
Operator's Manual

External storage
medium, e.g. USB
flash drive

Navigation maps

Software updates ensure your vehicle's technol‐
ogy is always up-to-date.
In order to constantly improve the quality of our
services you will receive future updates for your
multimedia system, the Mercedes-Benz mbrace®
services and your vehicle's communication mod‐
ule. These will conveniently be sent to you via
the mobile phone connection in your vehicle
and, in many cases, installed automatically. You
can monitor the status of your updates at any
time on the Mercedes me portal and find infor‐
mation about potential innovations.

260 Multimedia system
Your advantages at a glance:
R conveniently receive software updates via
the mobile phone network
R the long-term quality and availability of
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® is guaranteed
R keep your multimedia system and communi‐
cation module up-to-date
Further information about software updates can
be found at http://me.mercedes-benz.com
Performing a software update
Requirements
R An Internet connection is required for
updates which are obtained online .
Multimedia system:
,

Automatically
Requirements
R Your vehicle has a built-in communication
module.

Activate
O.
Updates are performed.
The current status of the updates is dis‐
played.

Manually
Deactivate
ª.
# Select an update from the list and start the
update.
#

Searching for new Updates
Requirements
R Your vehicle does not have a built-in commu‐
nication module.
R An Internet-enabled mobile phone is connec‐
ted to the multimedia system (→ page 288).
#
#

Select
.
The list of available updates is refreshed.
Select an update and start the update.
The selected update is downloaded via the
connected mobile phone.

Activating the software update
Restart the system.

Important system updates
Important system updates may be necessary for
the security of your multimedia system's data.
Please install these updates, or else the security
of your multimedia system cannot be ensured.
% If automatic software updates are activated,
the system updates will be downloaded auto‐
matically (→ page 260).
As soon as an update is available for download,
a corresponding message appears on the multi‐
media system display.
You have the following selection options:
R

The update will be downloaded in the back‐
ground.
R

Information about the pending system
update is displayed.
R

The update can be downloaded manually at a
later time (→ page 260).

Multimedia system 261
If the download is completed and the update is
ready for installation, you will be informed of this
after the next ignition cycle, for example.
Requirements for the installation:
R The ignition is switched off.
R Notes and warnings have been read and
accepted.
R The electric parking brake is applied.
If all requirements are met, the update will be
installed. The multimedia system cannot be
operated while the update is being installed and
vehicle functions are restricted.
If errors should occur during the installation, the
multimedia system automatically attempts to
restore the previous version. If restoration of the
previous version is not possible, a symbol
appears on the center console display. Please
consult a qualified specialist workshop to
resolve the problem.

Reset function
Multimedia system:
,

Personal data is deleted, for example:
R station presets
R connected mobile phones
#

Select

If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears
asking if you also wish to restore this to the fac‐
tory settings during a reset.
# Select
# Enter the current PIN.
The PIN is reset.
Or
# Select
.
The current PIN stays the same after reset‐
ting.
% If you have forgotten your PIN, an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate your
PIN protection for you.

A prompt appears again asking whether you
really wish to reset.
# Select
.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory
settings.

262 Multimedia system
Navigation
Switching navigation on

% If a climate control setting is changed, a cli‐
mate bar appears briefly.

Multimedia system:

Showing/hiding the navigation menu

Requirements
R The map shows the vehicle's current posi‐
tion.

To show: swipe left on the touchpad or the
Touch Control.

or
#

Alternatively: press the ß button.
The map appears and shows current vehicle
position 1.

#
#

Slide the controller to the left.
To hide: swipe right on the touchpad or the
Touch Control.

Multimedia system 263
Slide the controller to the right.
% To show or hide lower menu levels, swipe or
slide to the left or right as many times as
necessary.

There are two available methods of destina‐
tion entry:
R free search 2
R step-by-step search 3

Destination entry
Entering a POI or address
Multimedia system:
,

#
#

Show the navigation menu.
Select ª
.
The state or province in which the vehicle is
located is set 1.

Method 1: free search
Enter the POI or address in 2. The entries
can be made in any order.
During destination entry, suggestions are
made by the multimedia system. A selection
of destinations appears in a list.
Enter these address elements, for example:
R city, street, house number
R street, city
R ZIP code
R POI name
R POI category, e.g.
R city, POI name
# To switch to handwriting recognition:
select 5 v.
# Write the character on the touchpad.

To switch to character selection: press the
% button.

or
#
#

#
#

Press the touchpad.
To delete an entry: select 4 % (if avail‐
able).
R Press briefly: deletes the last character
entered or the last suggestion adopted.
R Press and hold: deletes the entire entry.
To set the language: select 8.
Select the language.

% This function is useful for countries in which
several character sets are supported. An
example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and
Latin characters.
# To call up the online search function:
select 6
.
Once an Internet connection is established, a
list appears. It shows online destinations
related to the previous entry.
Online destinations are provided by the Inter‐
net service provider.

264 Multimedia system
#

Select the online destination.

or
Enter an online destination in the input line.
% Online search is not available in all coun‐
tries.
% Requirement (USA): Mercedes-Benz
mbrace® is activated.
# To call up the list: press the % button.
or
# If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐
ted, navigate upwards.
# Select the destination in the list.
# To adopt a destination: select
7.
If there are several listings for a destination,
a list appears.
# Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.
#

Method 2: search step-by-step
# Press the % button.
or

If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐
ted, navigate upwards.
The character bar is hidden.
is
highlighted. Additional entry fields, e.g. for
, are available.
# Select
.
The character bar appears.
# Enter the city or the ZIP code.
During destination entry, suggestions are
made by the multimedia system. A selection
of destinations appears in a list.
The address entries can be made in any
order, for example:
R
,
,
Enter an intersecting street, if available.
R
,
R
, e.g.
,
% During destination entry, use the following
functions:
R switching to handwriting recognition
R switching to character selection
R deleting an entry
#

R
R

#
#
#
#
#
#
#

An entry, e.g.
, can be deleted with
£ in a step-by-step search. Navigate
to the left to do so.
call up online search function (if availa‐
ble)
calls up a list

The functions are described in the free
search.
To change the state/province: select the
state or the province.
Enter the state or the province. You only
need to enter the first character.
Select the state or the province in the list.
To change the country: select the country.
Enter the country. You only need to enter the
first character.
Select the country on the list.
To adopt a destination: select
.
If there are several listings for a destination,
a distance-orientated list appears.

Multimedia system 265
#

Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.

Selecting previous destinations
Multimedia system:
,

#
#

Select
.
Select the destination suggestion or the des‐
tination.
The destination address is shown.

% If
is switched on O, destina‐
tion suggestions are displayed (→ page 277).
# Alternatively: if a favorite has been saved
(→ page 276), select
.
# Select the favorite.
The destination address is shown.

Selecting a POI
Multimedia system:
,

.
.

Method 1
# Select the category.
If route guidance is not active: the search
begins in the vicinity of the current vehicle
position. The list is sorted by distance in
ascending order.
If route guidance is active: the search begins
after selecting a search position.
The POIs show the following information:
R name of POI
R linear distance to the POI
R the direction of the linear distance to the
POI (arrow) is displayed when searching
for the vehicle's current position
# Select the POI.
# Route guidance is active: select the search
position prior to choosing a POI.

If intermediate destinations are set, these
can also be selected as the search position
after selecting
.

Method 2
Select
.
# Select the category.
# Select the POI.
# Route guidance is active: select the search
position prior to choosing a POI.
# If intermediate destinations are set, these
can also be selected as the search position
after selecting
.
#

Alternatively filtering the display by POI
Enter a search term in the ª
line.
The results list shows relevant POIs.
# Select ¡.
The first POI in the list is highlighted.
# Select the POI.
#

266 Multimedia system
Example: setting the search position for the
parking category during active route guid‐
ance
# Select
,
or
.
The list shows the located POIs or opens an
overview of the route destination after
selecting
.
# Select the POI.
# Select
: select the inter‐
mediate destination or the destination.
Starting an automatic gas station search
Requirements:
The automatic gas station search is activated
O (→ page 271).

Driving situation
Route guidance is active. The fuel level in the
fuel tank reaches the fuel reserve.
The
message is
shown.

#
#

Select
.
The automatic gas station search begins. The
available gas stations along the route or in
the vicinity of the vehicle's current position
are displayed.
Select the gas station.
The address of the gas station is displayed.
If route guidance is not active, select
.
The selected gas station is set as the desti‐
nation. Route guidance begins.

or
#

If there are already four intermediate des‐
tinations: select
in the prompt.
The selected gas station is entered into posi‐
tion 1 of the intermediate destinations menu.
Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route
guidance begins.

Entering an intermediate destination
Requirements
A destination is entered.

Multimedia system:
,

If route guidance is active, select
or
.
: the selected gas
station is set as a new destination. The previ‐
ous destinations and intermediate destina‐
tions are deleted. Route guidance to the gas
station begins.
: the
selected gas station is set as the next inter‐
mediate destination. Route guidance begins.

#
#
#
#

Select
.
Enter the intermediate destination as a POI
or address (→ page 263).
Select the intermediate destination.
Select
.

Multimedia system 267
#

Select an intermediate destination using
ª
during route guid‐
ance.
Select
after entering the destination.

Editing intermediate destinations
Requirements:
A destination is entered.

Multimedia system:
,
#

#
#
#
#
#

To change the order of destinations: high‐
light the destination or the intermediate des‐
tination.
Select ¥
.
Move the intermediate destination to the
desired position.
Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
To call up the map: highlight the destination
or the intermediate destination.
Select ¥
.

#
#
#
#

Move the map (→ page 281).
Select destination on the map (→ page 268).
To delete a destination: highlight the desti‐
nation or the intermediate destination.
Select ¥
.

Calculating a route with intermediate desti‐
nations
Requirements
The destination and at least one intermediate
destination have been entered.

Multimedia system:
,

Select
.
The route is calculated with the set inter‐
mediate destinations.

Multimedia system:
,

#
#

Select the contact.
The contact details are displayed.
Select the address.

Alternatively filtering the display by contacts
Enter a name or telephone number, for exam‐
ple, into the search field.
# Select ¡.
The first contact in the list is highlighted.
# Select the contact.
# Select the address.
#

Entering geo-coordinates
Multimedia system:
,

.
.

Selecting a contact
Requirements
R a mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system (→ page 288).

.
.

Enter geo-coordinates as latitude and longi‐
tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and
seconds.
The map shows the position.

268 Multimedia system
#
#
#

Confirm the entry.
To calculate a route: select
.
If a route has already been created, select
or
.

Selecting from the map
Multimedia system:
,
. Z

.
#

#
#

Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the Touch Control, the
controller or the touchpad.
The map menu appears.
Select "move map" in map menu 2
(→ page 280).
Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
or touchpad.

or
#

Slide the controller in any direction.
The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
tion under the crosshair. The more you move

your finger away from the starting position
on the touchpad, the faster the map moves.
Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
If several destinations are located around the
crosshair, a list shows the available POIs and
roads.
If a destination is located exactly on the
crosshair, the destination address is dis‐
played.
Select the destination in the list.
The destination address is shown.

Setting the map orientation to 2D or 3D
Highlight
.
# Press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the
controller.
The map will be displayed in the selected
map orientation.
#

Showing traffic messages in the vicinity of
the map
# Select
.
The map appears.
# Swipe left or right on the touchpad.

or
#

Slide the controller to the left or right.
The previous or next traffic incident is high‐
lighted on the map. Information on the traffic
incident is displayed.

Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map
Select
.
# Swipe left or right on the touchpad.
or
# Slide the controller to the left or right.
The previous or next POI is highlighted on the
map. The name or the address is shown.
# Alternatively, to filter the display by POI
category: swipe down on the Touch Control
or the touchpad.
or
# Slide the controller down.
# Select the POI category.
%
allows personal POI symbols to
be selected (→ page 282).
#

Multimedia system 269
Route
Calculating a route
Requirements:
R The destination has been entered.
R The destination address is shown.
#

If route guidance is not active, select
.
The route to the destination is calculated.
The map shows the route. Route guidance
then begins.

or
#

If route guidance is active, select
or
.
: the selected des‐
tination address is set as a new destination.
The previous destinations and intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the new destination begins.
: the
selected destination address is set as the
next intermediate destination. Route guid‐
ance begins.

Taking alternative routes into consideration
# Select an alternative route (→ page 271).
Other menu functions
To save the destination: select ¥
.
# To display on the map: select ¥
.
# To call a telephone number: select ¥
.
# To call up an Internet address: select
¥
(if available).

An economical route is calculated. The
journey time may be somewhat longer
than for quicker routes.
The symbol for the current vehicle posi‐
tion is displayed in green.

Selecting a route type
Multimedia system:
,
. À
# Select
.
# Select the route type.
A route has already been created: the route
is calculated on the basis of the new route
type.
A route has not been created: the next route
is calculated on the basis of the new route
type.

A route with a quick journey time is cal‐
culated.
R

A route with a short driving distance is
calculated.
can be
switched on O or off ª for these route
types. If
is
switched on,
can be selected.
The route types
and
are not available in every country.
R

270 Multimedia system
The route is calculated with the currently
set route type.
Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information
are taken into account.
Live Traffic Information is not available in
all countries.
R

A prompt appears when a new route is
detected with a shorter journey time
based on traffic reports. You can con‐
tinue to use the current route or use the
dynamic route instead.
Selecting route options
Multimedia system:
,
. À

Avoiding areas
# Select
(→ page 283).
Avoiding motorways, ferries, motorail trains,
tunnels, unpaved roads
# Select O or deselect ª avoid option.

Using toll roads
# Select
.
# Select
or
or .
The route takes into account roads that
require the payment of a usage fee (toll).
If
is selected, toll roads are not taken into
account.

Selecting notifications
Multimedia system:
,

The function is not available in all coun‐
tries.

The selected route options cannot always be
implemented. Therefore, a route may include a
ferry, for instance, even though the avoid
option is enabled. A message appears and you
will hear a corresponding message.
Using carpool lanes
Select
.
# Select number.
When using carpool lanes, observe the appli‐
cable legal requirements as well as any con‐
ditions pertaining to when and where such
lanes may be used. Carpool lanes may only
be used if certain conditions are met.
#

These route options are not available in every
country.

.
Z
Switch announcements on O or off ª.
.

The multimedia system announces the
names of the roads that will follow the
upcoming change of direction.
This function is not available in all coun‐
tries and languages.
Displaying destination information
Requirements:
A destination is entered.

Multimedia system 271
Multimedia system:
,
#

Select
.
The following information is displayed:
R intermediate destinations and destination
The route can also include up to four
intermediate destinations.
R name, address
R remaining driving distance
R time of arrival

Selecting an alternative route
Multimedia system:
,
. À
# Select
.
The routes are displayed in accordance with
the setting made in the route settings.
The currently selected route is shown with a
dark blue line.
# Select the alternative route.

Switching the automatic gas station search
on/off
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
# Switch
on O or off ª.
Switched on O: when the fuel reserve level
is reached, a prompt appears asking whether
you want to start searching for gas stations.
Starting the automatic service station
search
Requirements:
ATTENTION ASSIST and the
function are activated (→ page 207).

Driving situation
The
message is shown.
# Select
.
The service station search starts. The availa‐
ble service stations along the route or in the
vicinity of the vehicle's current position are
displayed.
# Select the service station.
The service station address is displayed.

If route guidance is not active, select
.
The selected service station is set as a desti‐
nation. Route guidance begins.

or
#

If route guidance is active, select
or
.
: the selected
service station is set as a new destination.
The previous destination and all intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the service station begins.
: the
selected service station is set as the next
intermediate destination. Route guidance
begins.

272 Multimedia system
Route guidance
Notes on route guidance
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated.
The road and traffic rules and regulations always
have priority over multimedia system driving rec‐
ommendations.

Driving recommendations are:
R Navigation announcements
R Route guidance displays
R Lane recommendations

Changing direction overview

If you do not follow the navigation announce‐
ments or if you leave the calculated route, a new
route is calculated automatically.
Driving recommendations may differ from the
actual road and traffic conditions if:
R the route is diverted.
R the direction of a one-way street has been
changed.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey.
The route may differ from the ideal route due to
the following:
R roadworks
R incomplete digital map data

There are three phases when changing direction:
Preparation phase
If there is enough time between the changes
of direction, the multimedia system prepares
you for the upcoming change of direction. A
navigation announcement, e.g. "Prepare to
turn right", is issued.

Multimedia system 273

The map appears in full-screen mode.
Announcement phase
The multimedia system announces the
upcoming change of direction, e.g. by
announcing "Turn right in 300 feet (100 m)".
The display is split into two parts. The map is
displayed on the left; on the right, there is a
detailed image of the junction or a 3D image
of the upcoming change of direction.
Change-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the immi‐
nent change of direction, e.g. by announcing
"Now turn right".
The display is split into two parts.
The vehicle has successfully changed direc‐
tion when the light-colored bar on the right
drops down to 0 feet (0 meters) and the cur‐
rent vehicle position symbol has reached the
highlighted change-of-direction point.
When the change of direction is complete,
the map appears in full-screen mode.

% Changes of direction are also shown in the
Instrument Display.

Lane recommendations overview
This display appears for multi-lane roads.
If the digital map contains the relevant data, the
multimedia system can display lane recommen‐
dations for the next two changes of direction.

Recommended lane 1
In this lane, you will be able to complete both
the next change of direction and the one
after that.
Possible lane 2
In this lane, you will only be able to complete
the next change of direction.
Lane not recommended 3
In this lane, you will not be able to complete
the next change of direction without chang‐
ing lane.

During the change of direction, new lanes may
be added.
% Lane recommendations can also be dis‐
played in the Instrument Display and in the
Head-up Display.

1 Recommended lane
2 Possible lane
3 Lanes not recommended

Destination reached
Once the destination is reached, you will see the
checkered flag Í. Route guidance is finished.
When an intermediate destination has been
reached, you will see the intermediate destina‐
tion flag with the number of your intermediate

274 Multimedia system
destination Î. After this, route guidance is
continued.
Switching navigation announcements on/off
Requirements:
R a route has already been created.
R route guidance is active.
#

To switch off: press the 8 button on the
multifunction steering wheel during a naviga‐
tion announcement.

or
#

Press on the volume control to the right of
the controller during a navigation announce‐
ment (→ page 247).
The
message appears.

or
#
#
#

Show the navigation menu (→ page 262).
Select !
.
The symbol changes to #.
To activate: select #
.
The current navigation announcement is
played.

% In the following situations, navigation
announcements are switched on automati‐
cally:
R A new route guidance is started.
R The route is recalculated.
% You can access and add this function as a
favorite under
.
Switching navigation announcements on/off
during a phone call
# Select
.
# Select õ
.
# Select
.
# Switch
on O or
off ª.
Adjusting the volume of navigation
announcements
Requirements:
a route has already been created.
R route guidance is active.
R

On the multifunction steering wheel or on
the multimedia system
# Press the W or X button on the multi‐
function steering wheel during a navigation
announcement.
or
# Turn the volume control to the right of the
controller during a navigation announcement
(→ page 248).
% In the following situations, the volume is
raised to the minimum volume or lowered to
the maximum volume:
R A new route guidance is started.
R The route is recalculated.
% The minimum volume can be individually set
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Via system settings
# Select
.
# Select õ
.
# Select
.
# Select

Multimedia system 275
#

Set the volume.

Switching audio fadeout on/off during navi‐
gation announcements
# Select
.
# Select õ
.
# Select
.
# Switch
on O or off ª.
Repeating navigation announcements
Requirements:
R a route has already been created.
R route guidance is active.
Multimedia system:
,
#
#

Select !
.
Select #
.
The current navigation announcement is
repeated.

% You can access and add this function as a
favorite under
.
Canceling route guidance
Requirements:
R a route has already been created.
R route guidance is active.
Multimedia system:
,
#

Select

Continuing route guidance
Requirements:
a route has already been created.
R route guidance is interrupted.
R

% If the journey was interrupted for less than 2
hours, route guidance continues automati‐
cally.

Multimedia system:
,
#

Select
The route is recalculated.

Route guidance to an off-road destination
Off-road destination: the destination is within
the digital map. However, the map contains no
roads that lead to the destination.
You can enter off-road destinations on the map.
Route guidance guides you for as long as possi‐
ble with navigation announcements and displays
on roads that are known to the multimedia sys‐
tem.
Shortly before you reach the last known position
on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the
direction arrow" announcement. The display
shows a direction arrow and the linear distance
to the destination.
Route guidance from an off-road location to
a destination
Off-road position: the current vehicle position is
located within the digital map on roads that are
not available.

276 Multimedia system
The following displays appear when route guid‐
ance begins:
R the
message
R a direction arrow showing the linear direction
to the POI

When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.

Destination

When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.

Saving the current vehicle position
Multimedia system:

Notes on the off-road status during route
guidance
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif‐
ferences between the data on the digital map
and the actual course of the road. In such cases,
the multimedia system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle's current position on
the digital map. The vehicle is off-road.
The following displays appear when the vehicle
is off-road:
R the
message
R a direction arrow showing the linear direction
to the POI

If the map is displayed in full screen mode,
press the central control element.
The map menu appears.
Select 1 on the map menu (→ page 280).
The current vehicle position is saved to the
"Previous destinations" memory.

Editing the previous destinations
Multimedia system:
,
. ¬
.
#
#

Storing a map position
Multimedia system:
,

The map is in full-screen mode.
# Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
# Select "move map" in map menu 2
(→ page 280).

Select a position on the map.
If multiple entries are available for a map
position, a list appears.
Highlight an entry.
Select ¥
.
The map position is saved to the "Previous
destinations" memory.

Highlight one of the previous destinations.
To save as a favorite: select ¥
.
The favorites are displayed.
Move the favorite to the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
To save as "Home" address: select ¥
.

Multimedia system 277
#
#

#
#

To save as "Work" address: select ¥
.
To delete a single or all destinations:
select ¥
or
.
A prompt appears.
Select
.
To display destination information: select
¥
.

Using intelligent destination suggestions
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
.
The navigation system learns the user habits of
the driver. The most probable destinations are
suggested.
# Activate
O.
The vehicle can provide destination sugges‐
tions based on navigation destinations that
have been visited.
If the function has been activated, destina‐
tion suggestions are shown in previous desti‐

#
#

nations and can be selected for route guid‐
ance.
Select
or
.
allows data acquisition and changes
to the last display.
rejects data acquisition and deacti‐
vates the function.
To deactivate the function: deactivate
ª.
To delete destination suggestions: select
.

Using external destinations and routes
External destinations and routes can be received
from the following sources:
R Mercedes-Benz Apps
R Door-to-door navigation with Companion App
(USA)
R Via an MB Info call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center
A prompt appears on the media display.
Received destinations and routes are saved in
the previous destinations.

If a destination is received: select
continue with method 1 or 2.

and

or
#

If a destination was received with photo
information, select
.
Route guidance starts.
Method 1: if route guidance is not activated,
select
.
The route to the destination is calculated.
The map shows the route. Route guidance
then begins.
Method 2: if route guidance is active, select
or
.
: the received des‐
tination address is set as a new destination.
The previous destinations and intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the new destination begins.
: the
received destination address is set as the
next new intermediate destination. Route
guidance begins.

278 Multimedia system
#

A route has been received: select

Route guidance starts from the selected
position.

Route guidance with current traffic reports
Traffic information overview
Traffic reports are received using Live Traffic
Information and are used for route guidance.
This service is unavailable in some countries.
% There may be differences between the traffic
reports received and the actual road and
traffic conditions.
Important information on Live Traffic Informa‐
tion:
R Current traffic reports are received via the
Internet connection.
R The traffic situation is updated at short, regu‐
lar intervals.
R The status of the service subscription can be
displayed (→ page 278).

Information on the vehicle's position is regularly
sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren‐
dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded
to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf‐
fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are
sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor
for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the
quality of the traffic reports.
If you do not wish to transmit your vehicle posi‐
tion, you can have this service deactivated at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Displaying subscription information
Requirements:
The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic
Information.

Multimedia system:

Z
The subscription expiry date is automatically dis‐
played:
R one month before the expiry date
R one week before the expiry date
R on the expiry date
,

To display manually: select
.
Depending on the status, one of the following
messages appears:
R the period of validity for the subscription
is displayed.
R the subscription has expired.
% The subscription can be extended:
R at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R via an MB Info call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center
#

Displaying the traffic map
Requirements:
R For Live Traffic Information: the vehicle is
equipped with a communication module fea‐
turing an activated, integrated SIM card.
R When the vehicle is started, the communica‐
tion module automatically establishes an
Internet connection. Traffic information is
made available shortly afterwards.

Multimedia system 279
Multimedia system:
,

Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the Touch Control, the
controller or the touchpad.
The map menu appears.
# Activate º O.
The traffic map shows the following information,
for example:
R traffic incidents, for example:
roadworks
road blocks
warning messages
#

free-flowing traffic (green line)
display for traffic delays on the route lasting
at least one minute
warning message symbols:
symbol Ô
additional road safety notes when
approaching a traffic incident, e.g. the
end of a traffic jam
If the vehicle approaches a danger area
on the route, a warning message is dis‐
played on the map. A warning message
may also be issued (→ page 280).

The symbols for traffic incidents are dis‐
played in color (on the route) or gray (off the
route).
traffic flow information:
traffic jam (red line)
congested traffic conditions (orange line)
slow-moving traffic (yellow line)

R
R

Displaying traffic incidents
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
#

Activate O
.
Roadworks, road blocks, local area reports
(e.g. fog) and warning messages are dis‐
played.

Activating free flow and traffic display
# Activate O
and
.
% The traffic delay is displayed for the current
route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or
longer are taken into consideration.
Displaying details
Displaying the traffic map (→ page 278).
# Moving the map (→ page 281).
# When a traffic report symbol is under the
crosshair, press the Touch Control, the con‐
troller or the touchpad.
The traffic report details are displayed.
or
# Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
# Select
.
The map shows the traffic report symbols in
the vicinity.
Traffic report information is displayed in the
status line:
R traffic report symbol
#

280 Multimedia system
reason for the traffic report, e.g. traffic
jam
R warning message (highlighted in red)
To select a traffic report symbol: select
or
.
Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
The traffic report details are displayed.
R

#
#

Map and compass
Map and compass overview

Issuing hazard alerts
Multimedia system:
,
.
Z
Activate O
.
Warning messages are issued and tailbacks
which pose a risk are announced.
.

1
2
3
4

Saves the current vehicle position
Moves the map
Selects the map orientation and map view
Selects the function depending on the equip‐
ment:
• To transmit a hazard alert (Car-to-X)

• To filter the display of POIs in the vicinity
according to POI category
5 Switches the display of personal POI sym‐
bols on the map on or off
6 Switches one of the following displays on or
off depending on the equipment:
• Weather information
• Satellite map
• Traffic incidents
7 Switches the traffic map display on or off
The map and satellite images are shown in globe
projection. This allows for a realistic map display
in all map scales. The map uses elevation model‐
ing.
Depending on the map data, important buildings
in many cities are depicted realistically on the
map in small map scales (1/32 mi (20 m),
1/16 mi (50 m)). Other buildings are shown as
models.
% You can set the unit of measurement of the
map scale (→ page 256).

Multimedia system 281
If online information is available, fuel prices and
the availability of parking spaces in parking
garages are displayed, for example.
% Online information is not available in all
countries.
% Requirement (USA): Mercedes-Benz
mbrace® is activated.
If
is activated in Traffic Sign
Assist (→ page 209), speed limits and overtak‐
ing restrictions are displayed on the map.
% Company logos displayed on the map are
trademarks of the respective companies and
used solely for the purpose of indicating the
locations of these companies. The use of
such logos on the map does not indicate
approval of, support of or advertising by
these companies for the navigation system
itself.
Setting the map scale
Requirements:
R The map is shown.

Multimedia system:
,
#

To zoom in: swipe down on the Touch Con‐
trol.

or
#

Moving the map
Multimedia system:
,

Turn the controller anti-clockwise.

or
#
#

Move two fingers apart on the touchpad.
To zoom out: swipe up on the Touch Control.

or
#

Turn the controller clockwise.

or
Move two fingers together on the touchpad.
% You can set the unit of measurement of the
map scale (→ page 256).

or
#

Slide the controller in any direction.
The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
tion under the crosshair. The further you
move your finger away from the starting posi‐
tion on the touchpad, the faster the map
moves.

282 Multimedia system
Selecting the map orientation
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
#

#
.

Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the Touch Control or the
touchpad.
The map menu appears.
In map menu 3 , select ,
or
(→ page 280).
R : the 2D map view is displayed so that
north is always at the top.
R
: the 2D map view is aligned to the
direction of travel.
R
: the 3D map view is aligned to the
direction of travel.

Selecting POI symbols
Multimedia system:
,
. Z

#
#

Selecting text information
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
#

POIs include filling stations and hotels which can
be displayed as symbols on the map, for exam‐
ple. Not all POIs are available everywhere.

Select
.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
displays symbols of predefined cat‐
egories on the map.
allows you to personally select
the symbols for the available categories.
switches the display off.
Select a setting.
: select categories.
The POI symbols of the selected categories
are displayed O or not displayed ª.

Select text information.
shows the street you are cur‐
rently driving on at the bottom of the display.
When the map is moved, the following infor‐
mation appears under the crosshair:
R street name
R POI name

area name

displays the following infor‐
mation:
R longitude and latitude
R elevation
The elevation shown may deviate from
the actual elevation.
R number of satellites from which a signal
can be received
When the map is moved, this information
does not appear.
displays the current climate
control settings.
switches the display off.
Switching highway information on/off
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
# Switch
on O or off ª.
The function is switched on O: during a
journey, additional information on upcoming
facilities appears on the right side of the

Multimedia system 283
screen. These include parking lots, service
stations and highway exits, for example.
Displaying the next intersecting street
Requirements:
R Route guidance is not active.
Multimedia system:
,
#

Activate O
.
The name of the next intersecting street will
be displayed at the upper edge of the display.

Displaying the map version
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
# Select
.
# Select
.
% Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Avoiding an area
You can define areas along a route that you
would like to avoid.

Avoiding a new area
Multimedia system:
,
. À
.
#
#
#

Select
.
To search for an area via the map: select
.
Move the map

or
#
#
#
#

To search for an area using an address:
select
.
Enter the address.
Select
.
The map appears.
To display an area: press the Touch Control,
the touchpad or the controller.
A red rectangle appears. This designates the
area that should be avoided.
To change the size of the area: swipe up or
down on the Touch Control or the touchpad.

Slide the controller up or down.
The map scale is enlarged or reduced and
changes the size of the area.
To set the area: press the Touch Control,
the touchpad or the controller.
The area is entered into the list.

Changing an area
Multimedia system:
,
.
#
#

À
.

Highlight an area in the list.
Select ¥
.

Moving the area on the map
# Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
or touchpad.
or
# Slide the controller in any direction.
Changing the size of the area
To start: press the Touch Control, the touch‐
pad or the controller.

284 Multimedia system
#

To change: swipe up or down on the Touch
Control or the touchpad.

or
#
#

Slide the controller up or down.
To stop: press the Touch Control, the touch‐
pad or the controller.

Taking the area for the route into account
# Avoid O an area in the list.
If route guidance is active, a new route is cal‐
culated.
If there is no route yet, the setting is carried
over to the next route guidance.
The route can include an area that is to be
avoided in the following cases:
R the destination is located in an area that
is to be avoided
R there is no sensible alternative route

Deleting one or all areas
Multimedia system:
,
. À
.
#
#
#

Highlight an area in the list.
Select ¥
or ¥
Confirm the prompt with
.
One or all areas are deleted.

Map data update overview
Updating at the authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
The digital maps generated by the map software
become outdated in the same way as conven‐
tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can
only be provided by the navigation system in
conjunction with the most up-to-date map data.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You can receive updates to the digital map there.

Information on map data
Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac‐
tory. Depending on the country, map data for
your region is either pre-installed or the map
data is supplied on a data storage medium. You
do not require an activation code for the map
data which is provided with your vehicle.
If the map data on your vehicle has been instal‐
led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you
do not need to enter the activation code.
An activation code is required for purchased
map data.
Observe the following notes:
R The activation code can be used for one vehi‐
cle
R The activation code is not transferable
R The activation code has six digits
In the event of the following problems, please
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R The multimedia system does not accept the
activation code
R You have lost the activation code

Multimedia system 285
Displaying the compass
Multimedia system:
,
. À
# Select
.
The compass display shows the following
information:
R the current direction of travel with bear‐
ing (360 degree format) and compass
direction
R longitude and latitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes and seconds
R height (rounded)
R number of GPS satellites from which a
signal can be received
Setting the map scale automatically
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
The map scale is set automatically depending on
your driving speed.
For journeys in cities with detailed city models, a
map view from the driver's perspective is used.
# Switch
on O or off ª.

% The automatically selected map scale can be
changed manually for a short time. The set‐
ting is reset automatically after a few sec‐
onds.
Displaying the satellite map
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
#

Switch

#
.

on O or off ª.

or
If satellite map display 6 is available in the
map menu, switch it on O or off ª
(→ page 280).
Switched on O: satellite maps are displayed
in map scales of 2 mi (2 km).
Switched off ª: satellite maps are not dis‐
played in map scales from 2 mi (2 km) to
10 mi (10 km).
% Satellite maps for these map scales are not
available in all countries.

Displaying weather information
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
Activate O

or
If weather information display 6 is available
in the map menu, activate O(→ page 280)
it.
Current weather information is displayed on
the navigation map, e.g. temperature or
cloud cover.
% Requirement (USA): Mercedes-Benz
mbrace® is activated.
% Weather information is not available in all
countries.
#

286 Multimedia system
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual
(navigation)
Calling up information on navigation
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
.
#

Telephone
Telephony
Telephone menu overview

Select the topic.

3 Battery status of the connected mobile

phone

4 ¢ (telephone ready) or w (call active)
5
(→ page 291)
6
(→ page 294)
7
(→ page 288)
8
9 Active call
A

Symbols 1 to 4 are not shown until after a
mobile phone has been connected to the multi‐
media system. The symbols depend on your
mobile phone and your mobile phone network
provider.

1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently

connected mobile phone

2 Signal strength of the mobile phone network

Multimedia system 287
Bluetooth® profile overview
Bluetooth®

profile
of the mobile phone

Function

PBAP (Phone Book
Access Profile)

Contacts are auto‐
matically displayed in
the multimedia sys‐
tem

MAP (Message
Access Profile)

Message functions
can be used

Telephony operating modes overview
Depending on your equipment, the following tel‐
ephony operating modes are available:
R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 288).

Notes on telephony
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating mobile communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.

This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
Only operate this equipment when the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communication equipment in
the vehicle.
Further information can be obtained from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Information on telephony
The following situations can lead to the call
being disconnected while the vehicle is in
motion:
R there is insufficient network coverage in the
area
R you move from one GSM or MUST transmit‐
ter/receiver area (cell) into another and no
communication channels are free
R the SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available

288 Multimedia system
R

a mobile phone with "Twin card" is logged
into the network with the second SIM card at
the same time

HD Voice®
R To improve voice quality, the multimedia sys‐
tem supports telephone calls in HD Voice®.
R In order to use this function, the mobile
phones and the mobile phone network pro‐
vider of the person you are calling must sup‐
port HD Voice®.
Depending on the quality of the connection, the
voice quality may fluctuate.
Connecting a mobile phone (Bluetooth® tel‐
ephony)
Requirements:
Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐
tions).
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia
system (→ page 252).
R

Multimedia system:
,
. á
Searching for a mobile phone
# Select
.
# Select
.
The available mobile phones are displayed. If
a new mobile phone is found, it is indicated
by the á symbol.
Connecting a mobile phone (authorization
using Secure Simple Pairing)
# Select the mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
# If the codes match: confirm the code on
the mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone (authorization by
entering a passkey)
# Select the mobile phone.
# Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi‐
nation as a passkey.

On the multimedia system: enter the pass‐
key and select a.
# On the mobile phone: enter the passkey
again and confirm.
% Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorized
on the multimedia system.
Authorized mobile phones are reconnected
automatically.
#

Switching mobile phones
Requirements:
The mobile phones are authorized
(→ page 288).

Multimedia system:
,
. á
# In the device list, select a mobile phone
which has already been authorized.
% Only one mobile phone can be connected at
any one time. The connected mobile phone
is displayed at the top of the list.

Multimedia system 289
Disconnecting a mobile phone (de-authoriz‐
ing)
Multimedia system:
,
. á
# Select the mobile phone from the device list.
# Select ¥.
# Select
.
# Select
.
Information on Near Field Communication
(NFC)
NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer
or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the
multimedia system.
The following functions are available without
having authorized a mobile phone:
R Transferring a URL to be viewed in the multi‐
media system (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions).
R Setting up the vehicle's Wi-Fi access data via
the system settings (→ page 254).
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com‐
munication (NFC)

Requirements:
NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions)
R The mobile phone's screen is switched on
and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions)

To connect a mobile phone: open stowage
compartment cover 1.
Place the NFC area of the mobile phone (see
manufacturer's operating instructions) on
NFC logo 2 on the inside of the cover.
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system.
To change mobile phones: place the NFC
area of the mobile phone (see manufactur‐
er's operating instructions) on NFC logo 2.
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ized on the multimedia system, it is now con‐
nected.
If the mobile phone is authorized on the mul‐
timedia system for the first time, it is connec‐
ted after confirming the mobile phone
instructions (see the manufacturer's operat‐
ing instructions).
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

290 Multimedia system
Setting the reception and transmission vol‐
ume

Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog‐
nition

Requirements:
R A mobile phone is authorized (→ page 288).

Requirements
R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system (→ page 288).

Multimedia system:
,
. á
This function ensures optimal language quality.
# Highlight the mobile phone in the device list.
# Select ¥.
# Select
or
.
# Set the volume.
Further information on the recommended recep‐
tion and transmission volume: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Adjusting the call and ring tone volume
Multimedia system:
,
. õ
.
# Select
or
.
# Set the volume.

Starting mobile phone voice recognition
# Press and hold the ó button on the multi‐
function steering wheel for more than one
second.
You can use mobile phone voice recognition.
Stopping mobile phone voice recognition
Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi‐
function steering wheel.

#
#

Accepting a call
Select
.

Rejecting a call
Select
.

Ending a call
Select =.

Activating functions during a call
To show all functions, navigate down.
The following functions are available during a
call:

Calls

Using the telephone
Multimedia system:
,
. ª
Making a call
Select

Enter the number.
Select w.
The call is made.

R
R
R
R

(show to send DTMF tones)
on O or off ª.
(an active call in hands-free
mode is transferred over to the telephone)
Switch

Multimedia system 291
Conducting calls with several participants

Accepting/rejecting a waiting call

Requirements:
R There is an active call (→ page 290).
R Another call is being made.

Requirements:
There is an active call (→ page 290).

Switching between calls
# Select call #.
The selected call is active. The other call is
on hold.
Activating or ending a call on hold
Select
or
.

Conducting a conference call
Select
in the tele‐
phone menu.
The new participant is included in the confer‐
ence call.

Ending an active call
# Select =.
% On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.

If you receive a call while already in a call, a
message is displayed. An acoustic signal also
sounds.
# Select
.
The incoming call is active. The previous call
is on hold.
# Select
.
% This function and behavior depends on your
mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions).
Contacts
Information about the contacts menu
The contacts menu contains all contacts from
existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or
memory card.
It is possible to store up to 6,000 contacts:

3,000 entries are for permanently saved con‐
tacts.
3,000 for contacts loaded from the mobile
phone.

From the contacts menu, you can perform the
following actions:
R Using the telephone:
Calling a contact (→ page 293)
Calling a new number (→ page 290)
R Navigation (→ page 267)
R Compose messages (→ page 295)
If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system (→ page 288) and automatic calling up
(→ page 291) is activated, the mobile phone's
contacts are displayed in the address book.
Downloading mobile phone contacts
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
Automatically
# Activate O
.

292 Multimedia system
Manually
# Deactivate ª
.
# Select

R
R

Calling up contacts
Multimedia system:
,
. ª
Depending on the character set, the following
options can be used to search for contacts:
R searching by initials
R searching by name
R searching by phone number
Enter characters into the search field.
A selection of possible contacts appears.
Entering more characters into the search
field narrows down the number of possible
selections.
# Select the contact.
A contact can contain the following details:
R phone numbers
R navigation addresses
#

geo-coordinates
Internet address

Editing the format of a contact's name
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
.
The following options are available:
R
R
R
#

Select an option.

Overview of importing contacts
Importing contacts as electronic business
cards
Source

Requirements

ò Memory card

The SD memory card
is inserted.

ò USB device

The USB device is
inserted in the USB
port.

Multimedia system 293
Source

Requirements

ñ Bluetooth® con‐
nection

If the sending of
vCards via Bluetooth®
is supported, vCards
can be received on
mobile phones or net‐
books, for example.
Bluetooth® is activa‐
ted in the multimedia
system and on the
respective device
(see the manufactur‐
er's operating instruc‐
tions).

ó Mobile phone

The mobile phone is
connected to the mul‐
timedia system.

Importing contacts into the contacts menu
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
# Select
.
# Select an option.

Saving a mobile phone contact
Multimedia system:
,
. ª
# Select the ó mobile phone contact.
# Select ¥.
# Select
.
The contact saved in the multimedia system
is identified by the f symbol.

Depending on the stored data, the following
options are available:

Calling a contact
Multimedia system:
,
. ª
# Enter characters into the search field.
# Select the contact.
# Select the telephone number.
The number is dialed.

Selecting further options in the contacts
menu
Multimedia system:
,
. ª
# Select a contact.
# Select ¥.

R
R
R

stored)

(if a web address has been
(if an address has been stored)

R
R

tones)

(for a number with DTMF

Select an option.

Deleting a contact
Multimedia system:
,
. ª
You can delete contacts stored in the vehicle.
# Search for the contact.
# Select the contact.
# Select ¥.
# Select
.
# Select
.

294 Multimedia system
Call list
Call list overview
If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue‐
tooth® profile:
R The call lists from the mobile phone are dis‐
played in the multimedia system.
R When connecting the mobile phone, you may
have to confirm the connection for the PBAP
Bluetooth® profile.
If your mobile phone does not support the PBAP
Bluetooth® profile:
R The multimedia system generates its own call
lists.
R The call list is not synchronized with the call
lists in the mobile phone.
Making a call from the call list
Multimedia system:
,
. ø
#

Select an entry.
The call is made.

Options in the call list
Multimedia system:
,
. ø
#
#

Highlight an entry.
Select ¥.
The following options are available:
R
R

Select an option.

Some mobile phones require further settings
after being connected to the multimedia system
(see manufacturer's operating instructions).
New messages are identified by the 1 symbol
in the multimedia system's display and an audi‐
ble signal.
Depending on the mobile phone, the multimedia
system only displays new incoming text mes‐
sages or the 100 newest text messages.
Configuring the displayed text messages
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
.

Text messages
Overview of text message functions
If the connected mobile phone supports the
MAP Bluetooth® profile, the text message func‐
tions can be used on the multimedia system.
You can obtain further information about set‐
tings and supported functions of Bluetooth®capable mobile phones from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

Select ¥.
A menu with the following options is shown:
R
R
R

(The text messages are not displayed
automatically.)
Select an option.

R
#

Multimedia system 295
Reading text messages
Multimedia system:
,
. i
Reading a text message
# Select a text message.
The message text is displayed.
Using the read-aloud function
Select a text message.
# Select
.
The text message is read aloud.
#

Composing and sending a text message
Multimedia system:
,
. i
# Navigate to the left twice.
# Select
.
Adding a recipient
Select
# Select the contact.
#

Dictating text
# Select
.
The app for the dictation function is loaded.
If there was no prior Internet connection, a
connection is now established.
# To start the dictation function: press the
controller or touchpad.
# Say the message.
The dictation ends automatically after you
have finished speaking.
After the voice message has been processed,
it is shown as text.
Editing text
# Select the word.
# To call up the correction menu: press the
controller or touchpad.
The following options are available:
R adjusting the capitalization of words (if
supported by the character set)
R expanding the choice of words
R deleting the selection

recording a new dictation
To leave the menu: select
R

Sending text messages
Select

Replying to a text message
Multimedia system:
,
. i
# Select the text message.
# Select ¥.
# Select
.
Calling a text message sender
Multimedia system:
,
. i
# Select the text message.
# Select ¥.
# Select
.

296 Multimedia system
Deleting text messages
Multimedia system:
,
. i
# Select ¥.
# To delete a text message: select
# To change folders: select

R
R

.
.

or
#

Select

In Car Office
"In Car Office" functions
Using "In Car Office", you can connect your
online services with the multimedia system.
The following functions are available:
R Display of upcoming meetings in the calen‐
dar
R Selection of a meeting as a destination in the
navigation
R Display of upcoming telephone conferences

Selection of telephone conferences for auto‐
matic dialing
Display of participants in a telephone confer‐
ence
Display and selection of calls to be made

Switching automatic start of "In Car Office"
on/off
Multimedia system:
,
#

% Please note that certain functions are only
available when the vehicle is stationary.
Calling up "In Car Office"
Requirements:
R a mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system.
R the mobile phone is enabled for Internet
access.
R you have a user account on the Mercedes me
portal (https://me.Mercedes-benz-com).
R the "In Car Office" service is activated in the
Mercedes me portal.
R you have an account with an online service,
for example Office 365.
#

Select

Switch
on
O or off ª.
If the automatic start of "In Car Office" is
switched on, displays with options regarding
upcoming appointments automatically
appear in the display of the multimedia sys‐
tem.
If the automatic start of "In Car Office“ is
switched off, you can call up the application
via the main menu.

Selecting "In Car Office" functions
Multimedia system
,
#

Select an appointment.
Depending on the appointment and the
stored information, the following functions
are available:
R
/

Multimedia system 297
R

/
Select a function.
R

Marking an entry in the to-do list as comple‐
ted
Multimedia system
,
#

Select an entry in the to-do list O.

Accepting/rejecting an incoming call for a
telephone conference
# To accept: select
.
# To reject: select
.
Apple CarPlay™
Overview of Apple CarPlay™
iPhone® functions can be used via the multime‐
dia system using Apple CarPlay™. They are oper‐
ated using the controller or the Siri® voice-oper‐
ated control system. You can activate the voiceoperated control system by pressing and holding
the ó button on the multifunction steering
wheel.

When using Apple CarPlay™ via the voice-oper‐
ated control system, the multimedia system can
still be operated via the Voice Control System
(→ page 229).
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Apple CarPlay™ to the multimedia sys‐
tem.
The availability of Apple CarPlay™ may vary
according to the country.
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐
cation and the services and content connected
to it.
Information on Apple CarPlay™
While using Apple CarPlay™ various functions of
the multimedia system, e.g. telephony or the
media sources Bluetooth® audio and iPod®, are
unavailable.
Only one route guidance can be active at a time.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.

Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay™
Requirements:
R Apple® operating system version iOS 8.3 or
above is installed on the iPhone®.
R There is an Internet connection for the full
range of functions for Apple CarPlay™.
R The iPhone® is connected to the multimedia
system via the USB port ç using a suita‐
ble cable (→ page 314).
Multimedia system:
,

Setting automatic or manual start
A message appears when connected for the first
time.
# Automatic start: select
.
is activated O.
Apple CarPlay™ will now start immediately
after the iPhone® is connected to the multi‐
media system using a USB cable.
# Manual start: select
.
#

Select the iPhone® in the device list.

298 Multimedia system
Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
A message with the data protection regulations
appears.
# Select
.
or
# Select
.
If you selected automatic start, you will have
to start Apple CarPlay™ manually the next
time you want to use it.
Exiting Apple CarPlay™
Press the ò button on the multifunction
steering wheel, for example.
% If Apple CarPlay™ was not displayed in the
foreground before disconnecting, the appli‐
cation starts in the background when recon‐
nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay™ in
the main menu.

Calling up Apple CarPlay™ sound settings
Multimedia system:
,
#

Select the tone menu (→ page 330).

Ending Apple CarPlay™
Multimedia system:
,
#

Select
.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.

or
#

Disconnect the connecting cable between
the mobile phone and multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle is
stationary.

Android Auto
Android Auto overview
Mobile phone functions can be used with
Android Auto using the Android operating sys‐
tem on the multimedia system. It is operated
using the controller or the voice-operated con‐
trol system. You can activate the voice-operated
control system by pressing and holding the ó
button on the multifunction steering wheel.

When using Android Auto via the voice-operated
control system, the multimedia system can still
be operated via the Voice Control System
(→ page 229).
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Android Auto to the multimedia system.
The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto
Apps may vary according to the country.
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐
cation and the services and content connected
to it.
Information on Android Auto
While using Android Auto, various functions of
the multimedia system, for example the media
source Bluetooth® audio, are not available.
Only one route guidance can be active at a time.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.

Multimedia system 299
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto
Requirements:
R The first activation of Android Auto on the
multimedia system must be carried out when
the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons.
R The mobile phone supports Android Auto
from Android 5.0.
R The Android Auto app is installed on the
mobile phone.
R In order to use the telephone functions, the
mobile phone must be connected to the mul‐
timedia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 288).
If there was no prior Internet connection, this
is established with the use of the mobile
phone with Android Auto.
R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system via the USB port ç using a
suitable cable (→ page 314).
R There is an Internet connection for the full
range of functions for Android Auto.

Multimedia system:
,
#

You can call up Android Auto in the main
menu.

Select the mobile phone from the device list.

Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
A message with the data protection regulations
appears.
# Select
.
or
# Select
.

Calling up the Android Auto sound settings
Multimedia system:
,
#

Exiting Android Auto
# Press the ò button on the multifunction
steering wheel, for example.
% If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore‐
ground before disconnecting, the application
starts in the background when reconnected.

Selecting the tone menu (→ page 330).

,
#

Activating automatic start
Select
O.
Starting manually
Select the mobile phone from the device list.

Ending Android Auto
Multimedia system:

Select
.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.

or
#

Disconnect the connecting cable between
the mobile phone and multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle is
stationary.

300 Multimedia system
Transferred vehicle data when using Apple
CarPlay™ and Android Auto

Information on transferred vehicle data
When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay™,
certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile
phone. This enables you to get the best out of
selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is
not directly accessible.
System information:
R Software release of the multimedia system
R System ID (anonymized)

The transfer of this data is used to optimize com‐
munication between the vehicle and the mobile
phone.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the
mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly
generated.
This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐
tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐
media system is reset (→ page 261).
Driving status data:
R Transmission position engaged

Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
and driving
Day/night mode of the instrument cluster

The transfer of this data is used to alter how
content is displayed to correspond to the driving
situation.
Position data:
R Coordinates
R Speed
R Compass direction
R Acceleration direction
This data is only transferred while the navigation
system is active in order to improve it (e.g. so it
can continue functioning when in a tunnel).
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA)
Making a call via the overhead control panel
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® is available in the USA.

1
2
3
4

Roadside Assistance call
SOS button cover
MB Info call
SOS button

To make a Roadside Assistance call: press
button 1.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.

Multimedia system 301
#
#

To make an emergency call: press SOS
button cover 2 briefly to open.
Press and hold SOS button 4 for at least
one second.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
To make an MB Info call: press button 3.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.

An emergency call can be initiated even if a
Roadside Assistance or MB Info call is active.
This has priority over all other active calls.
Calls via the overhead control panel are only
possible with an available mobile phone net‐
work.
Further information on Mercedes-Benz mbrace®
and other services can be found at: http://
www.mbusa.com

Information on the emergency call system
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
despite pressing the SOS button
Even if you press the SOS button in an emer‐
gency, remaining in the vehicle may be dan‐
gerous for the following reasons:
R you see smoke inside or outside of the
vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an acci‐
dent
R the vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
R the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily
be seen by other road users, particularly
when dark or in poor visibility conditions
#

#
#

Leave the vehicle immediately in this or
similar situations as soon as it is safe to
do so.
Move to a safe location along with other
vehicle occupants.
In such situations, secure the vehicle in
accordance with national regulations,
e.g. with a warning triangle.

Automatic emergency call
The emergency call is initiated in the following
situations:
R the air bag is deployed.
R the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐
gered.
You can end an automatically initiated emer‐
gency call yourself after 60 seconds.
Manual emergency call
An emergency call can be initiated manually via
the SOS button in the overhead control panel
(→ page 300).
If you leave the vehicle immediately after press‐
ing the SOS button, you do not know if
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® has successfully made
the emergency call.
Initiated emergency call
When a voice connection is established between
the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle
occupants, the following options apply:
R If the vehicle occupants are responsive: the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

302 Multimedia system

asks for more detailed information on the
emergency.
If the vehicle occupants are not responsive:
an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immedi‐
ately.

Transferred data
During the voice connection to the Customer
Assistance Center, the following data is transfer‐
red:
R Current vehicle location
R Vehicle identification number
Emergency call not possible
R If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® is not able to make
an emergency call.
A corresponding message appears in the
multimedia system display.
The indicator lamp flashes continuously.
In this case, seek assistance by other means.

Information on the MB Info call
An Info call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center has been initiated via the
overhead control panel (→ page 300).
You can find information on the following topics:
R Mercedes-Benz mbrace® activation
R operating the vehicle
R nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R other products and services from MercedesBenz

Data is transmitted during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(→ page 302).

In certain countries you must confirm the data
transfer.
If you make service calls using Mercedes-Benz
brace® (USA), transferred data includes the fol‐
lowing:

Information on the Roadside Assistance call
A Roadside Assistance call to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center has been initi‐
ated via the overhead control panel:
R the problem with the vehicle is analyzed
using remote diagnosis.
Further information about this can be
obtained at: http://www.mbusa.com

a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician carries
out repairs on site and/or the vehicle will be
towed to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You may be charged for these services.

Data is transmitted during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(→ page 302).
Transferred data during a service call

Multimedia system 303
Overview of transferred data
Service call

Transferred data

MB Info call
Roadside Assistance
call

R
R
R
R

Current vehicle
location
Vehicle identifica‐
tion number
Service code
Selected data
about the status
of the vehicle

Online and Internet functions
Internet connection
Information on connecting to the Internet
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the

traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
USA: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and access
the Internet, Mercedes-Benz mbrace® must be
activated and operational. Furthermore,
mbrace® must be activated for Mercedes-Benz
Apps and Internet access.
Canada: the multimedia system must be con‐
nected to a mobile phone via Bluetooth® or to an
external device acting as a Wi-Fi hotspot. Fur‐
thermore, you need a valid mobile service con‐
tract with a data option, which is used to calcu‐
late the associated connection costs.

The Internet functions can only be used to a limi‐
ted degree whilst driving.
Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi
Requirements
R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the multi‐
media system (→ page 253).
R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the external
device (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
R Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Internet connection via Wi-Fi is restricted or
does not function if:
R the mobile phone is switched off
R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile
phone
R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi‐
media system
R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the exter‐
nal device
R Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on
the external device

304 Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
,
. ö

R
.

.
#
#

Select the network.
Logging in to the Wi-Fi network
(→ page 253).

R
R

Setting up an Internet connection via Blue‐
tooth®

Requirements:
R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 288).

To connect via Bluetooth®, the mobile phone
supports one of the following Bluetooth® pro‐
files:
R DUN (Dial-Up Networking)
R PAN (Personal Area Network)
The Internet connection via Bluetooth® is restric‐
ted or does not function if:
R the mobile phone is switched off

the mobile phone network coverage is insuf‐
ficient
mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile
phone
the Bluetooth® function on the multimedia
system is switched off and the mobile phone
is to be connected via Bluetooth®
the Bluetooth® function is switched off on
the mobile phone and the mobile phone is to
be connected via Bluetooth®
neither the mobile phone network nor the
mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a
telephone and an Internet connection
the mobile phone has not been enabled for
Internet access via Bluetooth®

If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system for the first time via Bluetooth®, you will
be assisted through the process of setting up an
Internet connection.
The Internet connection can also be configured
manually.

Further information can be obtained at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system:
,
. ö
.
Bluetooth® connection via PAN
# Select the mobile phone.
The Internet connection is established.
Bluetooth® connection via DUN
Select the mobile phone.
# To select the predefined access data of
the mobile phone network provider: select
.
A list of countries appears.
# Select the country of your mobile phone net‐
work provider.
The list of available providers appears.
# Select your mobile phone network provider.
When an overview of the provider settings
appears, make the necessary settings.
#

Multimedia system 305
#

Select
.
To manually set the access data of the
mobile phone network provider: select
.
An overview of the provider settings appears.
# Set the access data.
# Select
.
% Set the access data in accordance with your
data package. Otherwise, additional costs
may be incurred. You can contact your
mobile phone network provider to obtain the
precise access data.

Switching the Bluetooth® profile

Requirements
R The mobile phone supports the DUN and
PAN Bluetooth® profiles.
Multimedia system:
,
. ö
#

#
#
#
#
#

Editing access data
Requirements
The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth®
DUN profile.

R
.

To switch from DUN to PAN: select the
mobile phone.

Select ¥.
Select
.
Activate O
.
The Internet connection is automatically con‐
figured using the PAN Bluetooth® profile.
To switch from PAN to DUN: select the
mobile phone.
Select ¥.
Select
.
Deactivate ª
.
Select
.
Configuring the Internet connection using
preset or manual access data (→ page 304).

Multimedia system:
,
. ö
#
#
#
#
#

Highlight the mobile phone.
Select ¥.
Select
.
For mobile phones with PAN and DUN:
select
.
Configure the Internet connection using pre‐
set or manual access data (→ page 304).

Canceling Internet access permission for a
mobile phone
Multimedia system:
,
. ö
.
#
#
#
#

Highlight the mobile phone.
Select ¥.
Select
.
Select
.

306 Multimedia system
Displaying mobile phone details
Multimedia system:
,
. ö
#
#
#

Connection status

Mercedes-Benz Apps

Connection status overview

Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps
Requirements:
R The registration for the use of MercedesBenz Apps has been completed.
R The general terms and conditions have been
confirmed.

Highlight the mobile phone.
Select ¥.
Select
.

Establishing an Internet connection
Multimedia system:

Multimedia system:
,
. Ú
# Select an app.

For example, select z
.
% The multimedia system usually establishes
the Internet connection automatically. If the
multimedia system is not connected to the
Internet, the Internet connection is estab‐
lished when an Internet application is used.

1 Display of existing connection and reception

field strength of the connected device

Displaying the connection status
Multimedia system:
,
. ö
# Select
.
% Depending on the means of connection, the
approximate data volume transmitted is dis‐
played.

Further Mercedes-Benz Apps and information
can be obtained at: http://apps.mercedesbenz.com/apps/
% The available features are country-depend‐
ent.
License fees may be applicable.
Operating Mercedes-Benz Apps using voice
control
Requirements:
The registration for the use of MercedesBenz Apps has been completed.

Multimedia system 307
R

The general terms and conditions have been
confirmed.

The ? symbol indicates that a MercedesBenz app can be used via voice control.
# Select a Mercedes-Benz App (→ page 306).
The app menu is displayed.
# To use voice control: select ?
.
# Say the question or command.
% Voice control is not available in all countries
and languages.

Showing/hiding the web browser menu
If you call up a website by selecting a link, for
example, the web browser menu is hidden.
# To show/hide: press the % button.
% The web browser supports video playback.
% No websites or videos are displayed while
the vehicle is in motion.

Web browser overview

Web browser
Calling up a web page
Multimedia system:
,
. z
z
Enter a web address.
To finish the entry and call up the web‐
site: select ¬.
.

#
#

1
2
3
4
5
6

URL entry
Bookmarks
Web page, back
Web page, forwards
Options
To close the browser

308 Multimedia system
Calling up web browser options
Multimedia system:

Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

Deleting browser data
Multimedia system:

,
. z
. Z
The following functions are available:
R
/

,
.

The following options are available:

Select an option.
Make the desired changes to the settings.

The following functions are available:
R
R
R

#
.

Select an option.
Select
.

Managing bookmarks
Multimedia system:
,
.

Selecting a bookmark
# Select an entry.

Editing a bookmark
Highlight a bookmark.
# Select ¥.
# Select
.
# Enter a URL and a name.
# Select ¡.
#

Deleting a bookmark
Highlight a bookmark.
# Select ¥.
# Select
.
# Select
.

Calling up the web browser settings
Multimedia system:
.

Creating a bookmark
# Select
.
# Enter a URL and a name.
# Select ¡.

Closing the browser
Multimedia system:
,
. z
# Select å

Multimedia system 309
Internet radio

Internet radio overview

Calling up the Internet radio
Requirements:
R The Internet radio service is activated.
R The data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may
need to be purchased.
R A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐
sion free of interference.
The services are country-dependent.
For more information, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
# Select
.
The Internet radio display appears. The last
station set starts playing.
% The connection quality depends on the local
mobile phone reception.

1 Internet radio provider
2 Selected category
3 Display (if connected to private user

account)

4 Data transfer rate
5 Current station is stored as a favorite
6 Additional information on the current station

Selecting and connecting to Internet radio
stations
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
.
. è
# Select a category.
# Select a station.
The connection is established automatically.
or
# Select
.
# Enter a station name using the entry field.
% A relatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using Internet radio.
Saving/deleting Internet radio stations as
favorites
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
.
#

Select a station.

310 Multimedia system
#

Press and hold the touchpad or controller
until an audible signal sounds.
The ß symbol appears by the station
name.
Select ß
.
The list of saved favorite stations appears.

or
#

Create an account for the online provider
(TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi‐
media system.
Your favorites are imported to the multimedia
system.

Deleting favorites
Select ß
.
# Select a station.
# Press and hold the touchpad or controller
until an audible signal sounds.
The ß symbol by the station name disap‐
pears.
#

Setting the Internet radio options
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
.
. Z
The following options are available:
R
: select the stream quality.
R
: log in to your
TuneIn user account.
R
: log out of your TuneIn
user account.
#

Select an option.

Media
Audio mode
Information on the audio mode
& WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐
dling data storage media
If you handle a data storage medium while
driving, your attention is diverted from the

traffic conditions. This could also cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only handle a data storage medium
when the vehicle is stationary.
Permissible file systems:
R FAT32
R exFAT
R NTFS
Permissible data storage medium:
R SD card
R USB storage device
R iPod®/iPhone®
R MTP devices
R Bluetooth® audio equipment
%

R
R

The multimedia system supports a total
of up to 50,000 files.
Data storage media up to 2 TB are sup‐
ported (32-bit address space).

Multimedia system 311
Supported formats:
MP3
R WMA
R AAC
R WAV
R FLAC
R ALAC
R

% Observe the following notes:
R Due to the large variety of available
music files regarding encoders, sampling
rates and data rates, playback cannot
always be guaranteed.
R Due to the wide range of USB devices
available on the market, playback cannot
be guaranteed for all USB devices.
R Copy-protected music files or DRM
encrypted files cannot be played back.
R MP3 players must support Media Trans‐
fer Protocol (MTP).

Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist
Plus are either registered trademarks or trade‐
marks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora‐
tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D sym‐
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Notes on copyright
Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself
for playback are generally subject to copyright
protection. In many countries, reproductions,
even for private use, are not permitted without
the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make
sure that you know about the applicable copy‐
right regulations and that you comply with these.

312 Multimedia system
Activating media mode
Multimedia system:
,
. à
# Select a media source.
Playable music files are played back.
Inserting/removing an SD card
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal‐
lowing SD cards
SD cards are small parts.
They could be swallowed and lead to chok‐
ing.
# Keep SD cards out of the reach of chil‐
dren.

Seek medical attention immediately if
an SD card has been swallowed.

* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐
tures
High temperatures can damage the SD mem‐
ory card.
# Remove the SD memory card after use
and take it out of the vehicle.

Multimedia system:
,
. à

Inserting
The multimedia connection unit is located in the
stowage compartment under the armrest.
# Insert the SD memory card into the SD card
slot until it engages. The side with the con‐
tacts must face downwards.
Playable music files are played back.
Removing
Press the SD card.
# Remove the SD card.
#

Multimedia system 313
Overview of the audio mode

1 Active data storage medium
2 Album cover
3 Track, artist, album
4

5
6
7

8
(for video playback)
9
A Track number and number of tracks in the

track list

314 Multimedia system
Connecting USB devices
* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐
tures
High temperatures can damage USB devices.
# Remove the USB device after use and
take it out of the vehicle.
The multimedia connection unit is found in the
stowage compartment under the armrest and
has two USB ports. Depending on the vehicle's
equipment, additional USB ports can be found in
the stowage compartment of the center console
or rear folding compartment.
# Connect the USB device to the USB port.
Playable music files are played back only if
the corresponding media display is activated.
% Use the USB port identified by ç to use
Apple CarPlay™ and Android Auto.

Selecting a track
Multimedia system:
,

Selecting a track by skipping to a track
# To skip backwards or forwards to a
track: navigate up or down.
Selecting a track using the current track list
Select è.
# Select
.
# Select a track.
#

Selecting playback options
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
Playing back similar tracks
Select
.
A track list with similar tracks is created and
played back.

Playback mode
# Select
.
The current track list is played in random
order.
# Select
.
All tracks on the active data storage medium
are played in random order.
# Select
.
The current track list is played in the order it
appears on the data storage medium.
Controlling media playback
Multimedia system:
,

A bar with playback controls is shown.
# To pause playback: press the touchpad.
The Ë symbol is displayed.
# To resume playback: press the touchpad
again.
The Ì symbol is displayed.
To fast forward/rewind
To move Ë on the timeline: swipe left or
right on the touchpad.

Multimedia system 315
To hide the playback controls
# Press the % button.
Video mode
Switching to video mode
Multimedia system:
,
. à
# Select a data storage medium.
Playable video files are played back.

The multimedia system supports the following
formats:
R MPEG
R AVI, DivX, MKV
R MP4, M4V
R WMV
% Due to the large variety of available video
files regarding encoders, sampling rates and
data transfer rates, playback cannot always
be guaranteed.
Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are sup‐
ported.

Copy-protected video files or DRM (Digital
Rights Management) encrypted files cannot
be played back.

316 Multimedia system
Overview of video mode

1 Active data storage medium
2 Album cover
3 Track, artist, album
4

5
6
7
8

9
A Track number and number of tracks in the

track list

Multimedia system 317
Activating/deactivating full-screen mode
Multimedia system:
,
. à
# Select a data storage medium.
Playable video files are played back.
# To activate full-screen mode: select #
.
# To deactivate full-screen mode: press the
touchpad.
Changing video settings
Multimedia system:
,
. Z

The following picture formats are available:
R

Media search
Starting the media search
Multimedia system:
,
. ª
Depending on the connected media sources and
files, the following categories are listed:
R
R
R
R
R

R
#

Adjusting the brightness manually
# Select
.
# Adjust the brightness.

Select a picture format.

R
R
R

(Apple® devices)
(Apple® devices)

Select a category.
% The categories are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read in and
analyzed.

Media Interface
Information about the Media Interface
Media Interface is a universal interface for the
connection of mobile audio equipment. The mul‐
timedia system has two USB ports. The USB
ports are located in the stowage compartment
under the armrest.
Supported devices
The Media Interface allows you to connect the
following data storage media:
R iPod®
R iPhone®
R MP3 player

318 Multimedia system
R

USB devices

For details and a list of supported devices, visit
our website at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect. Follow the instructions in
the "Media Interface" section.

Switching to Media Interface
Multimedia system:
,
. à
# Connect a data storage medium to the USB
port (→ page 314).

Select a media device.
Playable music files are played back.

Multimedia system 319
Overview of Media Interface

1
2
3
4

Active data storage medium
Cover
Artist, track and album
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list

Bluetooth® audio

5
6
7
8

Information about Bluetooth® audio

9
A

(video playback only)

320 Multimedia system
Before using your Bluetooth® audio equipment
with the multimedia system for the first time,
you will need to authorize it (→ page 321).
Bluetooth® Audio overview

1 Active data storage medium
2 Cover art

3 Track, artist, album

4 Track number and number of tracks in the

track list

Multimedia system 321
5
6

7
8

Searching for and authorizing Bluetooth®
audio equipment

Requirements
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia
system and audio equipment (→ page 252).
R The audio equipment supports the Blue‐
tooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.
R The audio equipment is "visible" for other
devices.
Multimedia system:
,
. à
. á
Authorizing new Bluetooth® audio equipment
# Select ¥.
# Select
.
# Select
.
Detected audio equipment is displayed in the
device list.

9
A

Select a Bluetooth® audio device.
Authorization starts. A code is displayed on
the multimedia system and on the mobile
phone.
If the codes are identical, confirm on the
audio device.
The audio equipment is connected and play‐
back starts.

Selecting Bluetooth® audio equipment that
has already been authorized
# Select ¥.
# Select a Bluetooth® audio device.
Establishing a connection from the Blue‐
tooth® audio device
The Bluetooth® device name of the multimedia
system is
.
# Select
.

(video playback only)
Start the authorization on the audio equip‐
ment (see manufacturer's operating instruc‐
tions).
A code is displayed on the multimedia sys‐
tem and on the mobile phone.
Confirm on both devices if the codes are
identical.
The audio equipment is connected and play‐
back starts.

With some audio equipment, playback must be
initially started on the device itself so that the
multimedia system can play the audio files.
% Device-specific information on authorizing
and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phones can be obtained at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

322 Multimedia system
Select a category.
A track list appears.
# Select a track.
% The function is only available when the
mobile phone and the music player selected
on the mobile phone support this function.

Activating Bluetooth® audio
Multimedia system:
,
. à
# Select á
.
The multimedia system activates the connec‐
ted Bluetooth® audio equipment.

Selecting a music player
Multimedia system:
,
. à
. á

Switching Bluetooth® audio equipment via
NFC

Select a Bluetooth® audio device.
If multiple music players are present on the
Bluetooth® audio equipment a list appears.
Select a music player.
Playback starts.

Searching for a track
Multimedia system:
,
. à
. á
# Select ª.

Requirements:
Observe the notes on using NFC
(→ page 289).
R The Bluetooth® audio overview is displayed
(→ page 322).

Lightly press the NFC area on the mobile
phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ized on the multimedia system as Bluetooth®
audio equipment, it is now connected.
If the mobile phone is authorized on the mul‐
timedia system as Bluetooth® audio equip‐

ment for the first time, it is connected after
confirming the instructions for the mobile
phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
Disconnecting Bluetooth® audio equipment
Multimedia system:
,
. á
#
#
#

Select a Bluetooth® audio device.
Select ¥
.
Select
.

Radio
Switching on the radio
Multimedia system:
,
#

Alternatively: press the $ button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last frequency
band selected.

Multimedia system 323
Radio overview

1 Active frequency band
2 Station name or set frequency
3 Artist, title, album and radio text

4 Station list
5
6

7
8
9

324 Multimedia system
Switching HD Radio on/off
Multimedia system:
,
. Z

Setting the frequency band
.

Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
and
can be selected.
# Select a frequency band.
Selecting a radio station
Multimedia system:
,
#

Switch the function on O or off ª.
% HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation.
U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and
the HD, HD Radio and "Arc" logos are propri‐
etary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Navigate up or down.

Calling up the radio station list
Multimedia system:
,
. è
# Select a station.

Searching for radio stations using station
names or direct frequency entry
Multimedia system:
,
. è . è
# Enter a station name or frequency.
# Select a.
The search results are displayed.
# Select a station.
Storing radio stations
Multimedia system:
,
. ß
# Select

Editing radio station presets
Multimedia system:
,
. ß
Moving stations:
Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the
left.

Multimedia system 325
#
#

Select
Select a preset.

Deleting stations:
# Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the
left.
# Select
.
# Select
.
Tagging music tracks
Multimedia system:
,

If radio stations provide the relevant information,
this function allows you to transfer information
on the music track currently playing to an
Apple® device. You can then purchase the audio
file from the iTunes Store®.
# Select
.
The track information is saved.

Activating/deactivating radio text
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
#

Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

Satellite radio
Information on the satellite radio
SIRIUS XM® Satellite Radio offers more than 175
digital-quality radio channels providing 100%
commercial-free music, sports, news and enter‐
tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio
employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to
broadcast around the clock throughout the USA
and Canada. The satellite radio program is avail‐
able for a monthly fee. Information about this
can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Cen‐
ter and at http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Your new
Mercedes-Benz vehicle comes with SIRIUS XM®
Satellite Radio pre-installed at the factory. This
service is free for a six-month trial period. About
a month before the trial period ends, information

will be provided on how to extend this subscrip‐
tion. A message is shown, describing how the
subscription can be extended.
% Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and
its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel
names and logos are the property of their
respective owners. All rights reserved.
Satellite radio restrictions
Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail‐
able or interrupted for a variety of reasons.
These include environmental or topographical
conditions beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC. Thus, operation at certain locations
may not be possible.
Registering satellite radio
Requirements:
R satellite radio equipment
R registration with a satellite radio provider
R if registration is not included when purchas‐
ing the system, your credit card details will
be required to activate your account

326 Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
.
. Z
# Select
.
The service information screen appears
showing the radio ID and the current sub‐
scription status.

Establish a telephone connection.
Follow the service staff's instructions.
The activation process may take up to ten
minutes.
% You can also have the satellite service acti‐
vated online. To do so, please visit http://

#
#

www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http://
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Switching on satellite radio
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
# Select
.

Multimedia system 327
Overview of the satellite radio

1
2
3
4

Active frequency band
Logo or album art (if available)
Category
Channel name

5 Channel information
6
7
8

9
A
B

328 Multimedia system
Selecting a satellite radio category
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
.
. è
.
#

Select a category.

Selecting a satellite radio channel
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
.
#

Navigate up or down.

Saving or deleting a satellite radio channel
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
.
. ß
# Select
.
Moving a channel
Select
.
# Select
# Select a preset.

Deleting a channel
# Select
# Select a preset.

Displaying PEG information for the current
channel
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
.
. Z
# Select
.
Setting the parental control
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
. Z
#
#

.
.

Activate the function O.
Determine a four-digit character sequence
and select ¡.
All channels with adult content are locked.

Unlocking a channel
# Enter the four-digit character sequence and
select ¡.
All channels with adult content are unlocked.
Music and sport alerts function
This function enables you to program an alert for
your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events.
Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being
played and sport alerts can be saved during a
live game. You can also specify sport alerts via
the menu option. The system then continuously
searches through all the channels. If a match is
found with a stored alert, you will be informed.
Setting music and sport alerts
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
. Z
.
Setting a music alert
Select
.
or
# Select

Multimedia system 329
#

Select ¥
.
The following options are available:
R
R
R
R
R
R

Select an option.

O.
The alert is set for the current artist or track.
If a match is found, a prompt appears asking
whether you wish to change to the station.

Setting a sport alert
Select
.
or
# Select
.
# Select
.
or
# Select
.
# Select a team from a league.
#

Information on Smart Favorites and Tune
Start
Stations in the station presets can be added as
smart favorites. Smart favorites stations are
automatically saved to temporary storage in the
background. If you change to a smart favorite
station, you can replay, pause or actively skip
forward or back to broadcasts which you have
missed. If Tune Start is activated and you change
to another smart favorite station, the music
track currently playing on the station is automat‐
ically restarted from the beginning of the track.
Adding a channel to Smart Favorites
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
.
#
#
#
#

Select the active frequency band.
Highlight an entry.
Select ¥.
Select
.

Activating/deactivating Tune Start
Multimedia system:
,
. Z
.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Playback controls
Multimedia system:
,

You can pause the playback of the current sta‐
tion or skip forward or backward in the timeline.
This leaves live mode to access the internal tem‐
porary storage.
# To fast forward/rewind: turn the controller
anti-clockwise or clockwise.
# To jump to the previous/next song: slide
the controller to the left or right.
# To pause playback: select Ë.
# To return to live mode: navigate to the end
of the timeline.

330 Multimedia system
Displaying satellite radio service information
Multimedia system:
,
. Þ
.
. Z
# Select
.
Sound
Tone settings
Information about the sound system
The sound system has a total output of 100
watts and is equipped with seven speakers. It is
available for all functions in the radio and media
modes.
Calling up the sound menu
Multimedia system:
,
. à
The following functions are available:
R
R

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐
tings
Multimedia system:
,
. à
.
# Select
,
or
.
# Change the settings.
Activating/deactivating automatic volume
adjustment
Multimedia system:
,
. à
.
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
# Switch the function on O or off ª.
Adjusting the balance/fader
Multimedia system:
,
. à
.

R
R

Select a sound menu.

Adjust the balance and fader.

To exit the menu: press the % button.

Burmester® surround sound system
Information about the Burmester® surround
sound system
The Burmester® surround sound system has a
total output of 590 watts and is equipped with
13 speakers. It is available for all functions in the
radio and media modes.
Calling up the sound menu in the
Burmester® surround sound system
Multimedia system:
,
. à
The following functions are available:
R
R
R
R
R
R
#

Select a function.

Multimedia system 331
Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings
on the Burmester® surround sound system
Multimedia system:
,
. à
.
# Select
,
or
.
# Set the desired values.

Activating/deactivating volume adjustment
in the Burmester® surround sound system
Multimedia system:
,
. à
.

Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
# Switch the function on O or off ª.
Adjusting the balance/fader in the
Burmester® surround sound system
Multimedia system:
,
. à
.
#

Adjust the balance and fader.

To exit the menu: press the % button.

Switching surround sound on/off in the
Burmester® surround sound system
Multimedia system:
,
. à
.
Switch the function on O or off ª.

Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
,
. à
.
# Adjust the sound focus.

332 Maintenance and care
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display in the
instrument display provides information on the
remaining time or distance before the next
service due date.
You can hide this service message using the
back button on the left-hand side of the steering
wheel.
You can obtain further information concerning
the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Displaying the service due date
On-board computer:
,

The next service due date is displayed.
# To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R Operating the on-board computer
(→ page 217).
Carrying out maintenance work at regular
intervals
* NOTE Premature wear through failure to
observe service due dates
Service work which is not carried out at the
right time or incompletely can lead to
increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
# Always observe the prescribed service
intervals.
# Always have the prescribed service
work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐
mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work

will need to be performed more often than
specified if the vehicle is operated under ardu‐
ous conditions or increased loads, for example:
R regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐
ate stops.
R if the vehicle is primarily used for short-dis‐
tance driving.
R for frequent operation in mountainous terrain
or on poor road surfaces.
R if the engine is often left idling for long peri‐
ods.
R in particularly dusty conditions and/or if airrecirculation mode is frequently used.
In these or similar operating conditions, have the
interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil, oil
filter etc. changed more frequently. The tires
must be checked more frequently if the vehicle
is operated under increased loads. Further infor‐
mation can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop.

Maintenance and care 333
Non-operational times with the battery dis‐
connected
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
can only calculate the service due date when
the battery is connected.
# Note down the service due date displayed on
the instrument display before disconnecting
the battery (→ page 332).
Engine compartment
Active hood (pedestrian protection)
Operation of the active hood (pedestrian pro‐
tection)
In certain accident situations, the risk of injury
to pedestrians can be reduced by the actuation
of the active hood. The rear area of the engine
hood is raised by approximately 85 mm.
For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig‐
gered active hood yourself. If the active hood
has been triggered, pedestrian protection may
be limited.

A qualified specialist workshop must re-instate
the full functionality of the active hood.
The active hood is not available in all countries.
Resetting the active hood
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine,
the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described
as follows.

With your hand flat, push down active hood
1 in the area around the hinges on both
sides (arrows).
The hood must engage in position.
If the active hood can be raised slightly at
the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the
step until it engages correctly.

Opening/closing the hood
& WARNING Risk of accident if the engine
hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
# Never unlatch the engine hood while
driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the
engine hood is latched.

334 Maintenance and care
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
when opening and closing the engine
hood
When opening or closing the engine hood, it
may suddenly drop into the end position.
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
engine hood's range of movement.
# Only open or close the engine hood
when there are no persons in the
engine hood's range of movement.
& WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
# Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.

In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment may continue to move or suddenly
move again even after the ignition has been
switched off, e.g. the cooler fan.
Make sure of the following before performing
tasks in the engine compartment:
# Switch the ignition off.
# Never touch the danger zone surround‐
ing moving component parts, e.g. the
rotation area of the fan.
# Remove jewelry and watches.
# Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.

& WARNING Risk of injury from touching
component parts under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection
system work under high voltage. If you touch
component parts which are under voltage,
you could receive an electric shock.
# Never touch component parts of the
ignition system or the fuel injection sys‐
tem when the ignition is switched on.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine,
the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described
as follows.

Maintenance and care 335
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windshield wipers while the engine hood
is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind‐
shield wipers are set in motion, you can be
trapped by the wiper linkage.
# Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine
hood.

To open: pull lever 1 to release the engine
hood.

#
#
#

Push hood catch 1 upwards and lift the
hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm).
To close: lower the hood and let it fall from a
height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open
the hood again and close it with a little more
force until it engages correctly.

336 Maintenance and care
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level using the oil
dipstick

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine,
the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described
as follows.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
installed in the engine compartment in different
locations.
Waiting time before checking the oil level:
R Engine at normal operating temperature: five
minutes.

Oil level too high: oil level is above 2.
If the oil level is too low, top up with
1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil.
If the oil level is too high, drain off excess
engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
R

Adding engine oil
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment

#
#
#

Park the vehicle on a flat surface.
Remove oil dipstick 1 and wipe off.
Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again after
approximately three seconds.
R Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2
and 3.
R Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or
below.

Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine,
the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described
as follows.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from
engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment, it may ignite.

Maintenance and care 337
#
#

Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the filler opening.
Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐
oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐
nent parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#

#
#

Do not use engine oils or oil filters
which do not correspond to the specifi‐
cations explicitly prescribed for the
service intervals.
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
Do not use additives.
Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil
change.

* NOTE Damage caused by topping up too
much engine oil
Adding too much engine oil can cause dam‐
age to the engine or the catalytic converter.
# Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualified specialist workshop.

#
#
#
#

Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove
it.
Add engine oil.
Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
Check the oil level again (→ page 336).

Checking the coolant level
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine,
the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described
as follows.
& WARNING Danger of burns from hot
coolant
The engine cooling system is pressurized,
particularly when the engine is warm. If you

338 Maintenance and care
open the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out.
# Let the motor cool down before opening
the cap.
# When opening the cap, wear gloves and
protective eyewear.
# Slowly turn the cap half a turn to allow
pressure to escape.

#
#

Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 °F (70 °C).
Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to
relieve excess pressure.
Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise
and remove it.

The coolant level is correct:
if the engine is cold up to marker bar 2
R if the engine is warm up to 0.6 in (1.5 cm)
over marker bar 2
R

If necessary, top up with coolant that has
been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Further information on coolant (→ page 404)

Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine,
the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described
as follows.
& WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
# Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.

Maintenance and care 339
#

Cleaning and care
Information on washing the vehicle in a car
wash

In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.

& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
windshield washer concentrate

& WARNING Risk of accident due to
reduced braking effect after washing the
vehicle

Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or
the exhaust system.
# Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler
opening.

The braking effect is reduced after washing
the vehicle.
# After the vehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to
the traffic conditions until the braking
effect has been fully restored.
#
#

Remove cap 1 by the tab.
Top up the washer fluid.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a
car wash, ensure the following beforehand:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function are deactivated.
R The 360° Camera or the rear view camera is
switched off.
R The side windows and sliding sunroof are
completely closed.

340 Maintenance and care
R
R
R
R

The blower for the ventilation/heating is
switched off.
The windshield wiper switch is in position
g.
In car washes with a towing mechanism: neu‐
tral i is engaged.
The SmartKey is at a distance of at least
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle, otherwise
the tailgate could open unintentionally.

% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax
from the windshield and wiper rubber, this
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
noise.
Information on using a power washer
& WARNING Risk of accident when using
high-pressure cleaning equipment with
round-spray nozzles
The water jet from a round-spray nozzle (dirt
grinder) may cause damage to tires and sus‐
pension components that is not visible.

Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly.
# Do not use high-pressure cleaning
equipment with round-spray nozzles to
clean your vehicle.
# Damaged tires or suspension compo‐
nents must be replaced immediately.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐
lowing when using a power washer:
R Keep the SmartKey at least 10 ft (3 m) away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate
could open unintentionally.
R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in
(30 cm) to the vehicle.
R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.
Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in
(70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the
vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer.
Move the power washer nozzle around whilst
cleaning.

Observe the information on the correct dis‐
tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions.
Do not point the nozzle of the power washer
directly at sensitive parts such as tires, gaps,
electrical components, batteries, light sour‐
ces and ventilation slots.

Washing the vehicle by hand
Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number
of countries, washing by hand is only permitted
in specially designated wash bays.
# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
# Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not
expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and
dry using a chamois. Take care not to point
the water jet directly towards the air inlet
grille.

Maintenance and care 341
Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care
Observe the following information:
Cleaning and care
Paintwork

Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the
treated areas afterwards.
Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
Coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils, fuel and greases:
remove by gently rubbing with a cloth soaked in petroleum
ether or lighter fluid.
Tar stains: use tar remover.
Wax: use silicone remover.

Only use care products approved by Mercedes-Benz.

R
R
R

Matt finish

Avoiding paintwork damage
R
R

R
R
R
R
R

Do not attach stickers, films or similar.
Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engi‐
neering standards.
Do not use car wash programs with a final hot wax treat‐
ment.
Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products,
gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.

342 Maintenance and care
Notes on care of car parts
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
windshield wipers are switched on while
the windshield is being cleaned
If the windshield wipers are set in motion
while you are cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the
wiper arm.

Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades.

& WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes
and tailpipe trim

#
#

Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim.
Allow the vehicle parts to cool down
before you touch them.

The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become
very hot. If you come into contact with these
parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Observe the following information:

Wheels/rims

Notes on cleaning and care

Avoiding vehicle damage

Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners.

R
R

Windows

Clean the windows on the inside and outside using a damp
cloth and cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.
This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads,
drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before
parking it. The brake discs and brake pads warm up and
dry out.

Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning
agents to clean the inside of windows.

Maintenance and care 343
Notes on cleaning and care

Avoiding vehicle damage

Wiper blades

Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth.

Do not clean the wiper blades too often.

Exterior lighting

Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent,
e.g. car shampoo.

Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable
for plastic lenses.

AIRPANEL

If the vehicle is very dusty or there are salt deposits in the
AIRPANEL mechanics, the adjustment range of the shutters in
the radiator grille may be restricted.
R Switch on the ignition, and the shutters open automati‐
cally after approximately 120 seconds.
R Clean the bearing points of the shutters with a power
washer.

When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of
11.8 in (30 cm).

Sensors

Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the
radiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo.

When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of
11.8 in (30 cm).

Reversing camera
and 360° Camera

R
R

Tailpipes

Open the camera cover with the multimedia sys‐
tem(→ page 200) .
Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.

Clean with cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz,
particularly in the winter and after washing the vehicle.

Do not use a power washer.

Do not use acidic cleaning agents.

344 Maintenance and care
Notes on care of the interior
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic
parts breaking off after the use of sol‐
vent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol‐
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous.

When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts
may break away.
# Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐
ucts containing solvents to clean the
cockpit.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from
bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
weaken them.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to
tear or fail in an accident.
# Never bleach or dye seat belts.

Observe the following information:
Cleaning and care
Seat belts

Clean with lukewarm and soapy water.

Avoiding vehicle damage
R
R

Display
Plastic trim

Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and
TFT/LCD display care product.
R
R

Clean with a damp microfiber cloth.
For heavy soiling: use care product recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.

R
R
R
R

Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 176 °F
(80 °C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.
Switch off the display and let it cool down.
Do not use any other cleaning products.
Do not attach stickers, films or similar.
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to
come in contact with the plastic trim.

Maintenance and care 345
Cleaning and care
Real wood/trim ele‐
ments

R
R
R

Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and
soap solution.
For heavy soiling: use care product recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.

Avoiding vehicle damage
Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.

Roof lining

Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet

Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.

Genuine leather
seat covers

DINAMICA seat cov‐
ers

Clean with a damp cloth.

Do not use a microfiber cloth.

Artificial leather
seat covers

Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water.

Do not use a microfiber cloth.

Cloth seat covers

Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water and allow to dry.

Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth.
Leather care: use leather care agents that have been rec‐
ommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
Do not use a microfiber cloth.

346 Breakdown assistance
Emergency
Removing the safety vest
The safety vests are located in the safety vest
compartments in the driver's and front
passenger door stowage compartments.

Open safety vest bag 1 and pull out the
safety vest.
% There are also safety vest compartments in
the rear door stowage compartments in
which safety vests can be stowed.

The requirements defined by the legal standard
are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct
size and is fully closed.
Replace the safety vest if:
R it is damaged or dirt on the reflective strips
can no longer be removed
R the maximum number of washes is exceeded
R the fluorescence of the safety vest has faded
Flat tire
Notes on flat tires

To remove: pull out safety jacket bag 1 by
loop 2.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Maximum number of washes
Maximum wash temperature
Do not bleach
Do not iron
Do not use a laundry dryer
Do not dry-clean
This is a class 2 jacket

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat
tire
A flat tire severely affects the driving charac‐
teristics as well as the steering and braking
of the vehicle.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
# Do not drive on with a flat tire.
# Change the flat tire immediately with
the emergency spare wheel or spare

Breakdown assistance 347
wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
# Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat
tires).
In the event of a flat tire, the following options
are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐
ment:
R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos‐
sible to continue the journey for a short
period of time. Make sure you observe the
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)
(→ page 347).
R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair
the tire so that it is possible to continue the
journey for a short period of time. To do this,
use the TIREFIT kit (→ page 348).
R Vehicles with Mercedes-Benz
mbrace®(USA only): you can make a call for
Roadside Assistance via the overhead control

panel in the case of a breakdown
(→ page 300).
All vehicles: change the wheel
(→ page 390).

MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving
in limp-home mode
When driving in emergency mode the han‐
dling characteristics are impaired, e.g. when
cornering, when accelerating strongly and
when braking.
# Do not exceed the specified maximum
speed.
# Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over
obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road).
This applies, in particular, to a loaded
vehicle.
# Stop driving in the emergency mode if
you notice:

R
R
R
R
R
#

banging noise
vehicle vibration
smoke which smells like rubber
continuous ESP® intervention
cracks in tire side walls
After driving in emergency mode have
the rims checked by a qualified special‐
ist workshop with regard to their further
use.
The defective tire must be replaced in
every case.

With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a
total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How‐
ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly
visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the side
wall of the tire.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐

348 Breakdown assistance
junction with an activated tire pressure monitor‐
ing system.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in
the multifunction display:
R Check the tire for damage.
R If driving on, observe the following notes.

TIREFIT kit storage location

The TIREFIT kit is located under the cargo com‐
partment floor.

You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora‐
tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly
those in the tire contact surface. You can use
TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F
(-20 °C).

Driving distance possible in limp-home mode
after the pressure loss warning:
Load condition

50 miles (80 km)

Fully laden

19 miles (30 km)

& WARNING Risk of accident when using
tire sealant.

Driving distance pos‐
sible in limp-home
mode

Partially laden

The driving distance possible in limp-home
mode may vary depending on the driving
style.
Maximum permissible speed 50 mph
(80 km/h).

If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand‐
ard tire as a temporary measure.

Tire inflation compressor

1 Tire inflation compressor
2 Tire sealant bottle

Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements
Have the following tools readily available:
R Tire sealant bottle
R Sticker TIREFIT

In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis‐
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
R There are cuts or punctures in the tire
larger than those previously mentioned.
R The wheel rim is damaged.
R You have driven at a very low tire pres‐
sure or on a flat tire.
#
#

Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Breakdown assistance 349
& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning
from tire sealant
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita‐
tion. Do not allow it to come into contact
with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not
swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes.
Keep the tire sealant away from children.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
# Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately using water.
# If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐
oughly rinse out the eyes using clean
water.
# If tire sealant has been swallowed,
immediately rinse out the mouth thor‐
oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting and seek medical
attention immediately.
# Change out of any clothes contamina‐
ted with tire sealant immediately.
# If allergic reactions occur, seek medical
attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐
tion compressor running too long
#

Do not run the tire inflation compressor
for longer than ten minutes without
interruption.

Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on
the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali‐
fied specialist workshop every five years.
# Do not remove any foreign objects which
have entered the tire.

Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out
of the tire inflation compressor housing.

350 Breakdown assistance
#
#

Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of
tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages.
Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downwards
into recess 2 of the tire inflation compres‐
sor.

Press on and off switch 3 on the tire infla‐
tion compressor.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum‐
ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly
rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation compres‐
sor during this phase.
# Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes.
The tire should then have attained a tire
pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).

#
#
#
#

Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the
defective tire.
Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7.
Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle.
Switch on the ignition.

If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the
affected areas as quickly as possible. It is pref‐
erable to use clean water.
If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐
lene.

If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been ach‐
ieved:
# Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
defective tire.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when
unscrewing the filling hose.
# Very slowly drive the vehicle forwards or
reverse approximately 33 ft (10 m).
# Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes the tire
pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specified tire pressure not being reached
If the specified tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance.

Breakdown assistance 351
Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too
low can significantly impair braking and han‐
dling characteristics.
# Do not continue driving.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved:
& WARNING Risk of accident from driving
with sealed tires
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the handling characteristics and is
not suitable for higher speeds.
# Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
# Do not exceed the specified maximum
speed with a tire that has been repaired
using tire sealant.
#

Observe the maximum permissible speed for
a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph
(80 km/h).

Fasten the upper section of the TIREFIT
sticker to the instrument cluster where it will
be easily seen by the driver.

* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire
sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out
from the filling hose.
# Therefore, place the filling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental

pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal

Tire sealant contains pollutants.
# Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
#
#

Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
defective tire.

#
#
#

Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐
tion compressor.
Pull away immediately.
Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure using
the tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specified tire pressure not being reached
If the specified tire pressure is not reached
after a brief drive, the tire is too badly dam‐
aged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire
in this instance.
Damaged tires and tire pressure that is too
low can significantly impair the braking prop‐
erties and the handling characteristics.
# Do not continue driving.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, con‐
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or

352 Breakdown assistance
call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
# Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
side B‑pillar or the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values.
# To increase the tire pressure: switch on
the tire inflation compressor.

#
#

When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
the filling hose from the valve of the sealed
tire.
Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
sealed tire.
Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
inflation compressor.
The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot‐
tle.
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐
shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and
filling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle)
Notes on the 12 V battery

To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure
release button 1 next to manometer 2.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to
work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐
tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This
can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel‐

evant systems, for example the lighting sys‐
tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program). The operating
safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R when braking
R in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
#

#
#

R
R

In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐
lar incident, contact a qualified special‐
ist workshop immediately.
Do not continue driving.
Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Further information on ABS (→ page 169)
Further information on ESP®

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use batteries which have been tes‐
ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-

Breakdown assistance 353
Benz. These batteries provide increased impact
protection to prevent vehicle occupants from
suffering acid burns should the battery be dam‐
aged in the event of an accident.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐
trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which
may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture
in the battery.
# To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal
vehicle body before handling the bat‐
tery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created
while the battery is charging and during starting
assistance.
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns
from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic.

#
#
#
#
#

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
Do not lean over the battery.
Do not inhale battery gases.
Keep children away from the battery.
Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐
oughly with plenty of clean water and
seek medical attention immediately.

All vehicles

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.

Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
If you have to connect the 12 volt battery, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion

Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery.
Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐
sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes
or clothing. Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular gloves, an

354 Breakdown assistance
apron and a face mask. Immediately
rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off
with clean water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
Wear safety glasses.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V
battery
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery
# When charging the battery and during start‐
ing assistance, always use the jump-start
connection point in the engine compartment.

Keep children away.

* NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐
voltage

Observe this Operator's Manual.

When charging using a battery charger with‐
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery
or the on-board electronics may be damaged.
# Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
mum charging voltage of 14.4 V.

If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an
extended period of time:
R Activate standby mode, or
R Connect the battery to a battery charger
approved by Mercedes-Benz, or
R Consult a qualified specialist workshop to
disconnect the battery

All other vehicles
# When charging the battery and during start‐
ing assistance, always use the jump-start
connection point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damaging the battery through
overvoltage
When charging using a battery charger with‐
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery
or the vehicle electronics may be damaged.
# Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐
gen gas igniting
A battery generates hydrogen gas during the
charging process. If there is a short circuit or
sparks start to form, there is a danger of the
hydrogen gas igniting.
# Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come
into contact with vehicle parts.
# Never place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
# When connecting and disconnecting the
battery, you must observe the descri‐
bed order for the battery clamps.

Breakdown assistance 355
#

When giving starting assistance, always
make sure that you only connect bat‐
tery terminals with identical polarity.
During starting assistance, you must
observe the described order for con‐
necting and disconnecting the jumper
cables.
Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐
tery clamps while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of explosion during
charging process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting
assistance, the battery may release an explo‐
sive gas mixture.
# Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks
and smoking.
# Make sure that there is sufficient venti‐
lation during the charging process and
during starting assistance.
# Do not lean over a battery.

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument
cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is
very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐
zen.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐
zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐
tures slightly above or below freezing point.
During starting assistance or battery charg‐
ing, battery gas may be released.
# Always thaw a frozen battery out first
before charging it or performing start‐
ing assistance.
The service life of a battery that has been
thawed may be dramatically shortened.
It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐
tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

All vehicles
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or
extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the
engine may damage the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel.
# Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting
assistance and when charging the battery:
R Only use undamaged jumper/charging
cables with a sufficient cross-section and
insulated terminal clamps.
R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal
parts while the jumper/charging cable is
connected to the battery/jump-start connec‐
tion point.
R The jumper/charging cable must not come
into contact with any parts which may move
when the engine is running.

356 Breakdown assistance
R
R
R
R

Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged.
Keep away from fire and open flames.
Do not lean over the battery.
When charging: only use battery chargers
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
read the battery charger's operating instruc‐
tions before charging the battery.

#
#

Make sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off.
Open the hood.

Observe the additional following points during
starting assistance:
R Starting assistance may only be provided
using batteries with a nominal voltage of
12 V.
R The vehicles must not touch.
R Gasoline engine: only accept starting assis‐
tance if the engine and exhaust system are
cold.
#
#

Secure the vehicle by applying the electric
parking brake.
Automatic transmission: shift the transmis‐
sion to position j.

#
#
#
#

Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the
jump-starting connection point in the direc‐
tion of the arrow.
Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to
positive pole of the donor battery using the

jumper/charging cable. Always begin with
positive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first.
During the starting assistance proce‐
dure: start the engine of the donor vehicle
and run at idle speed.
Connect the negative pole of the donor bat‐
tery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle
by using the jumper/charging cable. Begin
with the donor battery first.
During starting assistance: start the
engine of your own vehicle.
During the charging process: start the
charging process.
During starting assistance: let the engines
run for several minutes.
During starting assistance: before discon‐
necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec‐
trical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the
rear window heater or lighting.

When the starting assistance/charging process
is complete:

Breakdown assistance 357
#

First, remove the jumper/charging cable
from ground point 3 and negative pole of
the donor battery, then from positive clamp
2 and positive pole of the donor battery.
Begin each time with the contacts on your
own vehicle first.
After removing the jumper/charging cable,
close cover 1 of positive clamp 2.

Further information can be obtained at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
Tow starting or towing away
Permitted towing methods
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐
ing away incorrectly
#

Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.

358 Breakdown assistance
Permitted towing methods
Vehicle equipment/towing
method
Both axles on the ground

Front axle raised

Rear axle raised

Vehicles with manual transmission

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at
31 mph (50 km/h)

Vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at
31 mph (50 km/h)

Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in
the center position with a steering
wheel lock.

4MATIC vehicles

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at
31 mph (50 km/h)

Towing with a raised axle: towing should be
performed by a towing company.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the
ground
#

Observe the notes on the permitted towing
methods (→ page 357) (→ page 358).

Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged.

When the battery is discharged:
the engine cannot be started.
R the electric parking brake cannot be released
or applied.
R

vehicles with automatic transmission: the
automatic transmission cannot be shifted to
position i or j.

Breakdown assistance 359
% Vehicles with automatic transmission: if
the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
ted to position i, or the multifunction dis‐
play in the instrument cluster does not show
anything, have the vehicle transported
away(→ page 360). A towing vehicle with lift‐
ing equipment is required for vehicle trans‐
portation.
* NOTE Damage due to towing away at
excessively high speeds or over long dis‐
tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐
ing at excessively high speeds or over long
distances.
# A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)
must not be exceeded.
# A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)
must not be exceeded.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing
a vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle being tow-started or towed
away is heavier than the permissible gross
mass of your vehicle, the following situations
can occur:
R The towing eye may become detached.
R The vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or even overturn.
#

If another vehicle is tow-started or
towed away, its weight must not exceed
the permissible gross mass of your own
vehicle.

If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away,
its weight must not exceed the permissible gross
mass of the towing vehicle.
# Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐
tification plate.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: do
not open the driver's door or front passenger

#
#

door, otherwise the automatic transmission
automatically shifts to position j.
Install the towing eye (→ page 362).
Attach the tow bar.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐
tion
#

#
#
#
#

Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
the towing eyes.

Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
(→ page 64).
Do not activate the HOLD function.
Deactivate Active Brake Assist (→ page 174).
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
Release the electric parking brake.

360 Breakdown assistance
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐
ted safety-related functions during the
towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐
ger available in the following situations:
R the ignition is switched off.
R the brake system or power steering sys‐
tem is malfunctioning.
R the energy supply or the on-board electri‐
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐
icantly more effort may be required to steer
and brake than is normally required.
# Use a tow bar.
# Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely, before towing the vehicle
away.

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive
power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power
may be too high and the vehicles could be
damaged.
# Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
#
#
#

Observe the notes on towing away
(→ page 358).
Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to
load the vehicle.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The automatic transmission may be locked
in position j in the event of damage to the
electrical system. To shift to i, provide the
on-board electrical system with power
(→ page 354).

#
#

Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle and prevent it from rolling away.
Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping
System PLUS)
& WARNING Risk of an accident when
transporting vehicles with Adaptive
Damping System PLUS
The reduced damping forces on the vehicle
being transported can cause the vehicle/
trailer combination to start to swing.
As a result, when transporting vehicles with
the Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the
vehicle/trailer combination may start to skid.
Consequently, you could lose control of your
vehicle.
# When transporting, ensure that:

Breakdown assistance 361
R
R

The vehicle has been loaded onto
the transporter correctly
The vehicle is secured at all four
wheels with suitable tensioning
straps
The maximum permissible speed of
35 mph (60 km/h) is not exceeded
when transporting

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic
transmission

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur‐
ing it incorrectly
#

After loading, the vehicle must be
secured at all four wheels. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.
A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) up
and 4 in (10 cm) down must be kept to
the transport platform.

Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after
loading.

Make sure that the front and rear axles come
to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to
incorrect positioning
#

Do not position the vehicle above the
connection point of the transport vehi‐
cle.

Towing eye storage location

Towing eye 1 is attached to the edge of the
cargo compartment under the cargo compart‐
ment floor.
Vehicles with folding bench seat: the towing
eye is located under a cover.

362 Breakdown assistance
Installing the towing eye

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect use of
the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐
cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐
ess.
# Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.
Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine
starting)
Vehicles with automatic transmission
* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
mission due to tow starting

Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and
remove.
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten.
% Make sure that cover 1 engages in the
bumper when you remove the towing eye.

The automatic transmission may be damaged
in the process of tow starting vehicles with
automatic transmission.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow started.
#

Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow started.

Electrical fuses
Notes on electrical fuses
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher
amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐
ded.
This could result in a fire.
# Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐
fied new fuses containing the correct
amperage.
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect fuses
Incorrect fuses may cause damage to electri‐
cal components or systems.
# Only use Mercedes-Benz approved
fuses with the correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognize by the
color and fuse rating. For engine compartment

Breakdown assistance 363
and cargo compartment fuses, only use those
fuses marked with an "S". The fuse ratings are
listed in the fuse assignment diagram.
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in
the cargo compartment (→ page 365).
* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused
by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
system or cause it to malfunction.
# When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse
box.
# When closing the fuse box, make sure
that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐
rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐
ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen‐
ter.
Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.

R
R

All electrical consumers are switched off.
The ignition is switched off.

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
boxes:
R Fuse box on the driver's side of the engine
compartment (→ page 363)
R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
(→ page 364)
R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell
(→ page 364)
R Fuse box in the cargo compartment on the
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel (→ page 365)
Fuse box in the engine compartment
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(→ page 362).
Requirements:
R You need a dry cloth and a screwdriver.

Opening
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windshield wipers while the engine hood
is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind‐
shield wipers are set in motion, you can be
trapped by the wiper linkage.
# Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine
hood.

364 Breakdown assistance
#
#
#
#
#

Insert the lid into the bracket at the rear of
the fuse box.
Fold down lid of the fuse box and tighten
screws 4.
Insert cover 1 on both sides and engage
the safety clips.
Turn clip 2 on cover 1 one quarter-turn to
the right.
Close the engine hood.

Dashboard fuse box

#
#

Turn clip 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn to
the left.
Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the
arrow.

#
#

Remove any existing moisture from the fuse
box using a dry cloth.
Loosen screws 4, remove fuse box lid 3
from the top.

Closing
# Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐
rectly in the lid.

The fuse box is on the side of the dashboard
under a cover.
# Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter for further information.
Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(→ page 362).

Breakdown assistance 365

#
#

Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.

Fuse box in the cargo compartment
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(→ page 362).
# Fold down the side cover.

Fold cover 2 down in the direction of the
arrow.
Remove cover 1.

The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on
the side of the fuse box.

366 Wheels and tires
Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐
teristics
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling
to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or
tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is
defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible to check the
wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire dam‐
age could also be causing the unusual handling
characteristics. If you find no signs of damage,
have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
& WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐
aged tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss.
As a result, you could lose control of your
vehicle.

Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires
immediately.

& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to
insufficient tire tread
Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced
tire grip. The tire tread is no longer able to
dissipate water.
This means that in heavy rain or slush the
risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particu‐
lar if vehicle speed is not adapted to suit the
conditions.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low,
tires may exhibit different levels of wear at
different locations on the tire contact sur‐
face.
# Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the tire
contact surface across the entire width
of all tires.

Minimum tread depth for:
R Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
#

For safety reasons, replace the tires
before the legally prescribed limit for
the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐
ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g.
prior to a long journey or driving off-road:
R Check the tire pressure (→ page 368).
R Visual inspection of wheels and tires for
damage.
R Check the valve caps.
The valves must be protected against mois‐
ture and dirt by the valve caps approved
especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the
tire contact surface condition across the
entire width.

Wheels and tires 367
The minimum tread depth for summer tires is
â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in
(4 mm).

Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators
(arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They
are visible once a tread depth of approximately
á in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Notes on snow chains
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect mounting of snow chains
If you have mounted snow chains to the front
wheels, the snow chains may drag against
the vehicle body or chassis components.
This could cause damage to the vehicle or
the tires.
# Never mount snow chains on the front
wheels.
# Only mount snow chains on the rear
wheels in pairs.
* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from
mounted snow chains
If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels,
the wheel trims can be damaged.
# Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
before mounting snow chains.
R

Snow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain

R
R

information about this from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
For safety reasons, only use snow chains that
have been specifically approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains
with the same quality standard.
If snow chains are mounted, the maximum
permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do
not use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are mounted.
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: Only
drive at raised vehicle level when snow
chains are mounted.

% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away
(→ page 169). This allows the wheels to
spin, achieving an increased driving force.

368 Wheels and tires
Tire pressure
Notes on tire pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient or excessive tire pressure
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R The tires may burst, especially as the
load and vehicle speed increase.
R The tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R The driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
#

R
R

Comply with the recommended tire
pressure and check the tire pressure of
all tires including the spare wheel regu‐
larly:
at least once a month
when the load changes

before embarking on a longer journey
if operating conditions change, e.g. offroad driving

Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.

Driving with tire pressure that is too high or too
low can:
R Shorten the service life of the tires.
R Cause increased tire damage.
R Adversely affect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to
insufficient tire pressure
Tires with pressure that is too low can over‐
heat and burst as a result.
In addition, they also suffer from excessive
and/or irregular wear, which can significantly
impair the braking properties and the han‐
dling characteristics.
# Avoid excessively low tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Tire pressure which is too low can cause:
Tire defects as a result of overheating
R Impaired handling characteristics
R Irregular wear
R Increased fuel consumption

& WARNING Risk of accident from exces‐
sive tire pressure
Tires with excessively high pressure can
burst because they are damaged more easily
by highway fill, pot holes etc.
In addition, they also suffer from irregular
wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐
ing properties and the handling characteris‐
tics.
# Avoid excessively high tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Excessively high tire pressure can result in:
R Increased braking distance
R Impaired handling characteristics
R Irregular wear

Wheels and tires 369
R
R

Impaired driving comfort
Susceptibility to damage

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by
repeated drop in tire pressure
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged.
Insufficient tire pressure can cause the tires
to burst.
# Inspect the tire for signs of foreign
objects.
# Check whether the wheel or valve has a
leak.
# If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
You can find information on tire pressures for
the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the follow‐
ing labels:
R Tire and Loading Information placard on the
B‑pillar of your vehicle (→ page 373).
R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (→ page 369).

Observe the maximum tire pressure
(→ page 381).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
pressure.
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem: You can also check the tire pressure using
the on-board computer.
Only correct tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Conditions for cold tires:
R The vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
A rise in the tire temperature of 18 °F (10 °C)
increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa
(0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when
checking the tire pressure of warm tires.
The tire pressures recommended for increased
load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect
the ride comfort.

& WARNING Risk of accident from unsuita‐
ble accessories on the tire valves
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Tire pressure monitoring systems for
retrofitting will cause the tire valve to remain
open. This can also result in tire pressure
loss.
# Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto
the tire valve.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
% The data shown in the images is example
data.

370 Wheels and tires
R

Maximum tire pressure (→ page 381)

Checking tire pressures manually
#

The tire pressure table shows the recommended
tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehi‐
cle. The recommended tire pressures apply for
cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e.
loading and/or speed of the vehicle.
If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure,
the tire pressure information following is only
valid for those tire sizes.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different num‐
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may differ from this.

#
#
#

Some tire pressure tables only show the rim
diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and
can be found on the tire side wall (→ page 381).
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 368)
R Tire and Loading Information placard
(→ page 373)

Read the tire pressure for the current operat‐
ing conditions from the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure
table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.
Remove the valve cap of the tire to be
checked.
Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
Read the tire pressure.
If the tire pressure is lower than the recom‐
mended value, increase the tire pressure to
the recommended value.
If the tire pressure is higher than the recom‐
mended value, release air. To do so, press
down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using
the tip of a pen for example. Then check the
tire pressure again using the tire pressure
gauge.
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.

Wheels and tires 371
Further related subjects:
Notes on tire pressure (→ page 368)
R Tire pressure table (→ page 369)
R Tire and Loading Information placard
(→ page 373)

Tire pressure monitoring system
Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem
& DANGER Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect tire pressure
Every tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked when cold at least once a
month and inflated to the pressure recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer (see
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
B-pillar on the driver’s side or the tire pres‐
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap
of your vehicle). If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the

tire pressure table, you need to determine
the proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor‐
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure indicator lamp when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, if the low tire pressure indicator
lamp lights up, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also increases fuel consump‐
tion and reduces tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and braking abil‐
ity. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi‐
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure indicator lamp.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure indicator lamp. When
the system detects a malfunction, the indica‐
tor lamp will flash for approximately a minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illumina‐
ted, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea‐
sons, including the installation of incompati‐
ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction warning
lamp after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop‐
erly.

372 Wheels and tires
The system checks the tire pressure and the tire
temperature of the tires fitted to the vehicle by
means of a tire pressure sensor.
New tire pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tires,
are automatically taught-in the first time they are
driven.
The tire pressure and the tire temperature
appear in the multifunction display
(→ page 219).
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the
tire temperature is excessive, a warning will be
given:
R Via display messages (→ page 438).
R Via the h warning lamp in the instrument
cluster (→ page 469).
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure
suitable for the operating situation. Set the tire
pressure for cold tires using a tire pressure
gauge. Note that the correct tire pressure for the
current operating situation must first be taughtin to the tire pressure monitoring system.

In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem will automatically update the new reference
values after you have changed the tire pressure.
You can, however, also update the reference val‐
ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring
system manually (→ page 373).

On-board computer:
,

One of the following displays appears:
R Current tire pressure and tire temperature of
the individual wheels:

System limitations
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R If the tire pressure is set incorrectly.
R If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
example, by a foreign object penetrating the
tire.
R If there is a malfunction caused by another
radio signal source.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 368)

R
R

: the teach-in
process of the system is not yet complete.
The tire pressures are already being moni‐
tored.

Compare the tire pressure with the recom‐
mended tire pressure for the current operat‐

Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres‐
sure monitoring system
Requirement:
R The ignition is switched on.

Wheels and tires 373
ing status (→ page 369). Observe the notes
on tire temperature (→ page 368).
% The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐
play may deviate from those of the tire pres‐
sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated
by pressure gauges are higher than those
shown by the on-board computer. In this
case, do not reduce the tire pressure.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 368)
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem
Requirement:
The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating condition on
each of the four wheels (→ page 368).

Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in
the following situations:
R The tire pressure has changed.

The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.

On-board computer:
,

Swipe downwards on the Touch Control on
the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
The
message is shown in the multi‐
function display.
# Press a to confirm the restart.
The
message is
shown in the multifunction display.
Current warning messages are deleted and
the h yellow warning lamp goes out.
After you have driven for a few minutes, the
system checks whether the current tire pres‐
sures are within the specified range. The cur‐
rent tire pressures are then accepted as ref‐
erence values and monitored.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 368)

Radio-equipment approval of the tire pres‐
sure monitoring system
Radio equipment approval numbers
Country

Radio equipment approval
number

Canada
USA

FCC ID: MRXAG5SP4
FCC ID: MRXMFR
IC: 2546A-AG5SP4

Further information on the declaration of con‐
formity for wireless vehicle components
(→ page 23).
Loading the vehicle
Tire and Loading Information placard
& WARNING Risk of accident from overloa‐
ded tires
Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a
consequence. Overloaded tires can also
impair the steering and handling characteris‐
tics and lead to brake failure.

374 Wheels and tires
#
#
#

Observe the load rating of the tires.
The load rating must be at least half the
permissible axle load of the vehicle.
Never overload the tires by exceeding
the maximum load.

Please also note:
R Information on permissible weights and loads
on the vehicle identification plate
(→ page 398).
R Information on tire pressure on the tire pres‐
sure table (→ page 369).

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

1 Tire and Loading Information placard

Recommended tire pressures 1 for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are
valid for the maximum permissible load and
up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.

% The data shown in the image is example
data.
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows:
R Maximum number of seats 2 according to
the maximum number of people permitted to
travel in the vehicle.
R Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the
gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage.

Further related subjects:
R Determining the maximum permissible load
(→ page 374)
R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 368)
Determining the maximum permissible load
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur‐
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".

Wheels and tires 375
#

Step 1: locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." ("The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.") on your vehicle's
Tire and Loading Information placard.
Step 2: determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be travel‐
ing in your vehicle.
Step 3: subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
Step 4: the resulting figure equals the per‐
missible cargo and luggage load capacity. For
example: If "XXX" equals 1400 lbs and there
are five occupants in your vehicle with a
weight of 150 lbs each, the maximum cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Step 5: determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo that the vehicle will be
carrying. For safety reasons, this weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and lug‐
gage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Even if you have calculated the total load care‐
fully, you should still make sure that the maxi‐
mum permissible gross mass and the maximum
permissible axle load of your vehicle are not
exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle
identification plate.
# Have your loaded vehicle – including driver,
occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle
weighbridge.
The measured values may not exceed the
maximum permissible values stated on the
vehicle identification plate.
Further related subjects:
R Calculation example for determining the max‐
imum load (→ page 375)
R Tire and Loading Information placard
(→ page 373)
R Tire pressure table (→ page 369)
R Vehicle identification plate

Calculation example for determining the
maximum load
The following table shows examples of how to
calculate total and load capacities with varying
seating configurations and different numbers
and sizes of occupants. The following examples
use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your vehi‐
cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (→ page 373).
The higher the weight of all the occupants, the
smaller the maximum load for luggage.

376 Wheels and tires
Step 1
Example 1

Example 2

1500 lbs (680 kg)

Example 1

Example 2

Number of people in the vehicle (driver and
occupants)

Distribution of the occupants

Front: 2
Rear: 3

Front: 1

Weight of occupants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)

Total weight of all occupants

750 lbs (340 kg)

200 lbs (91 kg)

Combined maximum weight of occupants and
load (data from the Tire and Loading Information
placard)
Step 2

Wheels and tires 377
Step 3

Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight
rating from the Tire and Loading Information
placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

Example 1

Example 2

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs
(589 kg)

378 Wheels and tires
Tire labeling
Overview of tire labeling

5 Manufacturer
6 Characteristics of the tire (→ page 381)
7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (→ page 381)

8 Tire name

% The data shown in the image is example
data.
Tire Quality Grading
In accordance with the US Department of Trans‐
portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand‐
ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade
their tires on the basis of the following three per‐
formance factors:

1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard

(→ page 378)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number
(→ page 379)
3 Maximum tire load (→ page 380)
4 Maximum tire pressure (→ page 381)

1 Tread wear grade
2 Traction grade
3 Temperature grade

% The data shown in the image is example
data.
% The classification is not legally stipulated for
Canada, but it is generally stated.
Tread wear grade
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified test
track of the US Department of Transportation.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one

Wheels and tires 379
and one-half times as well on the government
test track as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate
conditions.
Traction grade
& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade‐
quate traction
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include either accelera‐
tion, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
# Always adapt your driving style and
drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
traffic and weather conditions.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from
wheelspin
#

Avoid wheelspin.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas‐
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces made of asphalt and
concrete.
Temperature grade
& WARNING Risk of accident from tire
overheating and tire failure
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
# Observe the recommended tire pres‐
sures and regularly check the tire pres‐

sure of all tires including the spare
wheel.
Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of per‐
formance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the requirements of the US Depart‐
ment of Transportation.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man‐
ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or
on the side wall of each tire produced.

380 Wheels and tires
R
R

% The data shown in the image is example
data.
The TIN is a unique identification number to
identify tires and comprises the following:
R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire
complies with the requirements of the US
Department of Transportation.
R Manufacturer identification code: manu‐
facturer identification code 2 contains
details of the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols. Further
information on retreaded tires (→ page 386).

Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire
size.
Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be
used by the manufacturer as a code to
describe specific characteristics of the tire.
Manufacturing date: manufacturing date
5 provides information about the age of a
tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the
calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions
state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208"
represents the 32nd week of 2008).

% The data shown in the image is example
data.
Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi‐
ble weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci‐
fied load limit. The maximum permissible load
can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv‐
er's side (→ page 373).
Specifications for maximum tire pressure

Information on the maximum tire load

% The data shown in the image is example
data.

Wheels and tires 381
Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci‐
fied for the tire.
Information on tire characteristics

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing the specified tire load rating or the
permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or
the permissible speed rating may lead to tire
damage and to the tires bursting.
# Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
# Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.

% The data shown in the image is example
data.
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in side wall 1 and
under tire tread 2.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Preceding letter
Nominal tire width in millimeters
Aspect ratio in %
Tire code
Rim diameter
Load-bearing index
Speed rating
Load index

% The data shown in the image is example
data.
Information about reading tire data can be
obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

382 Wheels and tires
Preceding letter 1:
Without: passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards.
R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US
manufacturing standards.
R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu‐
facturing standards.
R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with
high tire pressure that are only designed for
temporary use in an emergency.
R

Aspect ratio 3:
Ratio between tire height and tire width in per‐
cent (tire height divided by tire width).
Tire code 4 (tire type):
R "R" radial tire
R "D": bias ply tire
R "B": bias belted tires
R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above
149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)

Rim diameter 5:
The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter
of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified
in inches (in).
Load-bearing index 6:
Numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre‐
sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)).
The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at
least half the permissible axle load of your vehi‐
cle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit.
See also:
R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and
Loading Information placard (→ page 373)
R Maximum tire load (→ page 380)
R Load index
Speed rating 7:
Specifies the approved maximum speed of the
tire.

% An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating. You can obtain information on the
required speed rating from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Summer tires
Index

Speed rating

up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

Wheels and tires 383
Index

Speed rating

ZR...Y1

up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y)1

over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR1

over 149 mph (240 km/h)

1
2

Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index
in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to
186 mph (300 km/h).
If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there
is no speed rating 7, find out what the max‐
imum speed is from the tire manufacturer.
If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7
are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of
your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To
find out the maximum speed, ask the tire
manufacturer.

"ZR" stated in the tire code.
Or "M+S i" for winter tires

All-weather tires and winter tires
Index

Speed rating

M+S2

up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S2

up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S2

up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S2

up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol
and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu‐
facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire
traction on snow.
Load index 8:
No specification given: standard load (SL)
tire
R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein‐
forced tire
R "Light Load": light load tire

"C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on
the maximum load that the tire can carry at a
certain pressure

Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire structure and characteristics: describes
the number of layers or the number of rubbercoated belts in the tire contact surface and the
tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly‐
ester and other materials.
Bar: metric unit for tire pressure.
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation): DOTmarked tires fulfill the requirements of the
US Department of Transportation.
Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the
number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi‐
cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).

384 Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a
uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regard to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grading
assessment is made by the manufacturer follow‐
ing specifications from the U.S. government. The
quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side
wall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressure: the recommen‐
ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified
for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac‐
tory.
The tire and information table contains the rec‐
ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max‐
imum permissible load and the maximum per‐
missible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommen‐
ded tire pressures for cold tires under various
operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed
of the vehicle.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment: the combined weight of all standard
and optional equipment available for the vehicle,

regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is
installed.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR
is the maximum permissible axle load. The
actual load on an axle must never exceed the
gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight
rating can be found on the vehicle identification
plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side.
Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire
identification. It specifies the speed range for
which a tire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle
weight comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso‐
ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer
drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's
side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the
GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight

of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle
including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐
gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐
cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci‐
fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
B‑pillar on the driver's side.
Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the
maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight
of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the
maximum load and the weight of optional equip‐
ment installed at the factory.
Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure.
6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for
tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals
1 bar.
Load index: in addition to the load-bearing
index, the load index may also be imprinted on
the side wall of the tire. This specifies the loadbearing capacity of the tire more precisely.
Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand‐
ard equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air
conditioning system and optional equipment if

Wheels and tires 385
these are installed on the vehicle, but does not
include passengers or luggage.
Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is
the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or
lbs for which a tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi‐
mum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on
one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi‐
mum axle load of one axle by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of
measurement for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire
width in percent.
Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying
an outward force to every square inch of the tire.
The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours

without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle
has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to
ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel
rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead
to prevent the tire from changing length on the
wheel rim.
Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread
and the tire bead.
Weight of optional equipment: the combined
weight of the optional equipment weighing more
than the replaced standard parts and more than
5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as
high-performance brakes, level control system, a
roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries,
is not included in the curb weight and the weight
of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique
identification number which can be used by a
tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example,
in a product recall, and thus identify the pur‐
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur‐

er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
the manufacturing date.
Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a
code that contains the maximum load-bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric‐
tion between the tires and the road surface.
Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars)
that are distributed over the tire contact surface.
If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear
limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution
of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐
tions in a vehicle.
Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐
nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg)
multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.

386 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
Notes on selecting, installing and replacing
tires
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect dimensions of wheels and tires
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are
installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen‐
sion components may be damaged.
# Always replace wheels and tires with
those that fulfill the specifications of
the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the
correct:
R Designation

Model

When replacing tires, make sure to install the
correct:
R Designation
R Manufacturer
R Model
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing the specified tire load rating or the
permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or
the permissible speed rating may lead to tire
damage and to the tires bursting.
# Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
# Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to vehicle and tires due to
non-approved tire types and sizes
For safety reasons, only use wheels, tires
and accessories which have been approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, e.g. ABS or
ESP®, and are marked as follows:
R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(run-flat tires only for certain wheels)
R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐
tain AMG tires)
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
otherwise be adversely affected. In addition,
when driving with a load, tire dimension var‐
iations could cause the tires to come into
contact with the body and axle components.
This could result in damage to the tires or the
vehicle.

Wheels and tires 387
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐
ded tires
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom‐
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires.
For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐
anteed.
# Do not use used tires if you have no
information about their previous usage.
* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires
when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a lower tire section width.
The lower the tire section width, the greater
is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when
driving over obstacles.
# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly
carefully.

* NOTE Damage to electronic component
parts from the use of tire-mounting tools
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: Electronic component parts are
located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools
should not be used in the area of the valve.
This could otherwise damage the electronic
component parts.
# Have the tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop only.
* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low
ambient temperatures
Using summer tires at very low ambient tem‐
peratures can cause cracks to form, thereby
damaging the tires permanently.
# At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use
M+S tires.
Accessory parts that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used
correctly can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop
and enquire about:
R Suitability
R Legal stipulations
R Factory recommendations
& WARNING Risk of accident with high
performance tires
The special tire tread in combination with the
optimized tire compound means that the risk
of skidding or hydroplaning on wet roads is
increased.
In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at
a low outside temperature and tire running
temperature.
# Switch on the ESP® and adapt your
driving style accordingly.
# Use M+S tire at outside temperatures
of less than 10 °C (50 °F).

388 Wheels and tires
Observe the following when selecting, installing
and replacing tires:
R Only use tires and wheels of the same type
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires) and the same make.
R Only install wheels of the same size on one
axle (left and right).
It is only permissible to install a different
wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order
to drive to the specialist workshop.
R Only install tires of the correct size onto the
wheels.
R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: all mounted wheels must be equip‐
ped with functioning sensors for the tire
pressure monitoring system.
R At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C), use win‐
ter tires or all-season tires marked M+S for
all wheels.
Winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym‐
bol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road condi‐
tions.

R
R

R
R
R

For M+S tires, only use tires with the same
tread.
Observe the maximum permissible speed for
the M+S tires installed.
If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed,
this must be indicated in an appropriate label
in the driver's field of vision.
Run in new tires at moderate speeds for the
first 60 miles (100 km).
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
When replacing with tires that do not fea‐
ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with
MOExtended tires are not equipped with a
TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle
with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires
that do not feature run-flat characteristics,
e.g. winter tires.

For more information on wheels and tires, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 368)

R
R
R

Tire and Loading Information placard
(→ page 373)
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (→ page 381)
Tire pressure table (→ page 369)

Notes on rotating wheels
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐
ent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tires have different dimensions
may severely impair the driving characteris‐
tics.
The wheel brakes or wheel suspension com‐
ponents may also be damaged.
# Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tires are of the same dimen‐
sions.

Wheels and tires 389
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels
differ:
R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of
the tire
R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the
tire
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If this is not
available, rotate the tires every
3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km),
depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction
of rotation is maintained.
It is imperative to observe the instructions and
safety notes on "Wheel change" when doing so.
Notes on storing wheels
R
R

After removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place.
Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.

Overview of the tire-change tool kit
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐
cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit.
For more information on which tire-changing
tools are required and approved for performing a
wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
Required tire-change tool kits may include, for
example:
R Jack
R Chock
R Wheel wrench
R Centering pin
The tire-change tool kit is in tool bag 1 under
the cargo compartment floor.

1 Tool bag

Tool bag 1 contains:
R Jack
R Gloves
R Wheel wrench
R Centering pin
R Folding wheel chock
R Ratchet for jack

390 Wheels and tires
Setting up the folding wheel chock

R
R
#
#
#
#
#
#
#

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements
R The required tire-change tool kit is available.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tirechange tool kit, consult a qualified specialist
workshop to find out about suitable tools.

#
#

The vehicle is not on a slope.
The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift into position j.
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: set the
normal vehicle level (→ page 190).
Switch off the engine.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started.
Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
Remove the hub caps if necessary
(→ page 390).
Raising the vehicle (→ page 391).

Removing and installing hub caps
Requirement:
R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(→ page 390).
Plastic hub cap
# To remove: turn the center cover of the hub
cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.
# To install: make sure that the center cover of
the hub cap is turned anti-clockwise.
# Position the hub cap and turn the center
cover clockwise until the hub cap engages
physically and audibly.

Wheels and tires 391
Aluminum hub cap

Attach wheel spanner 3 to socket 2 and
tighten the hub cap clockwise.
Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft
(25 Nm).
Raise the vehicle (→ page 391).

the jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large,
load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
the foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐
cally under the jack support point.

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

To remove: position socket 2 on hub cap
1.

% The socket can be found in the tire-change
tool kit.
# Position wheel spanner 3 on socket 2.
# Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1
counter-clockwise and remove it.
# To install: position hub cap 1 and turn until
it is completely flush with the wheel.
# Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.

Requirements:
R There are no persons in the vehicle.
R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (→ page 390).
R The hub caps have been removed
(→ page 390).
Important notes on using the jack:
R only use the vehicle-specific jack that has
been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz
to raise the vehicle.
R the jack is only designed for raising and hold‐
ing the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed and not for maintenance
work under the vehicle.

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
Never place your hands or feet under the
vehicle.
R Do not lie under the vehicle.
R Do not start the engine and do not release
the electric parking brake.
R Do not open or close any doors or the tail‐
gate.
R

392 Wheels and tires
* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jack support point of the
vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐
cle raised.
# The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐
port points.
#

Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel
bolts on the wheel you wish to change by
about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.

Position of jack support points

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
# Only position the jack at the appropri‐
ate jacking point of the vehicle. The
base of the jack must be positioned ver‐
tically under the jacking point of the
vehicle.

Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the tirechange tool kit and place it on the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the lettering "AUF" is
visible.

Wheels and tires 393
Removing a wheel
Requirement:
R The vehicle is raised (→ page 391).
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force
to the brake discs, since this could impair the
level of comfort when braking.
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on
wheel bolts
#

#
#
#

Position jack 2 at jack support point 1.
Turn ratchet ring spanner 3 clockwise until
jack 2 sits completely on jack support point
1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on
the ground.
Continue to turn ratchet ring spanner 3
until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in
(3 cm) off the ground.
Loosen and remove the wheel (→ page 393).

Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on
a dirty surface.

Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐
pletely.

#
#
#
#

Screw centering pin 1 instead of the wheel
bolt into the threading.
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
Remove the wheel.
Install the new wheel (→ page 393).

Installing a new wheel
Requirement:
R The wheel is removed (→ page 393).

394 Wheels and tires
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a
wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel
nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting
bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/
wheel nuts to come loose.
As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐
ing.
# Never oil or grease the threads.
# In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐
aged hub threads replaced.
# Do not continue driving.
#

Observe the information on the choice of
tires (→ page 386).

For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an
arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the
correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc‐
tion of rotation when installing.

Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen‐
tering pin and push it on.

& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
#

For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts
which have been approved by MercedesBenz and for the wheel in question.

* NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel
rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt
If the wheel has too much play when screw‐
ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint
can be damaged.
# Press the wheel firmly against the
wheel hub when screwing on the first
wheel bolt.

#
#
#
#

Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight.
Unscrew the centering pin.
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight.
Lower the vehicle (→ page 394).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
Requirements:
R The new wheel has been installed
(→ page 393).
#

Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hexa‐
gon nut of the jack so that the lettering "AB"
is visible.
To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet ring
spanner of the jack anti-clockwise.

Wheels and tires 395
Check the tire pressure of the newly moun‐
ted wheel and adjust accordingly.
# Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring
system (→ page 373).
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 368)
#

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated (1 to 5).
Specified tightening torque: 111 lb-ft
(150 Nm).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque.
# Have the tightening torque checked
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop after changing a wheel.

396 Technical data
Notes on technical data
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may not recognize dangers.
The data stated only applies to vehicles with
standard equipment. You can obtain further
information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Vehicle electronics
Two-way radios
Notes on installing two-way radios
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
improper work on two-way radios
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way
radios can interfere with the on-board elec‐
tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated or
retrofitted incorrectly.
This could jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle.

You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐
rect operation of two-way radios
If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in
the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation
could interfere with the on-board electronics,
e.g.:
R if the two-way radio is not connected to
an exterior antenna
R if the exterior antenna is not correctly
mounted or is not of low reflection
This could jeopardies the operating safety of
the vehicle.
# Have the low-reflection exterior
antenna installed at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
# When operating two-way radios in the
vehicle, always connect them to the
low-reflection exterior antenna.

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐
mit due to failure to comply with the
instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of
two-way radios are not observed.
# Only use approved frequency bands.
# Observe the maximum permissible out‐
put power in these frequency bands.
# Only use approved antenna positions.

Technical data 397
On the rear wings, it is recommended that you
install the antenna on the side of the vehicle
closest to the center of the road.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road
Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment") when
installing two-way radios. Comply with the legal
requirements for detachable parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply or antenna
connectors intended for use with the basic wir‐
ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup‐
plements when installing.

1 Front roof area
2 Rear roof area
3 Rear wing

On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof,
installing an antenna to the front or rear roof
area is not permitted.

Two-way radio transmission output
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the antenna must not exceed the values
in the following table:

frequency band and maximum transmission
output
Frequency band

Maximum transmis‐
sion output

Short wave
3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m frequency band
74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m frequency band
144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio sys‐
tem/Tetra
380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm frequency
band
420 - 450 MHz

35 W

Two-way radio
(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

398 Technical data
The following can be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
R two-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW
R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the
antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol‐
lowing frequency bands:
R Trunked radio system/Tetra
R 70 cm frequency band
R 2G/3G/4G

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine
number
Vehicle identification plate

1
2
3
4
5

Vehicle identification plate (USA only)
Permissible gross mass
Permissible front axle load
Permissible rear axle load
Paint code
VIN (vehicle identification number)

Technical data 399
Never exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight
or the maximum permissible axle load for the
front or rear axle.

Additional plates

VIN in front of the right-hand front seat

1
2
3
4
5

Vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
Permissible gross mass
Permissible front axle load
Permissible rear axle load
Paint code
VIN (vehicle identification number)

The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum
permissible axle load is the maximum weight
that can be carried on one axle (front or rear
axle).

1 Plate with information about emissions test‐

1 VIN (vehicle identification number)
2 Floor covering

ing, including confirmation of emissions
guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as
for California
2 Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)
3 VIN (vehicle identification number)

400 Technical data
Operating fluids
Notes on operating fluids
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may not recognize dangers.
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating
fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐
ful to your health.
# Observe the text on the original con‐
tainers when using, storing or disposing
of operating fluids.
# Always store operating fluids sealed in
their original containers.
# Always keep children away from operat‐
ing fluids.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental

pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal

Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐
ronmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following:
R Fuels
R Lubricants
R Coolant
R Brake fluid
R Windshield washer fluid
R Climate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Damage caused by the use of products on the
vehicle that have not been approved is not cov‐
ered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill
gestures.
You can identify operating fluids approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on
the containers:
R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)

MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating flu‐
ids:
R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com (by entering the designation)
R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo
app (by entering the designation)
R at a qualified specialist workshop
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion
caused by fuel
Fuels are highly inflammable.
# You must avoid fire, open flames, creat‐
ing sparks and smoking.
# Before refueling, switch off the engine
and, if installed in your vehicle, the sta‐
tionary heater.

Technical data 401
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuel
Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your
health
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
# Do not inhale fuel vapors.
# Keep children away from fuel.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
# If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical
attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing.
# Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.

Fuel
Information on fuel grades for vehicles with
a gasoline engine
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 400).
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
# Only refuel with low-sulfur premium
grade fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10 % ethanol.
Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.
Do not refuel using:
R Diesel
R E15, E85, E100
R Gasoline containing methanol (M15, M30,
M85, M100)
R Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

#
#

Do not switch the ignition on.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐
fur, this can produce unpleasant odors.
Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane
number specified in the instruction label in the
fuel filler flap (→ page 157).
If you want maximum engine output: only
refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline
with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also refuel with
unleaded regular gasoline with at least 87 AKI/
91 RON. This may reduce engine output and
increase fuel consumption.
Never refuel using gasoline with a lower RON.
* NOTE Premature wear caused by unlea‐
ded regular gasoline
Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the
engine to wear more quickly and impair lon‐
gevity and performance.

402 Technical data
If unleaded premium grade gasoline is
unavailable and you have to refuel using
unleaded regular gasoline:
# Only fill the fuel tank to half full with
unleaded regular gasoline and refill as
soon as possible with unleaded pre‐
mium grade gasoline.
# Do not drive at the maximum speed.
# Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
Further information on fuel can be found:
R at a gas station
R at a qualified specialist workshop
R USA only: at http://www.mbusa.com
Information on additives in gasoline
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 400).

* NOTE Damage caused by non-approved
additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive
may lead to malfunctions occurring.
# Only add cleaning additives recommen‐
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
brand-name fuels with additives.
The fuel grade available in some countries may
not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the
fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in
consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning
additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Be
sure to observe the notes and mixing ratios
specified on the container.

Tank capacity and fuel reserve
Capacity
Model

Total capacity

All models

21.1 US gal (80.0 l)

Model

Of which reserve

All models

3.2 gal (12.0 l)

Engine oil
Notes on engine oil
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 400).

Technical data 403
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#

#
#

Do not use engine oils or oil filters other
than those which meet the specifica‐
tions necessary for the prescribed
service intervals.
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
Do not use additives.
Have the engine oil changed after the
prescribed intervals.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
oil change carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Further information on engine oils and oil filters:
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com (by entering the designation)
R At a qualified specialist workshop

Quality and filling capacity of engine oil
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Gasoline engines
All models

MB-Freigabe or MBApproval
229.5, 229.6

The following values refer to an oil change,
including the oil filter.
Replacement amount
Model
All models

Replacement
amount
6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

Notes on brake fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 400).

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to
vapor pockets forming in the brake sys‐
tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low,
vapor pockets may form in the brake system
when the brakes are applied hard.
This causes the braking effect to be
impaired.
# Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
Have the brake fluid regularly changed at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
Further information on brake fluid:
R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com
R at a qualified specialist workshop

404 Technical data
Coolant
Notes on coolant
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 400).
& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment, it may ignite.
# Allow the engine to cool down before
adding antifreeze.
# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the filler opening.
# Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze
from component parts before starting
the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐
ant
Only add coolant that has been pre‐
mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐
tection.
Further information on coolant:
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids 310.1, e.g. online at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
R At a qualified specialist workshop.
#

* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐
peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the
engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐
tected against overheating and corrosion at
high outside temperatures.
# Always use coolant approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
# Observe the instructions in the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐
ating Fluids 310.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
concentrate in the engine cooling system should
be:
R a minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C)).
R a maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 °F (-45 °C)).
Coolant capacity
Capacity
Model
All models

Capacity
12.7 US qt (12.0 l)

Notes on windshield washer fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 400).

Technical data 405
& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or
the exhaust system.
# Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler
opening.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting
due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam‐
age the plastic surface of the exterior light‐
ing.
# Only use windshield washer fluid which
is also suitable for use on plastic surfa‐
ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐
Fit.

* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
mixing windshield washer fluids

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger‐
ant

Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐
terFit with other windshield washer flu‐
ids.

If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli‐
mate control system may be damaged.
# Only use the refrigerant R‑134a

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water as the fill
level sensor may be triggered erroneously.
Recommended windshield washer fluid:
R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the informa‐
tion on the antifreeze container.
Mix the washer fluid with the windshield washer
fluid all year round.
Refrigerant
Notes on refrigerants
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 400).

* NOTE Damage to the climate control
system due to incorrect refrigerant com‐
pressor oil
#
#

Only use refrigerant compressor oil that
has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not mix the approved refrigerant
compressor oil with a different refriger‐
ant compressor oil.

Work on the climate control system may only be
carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard
J639, must be adhered to.

406 Technical data
Refrigerant filling capacity
Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil
Model

Refrigerant

All models

22.2 ± 0.4 oz
(630 ± 10 g)

Model
All models
1
2
3
4
5

Warning symbols
Refrigerant filling capacity
Applicable standards
PAG oil part number
Refrigerant type

Warning symbols 1 advise you about:
R possible dangers
R having service work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop

PAG oil
2.8 ± 0.4 oz
(80 ± 10 g)

Height when opened
Model

Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions
The heights specified may vary as a result of the:
R Tires
R Load
R Condition of the suspension
R Optional equipment

All models

1
Height
when
opened

2 Head‐
room

81.2 in
76.2 in
(2062 mm) (1936 mm)

Technical data 407
Vehicle dimensions

Roof load

All models

Vehicle length

194.2 in
(4933 mm)

Vehicle width including out‐
side mirrors

81.3 in
(2065 mm)

Vehicle height

57.8 in
(1467 mm)

Wheelbase

115.7 in
(2939 mm)

Turning circle

39.0 ft
(11.90 m)

Weights and loads
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
R items of optional equipment increase the
unladen weight and reduce the payload.

Maximum roof load

220 lb (100 kg)

408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Introduction
Notes on display messages
Display messages appear on the multifunction
display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐
plified in the Operator's Manual and may differ
from the symbols on the multifunction display.
The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐
play messages in red. Certain display messages
are accompanied by a warning tone.
Please respond in accordance with the display
messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
For some display messages, a symbol is also
shown:
R ¤ Further information

O Hide display message

You can select the desired symbol by swiping
left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press the ¤ symbol to show further informa‐
tion on the multifunction display. Press the O
symbol to hide the display message.
You can hide low-priority display messages by
pressing the ¤ button or the left-hand Touch
Control. The display messages are then stored in
the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as
quickly as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐
den. The multifunction display shows these dis‐
play messages continuously until the cause of
the display message has been rectified.

Calling up stored display messages
On-board computer:
,

If there are no display messages,
appears on the multifunction display.
# Scroll through the display messages by swip‐
ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
# To exit the message memory: press the
¤ button.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409
Safety systems
Display messages

!
÷

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
#

Drive on carefully.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

!
÷

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be temporarily unavailable.
The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
#

Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
#

Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
#

Drive on carefully.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413
Display messages

T
!
÷

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
If EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
#

Drive on carefully.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

F
(USA only)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.
# Switch on the ignition.

!
(Canada only)

F
(USA only)

!
(Canada only)

* The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled.
R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake.
#
#

Check that the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake are fulfilled.
Release the electric parking brake manually.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415
Display messages

F
(USA only)

!
(Canada only)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
# Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away.
The yellow ! and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamps are lit. The electric parking
brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
# Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
# Release the electric parking brake automatically.
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
#

416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
To apply:
Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually.

To release:
Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away.
The yellow ! indicator lamp is on and the red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator
lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
If the battery charge level is too low:
# Charge the battery.
To apply:
Switch the ignition off.
The electric parking brake is applied automatically.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If the electric parking brake should not be applied, e.g. when washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash or when
having the vehicle towed, leave the ignition switched on. Do not do this when having the vehicle towed with the
rear axle raised.
If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:
# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually.
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away.
#

To release:
If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually.

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

$
(USA only)

J
(Canada only)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not add brake fluid.
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not top up the brake fluid.
* The brake pads have reached the wear limit.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
#

#
G

* USA only: at least one of the mbrace system's main features is malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are:
R soiling of the sensors
R heavy rain
R extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Clean all sensors.
# Restart the engine.

420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are:
R Soiling of the sensors
R Heavy rain
R Extended country driving without moving traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Clean all sensors.
# Restart the engine.
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limitations.
# Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limitations, the system will become available again.
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions
and restart the engine.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is malfunctioning.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The restraint system is defective .
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or
might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or
airbag, for example.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Detection of a restraint system malfunction:
the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system

(Example)

If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or
might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or
airbag, for example.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Detection of a restraint system malfunction:
the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

6
(Example)

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* The corresponding window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.
#

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to malfunctions in the window airbag
If the window airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in
the event of an accident with high deceleration.
# Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The front passenger air bag and the knee air bag are deactivated, even though an adult or a person with a build
corresponding to that of an adult is seated on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat,
the weight the system detects may be too low.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
dent and cannot perform its intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior,
especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
# Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
#
#
#

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Check the status of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff .
If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The front passenger air bag and knee air bags are enabled during the journey:
R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the
front passenger seat
R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a child restraint system while the front passenger air bag
is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger air bag is
enabled, the front passenger air bag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the air bag.
# Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIR BAG; DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
#
#
#

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Check the status of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff.
If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

426 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving systems
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(→ page 206).
# If necessary, take a break.

* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 427
Display messages

Á
Á

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL/DYNAMIC BODY
CONTROL is malfunctioning:
# Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* NOTE The tires of the front axle or the front fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
#
#

Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic con‐
ditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.

Set a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle is raised.

428 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The AIR BODY CONTROL function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
# Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h).
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limitations (→ page 212).
Vehicles with Active Steering Assist: The camera view may be limited by the windshield.
# Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limitations, the system will become available again.
If the display message does not disappear on vehicles with Active Steering Assist:
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Clean the windshield.
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
#

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 429
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Vehicles without Active Steering Assist: the camera view is restricted.
Possible causes are:
R dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision
R heavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Clean the windshield.
* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limitations have been reached (→ page 210).
# Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions
and restart the engine.
# If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is extremely dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal‐
functioning.

430 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limitations have been reached (→ page 210).
# Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions
and restart the engine.
* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.
# Press the left-hand side Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 431
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and restart the engine.
# If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes are:
R dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision
R heavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will become availa‐
ble again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Clean the windshield.
* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

432 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is skidding or a condition for activation is not met.
# Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (→ page 179).

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limitations (→ page 177).
# Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limitations, the system will become available again.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limitations (→ page 182).
# Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limitations, the system will become available again.
# If necessary, clean the windshield in the camera's field of vision.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control.
* Cruise control has been deactivated.
If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been switched off automatically (→ page 175).
* Cruise control is malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The coolant level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
#

Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

Add coolant.
* The coolant is too hot.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could
come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
#
#
#

Wait until the engine has cooled down.
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red area.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The battery is not being charged.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#
#

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low.
# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
# Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for a longer distance.
The battery charges.
#

Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#
#

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Switch off the engine.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The battery charge level is too low.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Leave the engine running.
# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
#

Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
#
#

8
8
?

Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

Check the engine oil level when next refueling.

Top up the engine oil (→ page 336).
Notes on engine oil (→ page 402).
* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.
* There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is
leaking.
# Close the fuel filler cap.
# If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The fan motor is defective.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Tires
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too
great.
# Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary.
# When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitoring system.
* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tire pressure.
# Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
#
#

Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Check the tire pressure and the tires.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire
Flat tires are dangerous in the following ways:
R The tires can overheat and cause a fire.
R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
Do not drive with a flat tire.
# Observe the notes on flat tires.
#

Notes on flat tires (→ page 346).
Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Check the tires.
* No signals can be received from the tire pressure sensors due to strong radio signal source interference. The tire
pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on.
The tire pressure monitoring system restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
#

440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more tires. The pressure of the affected tire is not dis‐
played.
# Have the defective tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
# Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
* The tire pressure monitoring system is defective.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss
in one or more of the tires.
Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics.
# Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tires are displayed in yellow.
# Drive more slowly.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* At least one tire is overheating.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires
Overheated tires may burst, particularly at high speeds.
# Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
#

Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

SmartKey
Display messages

Â
Â

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* The SmartKey battery is discharged.
# Replace the battery.

442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Â
display message)

Â
play message)

(white

(red dis‐

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The SmartKey is currently undetected.
# Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
# If the SmartKey is still not recognized, start the engine with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment.
* The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.
The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:
R you can no longer start the engine.
R you cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
#

If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Place the SmartKey in the stowage compartment for starting the engine with the SmartKey.
* A warning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
#

Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The SmartKey detection function is malfunctioning.
# Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
# Start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment.

Vehicle
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j and into another transmission position.
# Depress the brake pedal.
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into another transmission position.
# Depress the brake pedal.
# Start the engine.
* The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position k, i or h.
# Shift the transmission to position j when you park the vehicle.

444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, the transmission has been shifted to position i.
# Depress the brake pedal to stop and, when the vehicle is stationary, shift the transmission to position j.
# To continue your journey, shift the transmission to position h or k.
* The transmission can be shifted to position j only when the vehicle is stationary.

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be shifted.
# When the transmission is in position h, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not shift the transmis‐
sion position.
# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.
# When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition and take the SmartKey with you.
# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V
battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only using a donor battery (starting assis‐
tance).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to position i automatically.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Switch the transmission to position j.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. Reverse gear can no longer be engaged.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Leave the engine running.
# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
# Until then, always manually set the transmission to position j before you switch off the engine.
# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
* Operation of the climate control system is temporarily restricted. Airflow and fresh air supply are set to automatic
mode.
# Have the climate control system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position h and into transmission position k.
# Depress the brake pedal.
# Switch the transmission to position k.
* The power assistance for the steering is malfunctioning. You may need to use more force to steer.
# Drive on carefully.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* The climate control system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of injury and accident due to an insufficient supply of fresh air
If the climate control system is malfunctioning, carbon dioxide levels may increase in the vehicle interior.
Breathing in carbon dioxide may cause dizziness.
# Open the window to ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air.
#
#

Open the window to ensure that there is an adequate supply of fresh air.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is considerably impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The power assistance for the steering is malfunctioning.
#

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
#
#

If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The active hood (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* The hood is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
# Never unlatch the engine hood while driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the engine hood is latched.
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Close the hood.
* At least one door is open.
# Close all doors.
#

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449
Display messages

A
_

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The tailgate is open.
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.
# Never drive with the tailgate open.
# Close the tailgate.
* The corresponding seat backrest of the rear bench seat is not engaged.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages.

(Example)

* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
# Top up the washer fluid.

450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Lights
Display messages

b
(Example)

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The corresponding light source is defective.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
% LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp appears only when all the light-emitting diodes
in the lamp have failed.

* The active headlamps are defective.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

* The exterior lighting is defective.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The light sensor is defective.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
# Turn the light switch to the Ã position.

* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
# Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limitations have been reached (→ page 127).
# Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The
display message appears.

452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes are:
R dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision
R heavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will become availa‐
ble again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Clean the windshield.

Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of warning and indicator lamps
Some systems perform a self-test when the igni‐
tion is switched on. Some warning and indicator
lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behav‐
iour is non-critical. These warning and indicator
lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up
or flash after the engine is started or during a
journey.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453
Instrument Display (standard)

Progressive setting in the Widescreen Cock‐
pit

ü
$
J
!
à
à

Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cock‐
pit

If you select the progressive display setting in
vehicles with a Widescreen Cockpit, the posi‐
tions of the indicator lamps on the Instrument
Display change.
Warning and indicator lamps:
Low beam (→ page 124)
L
Parking lights (→ page 124)
T
High beam (→ page 125)
K
#! Turn signal light (→ page 125)
Rear fog lights (→ page 124)
R

÷
å
F
!
!
Ð
#
6

Seat belt is not fastened
(→ page 462)
USA: brakes (red) (→ page 455)
Canada: brakes (red) (→ page 455)
ABS malfunction (→ page 455)
AIR BODY CONTROL malfunction
(→ page 463)
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL malfunc‐
tion (→ page 463)
ESP® (→ page 455)
ESP® OFF (→ page 455)
USA: electric parking brake applied
(red) (→ page 455)
Canada: electric parking brake
applied (red) (→ page 455)
Electric parking brake (yellow)
(→ page 455)
Steering assistance malfunction
(→ page 464)
Electrical fault (→ page 465)
Restraint system (→ page 455)

454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
;
8

Check Engine (→ page 465)
Fuel reserve with fuel filler flap loca‐
tion indicator (→ page 465)

?
·

Coolant too hot/cold (→ page 465)
Distance warning (→ page 463)

Tire pressure monitoring system
(→ page 469)

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455
Safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Brake warning lamp (USA)

The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes are:
R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.
R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

$
J

Brakes warning lamp (Can‐
ada)

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. Braking char‐
acteristics may be impaired. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not add brake fluid.

456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
USA only: if an additional display message appears with the # symbol on the multifunction display, the brake pads
have reached their wear limit.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
#

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457
Warning/indicator lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ABS warning lamp

The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

& WARNING There is risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
#

ESP® warning lamp flashes

Drive on carefully.
Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® is intervening.
# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp

ESP® warning lamp lights
up

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched off.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
#
#

Drive on carefully.
Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459
Warning/indicator lamp

ESP® OFF warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The availability of further driving safety systems
is also limited.
# Drive on carefully.
# Only deactivate ESP® for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.
Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

#
#

Observe the notes on deactivating ESP®.

460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp

Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (USA
only)

Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (Can‐
ada only)

Yellow electric parking
brake indicator lamp is mal‐
functioning

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking
brake malfunctions.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461
Warning/indicator lamp

Restraint system warning
lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not
be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or airbag, for exam‐
ple.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
#
#

Drive on carefully.
Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Seat belts
Warning/indicator lamp

Seat belt warning lamp
lights up

Seat belt warning lamp
flashes

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
After the engine is started, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds.
In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
# Fasten your seat belt.
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
# Fasten your seat belt.
There are objects on the front passenger seat.
# Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463
Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp

Suspension warning lamp

Distance warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow AIR BODY CONTROL warning lamp is on.
The yellow DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL warning lamp is on.
AIR BODY CONTROL is faulty.
There is a fault in the DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.
# Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
# Be prepared to brake immediately.
# Increase the distance.
Active Brake Assist.

464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp

Power steering system
warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power steering assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#

Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465
Engine
Warning/indicator lamp

;

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.
In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon
as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up.
# Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the electrics.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while driving.
There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
# Close the fuel filler cap.

Engine diagnosis warning
lamp

Electrical malfunction warn‐
ing lamp

Fuel reserve warning lamp

If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly:
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp

Fuel reserve warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467
Warning/indicator lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Coolant warning lamp

The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes are:
R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
R Coolant level too low
R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
R The radiator fan is defective

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come
into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
#
#

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Otherwise:
# Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
# Check the coolant level.
# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below the red area.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469
Tires
Warning/indicator lamp

Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp lights
up

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
R

You could then lose control of the vehicle.
Observe the recommended tire pressure.
# Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
#

#
#

Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Check the tire pressure and the tires.

470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp

Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp
flashes

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one
minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in
one or more of the tires.
Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics.
# Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Index 471
1, 2, 3 ...
12 V socket
see Socket (12 V)
115 V socket
see Socket (115 V)
360° Camera ...........................................
Assigning as a favorite ........................
Care ....................................................
Function ..............................................
Selecting a view ..................................
A
A/C function
Activating/deactivating (control
panel) ..................................................
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ................................................
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................
Acceleration
see Kickdown
Access data
Editing .................................................
Setting .................................................

198
200
342
198
200

139
139
169

305
304

Acoustic locking verification signal
Activating/deactivating ......................... 58
Active Blind Spot Assist .......................... 210
Activating/deactivating ....................... 212
Brake application ................................. 210
Function ............................................... 210
System limitations ............................... 210
Towing a trailer .................................... 210
Active Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................... 170
Setting ................................................. 174
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ........ 177
Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 185
Active Lane Change Assist .................. 184
Calling up a speed ............................... 179
Function .............................................. 177
Increasing/decreasing speed .............. 179
Requirements ...................................... 179
Steering wheel buttons ........................ 179
Storing a speed ................................... 179
Switching off/deactivating .................. 179
Switching on/activating ...................... 179
System limitations ............................... 177
Active Emergency Stop Assist ............... 185

Active hood (pedestrian protection) ......
Method of operation ............................
Resetting .............................................
Active Lane Change Assist
Function ..............................................
Active Lane Keeping Assist .....................
Function ...............................................
Sensitivity (function/notes) .................
Setting the sensitivity ..........................
Switching on/off .................................
System limits .......................................
Towing a trailer ....................................
Active Parking Assist ..............................
Cross Traffic Alert ...............................
Drive Away Assist ................................
Exiting a parking space .......................
Function ..............................................
Parking ................................................
System limitations ...............................
Active Speed Limit Assist .......................
Setting .................................................
Active Steering Assist .............................
Activating/deactivating .......................
Active Emergency Stop Assist .............

333
333
333
184
212
212
215
215
214
212
212
201
206
205
203
201
202
201
209
209
182
183
185

472 Index
Active Lane Change Assist ..................
Function ..............................................
System limitations ...............................
Adaptive cruise control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Function ..............................................
Switching on/off .................................
Additives ..................................................
Engine oil ............................................
Fuel .....................................................
Additives (engine oil)
see Additives
Additives (fuel)
see Fuel
Address book
see Contacts
Adjusting the balance/fader
Burmester® surround sound system ....
Adjusting the sound focus
Burmester® surround sound system ....
ADS PLUS damping system
see AIR BODY CONTROL

184
182
182

127
128
402
402
402

331
331

After-sales service center
see ASSYST PLUS
Air bag ........................................................ 38
Activation .............................................. 32
Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ... 38
Installation locations ............................. 38
Knee airbag ........................................... 38
Overview ............................................... 38
Protection .............................................. 39
Reduced protection ............................... 40
Side impact air bag ............................... 38
Window curtain air bag .......................... 38
AIR BODY CONTROL ........................ 187, 188
Setting ................................................. 190
Suspension .................................. 187, 188
Air conditioning system
see Climate control
Air distribution ........................................ 138
Air freshener system
see Fragrance system
Air pressure
see Tire pressure

Air suspension
see AIR BODY CONTROL
Air vents ...................................................
Adjusting (front) ..................................
Adjusting (rear passenger compart‐
ment) ...................................................
Glove box .............................................
Air vents
see Air vents
Air-recirculation mode .............................
Airflow ......................................................
AIRPANEL (Care) ......................................
Alarm
see Panic alarm
Alarm system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Alternative route
see Route
Ambient lighting ......................................
Android Auto ............................................
Connecting a mobile phone .................
Ending .................................................

143
143
144
144
141
138
342

129
298
299
299

Index 473
Note .................................................... 298
Overview ............................................. 298
Sound settings .................................... 299
Transferred vehicle data ...................... 300
Animals
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 55
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Anti-theft protection
Immobilizer ............................................ 81
Anti-theft protection
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Anticipatory occupant protection
see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
Apple CarPlay™ ....................................... 297
Connecting an iPhone® ....................... 297

Ending ................................................. 298
Notes ................................................... 297
Overview ............................................. 297
Sound settings .................................... 298
Transferred vehicle data ...................... 300
Ashtray
Front center console ............................ 116
Rear passenger compartment .............. 117
Assistance graphic
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 221
Assistance systems
see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 332
Displaying the service due date ........... 332
Function/notes ................................... 332
Non-operational times with the bat‐
tery disconnected ............................... 333
Regular maintenance work .................. 332
Special service requirements .............. 332
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) ................... 81
Deactivating the alarm .......................... 82
Function ................................................. 81
ATTENTION ASSIST .......................... 206, 207
Function .............................................. 206

Setting .................................................
System limitations ...............................
Attention assistant
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Audio mode
Activating media mode ........................
Connecting USB devices ......................
Copyright .............................................
Information ..........................................
Inserting/removing an SD card ...........
Media search .......................................
Overview ..............................................
Pause and playback function ...............
Selecting a track ..................................
Selecting playback options ..................
Track list ..............................................
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic car wash (care) .....................
Automatic distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights .........................

207
206

312
314
311
310
312
317
313
314
314
314
314
339

125

474 Index
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) ........................................... 151
Automatic front passenger front air
bag shutoff .......................................... 40, 42
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 42
Automatic front-passenger front air
bag deactivation system .......................... 40
Function of the automatic front
passenger air bag shutoff ...................... 40
Automatic lateral support adjustment
Setting ................................................... 91
Automatic mirror folding function
Activating/deactivating ....................... 136
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 153
Drive program display .......................... 153
Drive programs .................................... 152
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 152
Engaging drive position ....................... 155
Engaging reverse gear ......................... 154
Kickdown ............................................. 156
Manual gearshifting ............................. 155
Selecting park position ........................ 155
Shifting to neutral ................................ 154

Steering wheel paddle shifters ............ 155
Transmission position display .............. 153
Transmission positions ........................ 153
B
Bag hook ................................................... 110
BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................... 169
Battery
SmartKey ............................................... 59
Battery (vehicle)
Charging .............................................. 354
Jump-starting ...................................... 354
Notes .................................................. 352
Belt
see Seat belts
Blind Spot Assist ...................................... 210
Activating/deactivating ....................... 212
Function ............................................... 210
System limitations ............................... 210
Blower
see Climate control
Bluetooth®
Activating/deactivating ....................... 252

Setting up an Internet connection .......
Settings ...............................................
Switching profile (DUN/PAN) ..............
Bluetooth® audio
Activating ............................................
De-authorizing (de-registering) the
device ..................................................
Information ..........................................
Overview .............................................
Searching for a track ...........................
Searching for and authorizing the
device ..................................................
Selecting a music player .....................
Switching device via NFC ....................
Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Notes ..................................................
Brake force distribution
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
tion) .....................................................
Brakes
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...........
Active Brake Assist ..............................

304
252
305
322
322
319
320
322
321
322
322

403
170
169
170

Index 475
BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 169
Driving tips .......................................... 148
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 170
HOLD function ..................................... 185
Limited braking effect (salt-treated
roads) .................................................. 148
New/replaced brake pads/brake
discs .................................................... 148
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 148
Braking assistance
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Breakdown
Changing a wheel ................................ 390
Overview of the help functions .............. 16
Roadside Assistance .............................. 21
Tow-starting ........................................ 362
Towing away ........................................ 358
Transporting the vehicle ...................... 360
Breakdown
see Flat tire
Burmester® surround sound system ..... 330
Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 331
Adjusting the sound focus ................... 331

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ................................................
Automatic volume adjustment .............
Calling up the sound menu ..................
Information ..........................................
Switching the surround sound on/off
.............................................................
Buttons
Steering wheel .....................................

331
331
330
330
331
217

C
California
Important information for private
customers and lessees .......................... 22
Call list
Making a call ....................................... 294
Options in the call list .......................... 294
Overview ............................................. 294
Calling up the sound menu
Burmester® surround sound system ... 330
Calls .......................................................... 290
Accepting ............................................ 290
Activating functions during a call ........ 290
Calls with several participants ............. 291

Declining .............................................
Ending a call ........................................
Incoming call during an existing call ....
Making ................................................
Camera
see 360° Camera
see Rear view camera
Car key
see SmartKey
Car wash
see Care
Care ..........................................................
AIRPANEL ............................................
Car wash .............................................
Carpet .................................................
Display ................................................
EASY-PACK trunk box ..........................
Exhaust pipes ......................................
Exterior lighting ...................................
Matt finish ...........................................
Paintwork ............................................
Plastic trim ..........................................
Power washer ......................................
Real wood/trim elements ...................

290
290
291
290

344
342
339
344
344
344
342
342
341
341
344
340
344

476 Index
Rear view camera/360° Camera ........ 342
Roof lining ........................................... 344
Seat belts ............................................ 344
Seat cover ........................................... 344
Sensors ............................................... 342
Washing by hand ................................. 340
Wheels/rims ....................................... 342
Windows .............................................. 342
Wiper blades ....................................... 342
Cargo compartment cover
Extending/retracting ........................... 107
Notes ................................................... 107
Carpet (Care) ........................................... 344
Change of address ..................................... 21
Change of ownership ................................ 21
Changing a wheel
Lowering the vehicle ............................ 394
Mounting a new wheel ........................ 393
Preparation ......................................... 390
Raising the vehicle ............................... 391
Removing a wheel ............................... 393
Removing/installing hub caps ............. 390
Changing hub caps ................................. 390

Channel list
Calling up ............................................ 324
Character entry
Function/notes ................................... 249
On the touchpad ................................. 250
Using the controller ............................. 249
Charging
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 354
Mobile phone (wireless) ....................... 121
USB port .............................................. 120
Chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL)
Setting ................................................. 190
Child safety lock
Rear door .............................................. 54
Rear side windows ................................. 55
Setting ................................................. 256
Child seat
Front passenger seat (notes) ................. 53
Front passenger seat (rearwardfacing/forward-facing) .......................... 53
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing) ............ 50
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (notes) .................. 49
Notes ..................................................... 46
Top Tether .............................................. 51

Child seat safety feature .......................... 48
Children
Child seat safety feature ........................ 48
Restraint systems .................................. 46
Chock ....................................................... 389
Storage location .................................. 389
Cigarette lighter
Front center console ............................ 117
Cleaning
see Care
Climate control ........................................ 138
3-zone automatic climate control
panel ................................................... 138
Activating/deactivating ....................... 139
Activating/deactivating the A/C
function (control panel) ....................... 139
Activating/deactivating the A/C
function (multimedia system) .............. 139
Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
nization function (control panel) .......... 140
Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
nization function (multimedia sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 141
Adjusting the climate style settings ..... 140

Index 477
Air distribution settings .......................
Air-recirculation mode .........................
Automatic control ................................
Climate style function ..........................
Defrosting the windows .......................
Defrosts the windshield .......................
Dual-zone automatic climate control
panel ...................................................
Filling capacity for PAG oil ...................
Front air vents .....................................
Glove box air vent ................................
Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐
grance system) ....................................
Ionization .............................................
Rear air vents ......................................
Rear operating unit ..............................
Refrigerant ..........................................
Refrigerant filling capacity ...................
Residual heat .......................................
Sets the airflow ...................................
Setting the air distribution ...................
Setting the fragrance system ...............
Setting the temperature ......................
Switching the rear window heater
on/off .................................................

140
141
139
140
141
138
138
406
143
144
142
141
144
138
405
406
141
138
138
141
138
138

Ventilating the vehicle (convenience
opening) ................................................. 74
Windshield heater ................................ 143
Climate style
Function .............................................. 140
Setting ................................................. 140
Cockpit ......................................................... 6
Overview ................................................. 6
COMAND
see Multimedia system
COMAND Touch
Managing devices ................................ 255
Combination switch
see Turn signal light
Combined luggage cover and net
Attaching to the rear seat backrest ..... 108
Installing/removing ............................. 108
Compass .................................................. 285
Computer
On-board computer .............................. 217
Connection status
Displaying ............................................ 306
Overview ............................................. 306

Contacts ................................................... 291
Calling up ............................................ 292
Deleting ............................................... 293
Downloading (from mobile phone) ....... 291
Importing ............................................ 293
Information .......................................... 291
Making a call ....................................... 293
Name format ....................................... 292
Options ................................................ 293
Storing ................................................ 293
Controller
Operating ............................................ 243
Convenience closing feature .................... 74
Convenience opening ................................ 74
Coolant (engine)
Filling capacity .................................... 404
Level check ......................................... 337
Notes .................................................. 404
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright
Licenses ................................................ 30
Trademarks ............................................ 30

478 Index
Cornering light function .......................... 126
Cover .......................................................... 72
Cross Traffic Alert ................................... 206
Crosswind Assist
Function/notes ................................... 170
Cruise control .......................................... 175
Activating ............................................. 175
Calling up a speed ............................... 175
Deactivating ......................................... 175
Function ............................................... 175
Lever .................................................... 175
Prerequisites ........................................ 175
Selecting .............................................. 175
Setting a speed .................................... 175
Storing a speed .................................... 175
System limitations ............................... 175
Cup holder
Rear passenger compartment .............. 116
Cup holder in the center console
Installing/removing (automatic
transmission) ....................................... 115
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ......... 25
Customer Relations Department ............. 25

D
Dashboard
see Cockpit
Dashboard lighting
see Instrument lighting
Data acquisition
Vehicle .................................................. 26
Data import/export
Function/notes ................................... 256
Importing/exporting ........................... 257
Date
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 251
Daytime running lights ........................... 128
Activating/deactivating ....................... 128
Daytime running lights mode
see Daytime running lights
Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 82
Declaration of conformity
Wireless vehicle components ................ 23
Definitions (tires and loading) ............... 383

Designs
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 227
Destination ............................................... 276
Editing intermediate destinations ........ 267
Editing the previous destinations ......... 276
External ............................................... 277
Saving (current vehicle position) .......... 276
Saving as global favorite ...................... 276
Storing a map position ......................... 276
Using intelligent destination sugges‐
tions .................................................... 277
Destination entry ............................ 263, 265
Enter geo-coordinates ......................... 267
Entering a POI or address .................... 263
Entering an intermediate destination .. 266
Selecting a contact .............................. 267
Selecting a POI .................................... 265
Selecting from the map ....................... 268
Selecting previous destinations ........... 265
Detecting inattentiveness
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection ............................ 24
Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 18
Digital speedometer ................................ 221

Index 479
DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 153
Engaging drive position ....................... 155
Engaging park position automatically .. 155
Engaging reverse gear ......................... 154
Function .............................................. 153
Selecting park position ........................ 155
Shifting to neutral ................................ 154
Display
Care .................................................... 344
Display (multimedia system)
Notes ................................................... 242
Settings ............................................... 250
Display (on-board computer)
Displays in the multifunction display .... 219
Display content
(Additional value range) ....................... 219
Display message ..................................... 408
Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 408
Notes .................................................. 408
Display messages
? .......................................... 437, 448
A ................................................... 449
C ................................................... 448

¯ ....................................................
Active Blind Spot Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....
Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative ....
Active Blind Spot Asst. Not Available
When Towing a Trailer See Opera‐
tor's Manual ........................................
Active Brake Assist Functions Cur‐
rently Limited See Operator's Man‐
ual .......................................................
Active Brake Assist Functions Limi‐
ted See Operator's Manual ..................
Active Distance Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....
Active Distance Assist Inoperative ......
Active Distance Assist Now Available
.............................................................
bActive Headlamps Inoperative .....
Active Hood Malfunction See Opera‐
tor's Manual ........................................

433
430
430

430

420
421
432
432
432
450
448

Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera
View Restricted See Operator's Man‐
ual .......................................................
Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....
Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐
tive ......................................................
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐
tor's Manual ........................................
èActive Steering Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....
èActive Steering Assist Inopera‐
tive ......................................................
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera
View Restricted See Operator's Man‐
ual .......................................................
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....

429
428
428

431
432
433

452
451

480 Index
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera‐
tive ......................................................
Air Conditioning Malfunction See
Operator's Manual ..............................
Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' ...............
ÀATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative ...
ÀATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
Break! ..................................................
bAuto Lamp Function Inoperative
.............................................................
Auxiliary Battery Malfunction ..............
Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's Manual ..................
Blind Spot Assist Inoperative ...............
Blind Spot Assist Not Available When
Towing a Trailer See Operator's Man‐
ual .......................................................
$Check Brake Fluid Level ...............
Check Coolant Level See Operator's
Manual ................................................

451
445
443
426
426
451
445
429
430

430
418
434

4Check Engine Oil At Next Refu‐
eling ....................................................
bCheck Left Low Beam (Exam‐
ple) ......................................................
hCheck Tires .................................
¥Check Washer Fluid ....................
?Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off ....................................
Cruise Control Canceled .....................
Cruise Control Inoperative ..................
!Currently Unavailable See Oper‐
ator's Manual .......................................
÷Currently Unavailable See Oper‐
ator's Manual .......................................
ÂDon't Forget Your Key .................
Driver's Door Open & Transmission
Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away ..
6Front Left Malfunction Service
Required (Example) .............................

437
450
438
449
434
433
433
410
411
442
443
423

Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual ...............................
Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator's Manual ...............................
8Fuel Level Low .............................
8Gas Cap Loose ............................
!Inoperative See Operator's
Manual ................................................
÷Inoperative See Operator's
Manual .................................................
TInoperative See Operator's
Manual .................................................
GInoperative ...................................
ÂKey Not Detected (white dis‐
play message) .....................................
ÂKey Not Detected (red display
message) .............................................
6Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal‐
function Service Required (Example) ...

424
425
437
437
409
412
413
418
442
442
423

Index 481
Let fresh air into the vehicle interior.
Air Conditioning Malf. Visit Work‐
shop ....................................................
Â Lowering ....................................
Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph ......
bMalfunction See Operator’s
Manual ................................................
N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling
Away ...................................................
ÂObtain a New Key ........................
ëOff ...............................................
Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐
tionary .................................................
FParking Brake See Operator's
Manual .................................................
ÂPlace the Key in the Marked
Space See Operator's Manual .............
hPlease Correct Tire Pressure .......
FPlease Release Parking Brake ......

446
426
428
450
444
441
432
444
415
443
438
414

PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative
See Operator's Manual ........................ 421
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera‐
tor's Manual ........................................ 421
Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's
Manual ......................................... 419, 420
_Rear Left Backrest Not
Latched (Example) ............................... 449
ÂReplace Key Battery .................... 441
Reversing Not Possible Service
Required .............................................. 445
#See Operator's Manual ............... 435
Service Required Do Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer .......................................... 444
6SRS Malfunction Service
Required .............................................. 422
#Start Engine See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 435
ÐSteering Malfunction Drive
Carefully Service Required .................. 446

ÐSteering Malfunction Increased
Physical Effort See Operator's Man‐
ual .......................................................
ÐSteering Malfunction Stop
Immediately See Operator's Manual ....
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running
Wait Transmission Cooling ..................
#Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run‐
ning .....................................................
#Stop Vehicle See Operator's
Manual ................................................
ÁStop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low ......
bSwitch Off Lights .........................
bSwitch On Headlamps .................
Tire Press. Monitor Currently
Unavailable ..........................................
Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative ...........
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors ....................................
Tires Overheated .................................

447
447
445
436
436
427
451
451
439
440
440
440

482 Index
Tires Overheated Decrease Speed .......
To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake
and Start Engine ..................................
To Engage Transmiss. Position R First
Depress the Brake ...............................
Traffic Sign Assist Camera View
Restricted See Operator's Manual .......
Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail‐
able See Operator's Manual ................
Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative .............
Transmission Malfunction Stop ...........
FTurn On the Ignition to Release
the Parking Brake .................................
dVehicle Operational Switch the
Ignition Off Before Exiting ...................
ÁVehicle Rising Please Wait ...........
ÁVehicle Rising ..............................
hWarning Tire Malfunction ............
hWheel Sensor(s) Missing .............

441
443
446
431
431
431
445
414
444
427
426
439
440

Display on the windshield
see Head-up Display
Distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Distance recorder
see Trip distance
DISTRONIC
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door
Locking (mechanical key) ...................... 65
Opening (from the inside) ...................... 62
Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 62
Unlocking (mechanical key) ................... 65
Door control panel ..................................... 14
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ... 379
Drinking and driving ................................ 148
Drive Away Assist .................................... 205
Drive position
Selecting ............................................. 155
Drive program display ............................. 153
Drive programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT

Driver's seat
see Seat
Driving lights
see Automatic driving lights
Driving safety system .............................
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..............
Active Brake Assist ..............................
BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
tion) .....................................................
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Crosswind Assist .................................
Overview .............................................
Radar sensors ......................................
Responsibility ......................................
STEER CONTROL .................................
Driving system
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL ..................
Driving system
see 360° Camera
see Active Blind Spot Assist
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Parking Assist

168
169
170
169
170
170
168
168
168
170
186

Index 483
see Active Speed Limit Assist
see Active Steering Assist
see AIR BODY CONTROL
see ATTENTION ASSIST
see Blind Spot Assist
see Cruise control
see Driving safety system
see HOLD function
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
see Rear view camera
see Traffic Sign Assist
Driving tips
Drinking and driving ............................
General driving tips .............................
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle .....
Drowsiness detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL
Suspension ..........................................
DYNAMIC SELECT ....................................
Configuring drive program I .................
Displaying engine data ........................
Displaying vehicle data ........................
Drive program display ..........................

Drive programs ....................................
Function ..............................................
Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)
.............................................................
Selecting the drive program ................

148
148
148

186
152
153
153
153
153

152
152
153
153

E
E10 ............................................................ 401
Easy entry feature
Function/notes ..................................... 99
Setting ................................................... 99
Easy exit feature
Function/notes ..................................... 99
Setting ................................................... 99
EASY-PACK load-securing kit ................... 111
Inserting brackets ................................ 112
Installing/removing the luggage
holder .................................................. 112
Installing/removing the telescopic
rod ....................................................... 113
Notes ................................................... 111
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
tion)
Function/notes ................................... 170

ECO display
Function .............................................. 152
Resetting ............................................. 223
ECO start/stop function ......................... 151
Automatic engine start ........................ 151
Automatic engine stop ......................... 151
Method of operation ............................ 151
Switching off/on .................................. 151
Electric parking brake ............. 165, 166, 167
Applying automatically ........................ 165
Applying or releasing manually ............ 166
Emergency braking .............................. 167
Releasing automatically ....................... 166
Electrical fuses
Before replacing a fuse ........................ 362
Electrical fuses
see Fuses
Electronics ............................................... 396
Emergency
Overview of the help functions .............. 16
Safety vest .......................................... 346
Emergency braking .................................. 167

484 Index
Emergency call system
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA) ........... 301
Emergency engine start ......................... 362
Emergency operation mode
Starting the vehicle .............................. 147
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation .............................................. 32
Energy consumption
SmartKey ............................................... 58
Engine
ECO start/stop function ...................... 151
Engine number .................................... 398
Jump-starting ...................................... 354
Starting (emergency operation
mode) .................................................. 147
Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 147
Starting (start/stop button) ................. 146
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 159
Engine data
Displaying ............................................ 153
Engine number ........................................ 398
Engine oil ................................................. 336
Adding ................................................. 336

Additives .............................................
Capacity ..............................................
Checking the oil level using the oil
dipstick ...............................................
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ...............
Quality .................................................
ESP®
Crosswind Assist .................................
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Activating/deactivating .......................
Exhaust pipes (Care) ...............................
Exterior lighting
Care ....................................................
Exterior lighting
see Lights
External device
Locking ...............................................
Eyeglasses compartment .......................
F
Fatigue detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST

402
403
336
403
403
170
169
342
342

256
103

Fault message
see Display message
Favorites
Adding ................................................. 246
Calling up ............................................ 246
Deleting ............................................... 247
Moving ................................................. 247
Overview ............................................. 246
Renaming ............................................. 247
Flacon
Inserting/removing ............................. 142
Flat tire ..................................................... 346
Changing a wheel ................................ 390
MOExtended tires ................................ 347
Notes .................................................. 346
TIREFIT kit ........................................... 348
Floor mats ................................................ 122
Folding bench seat .................................... 94
Folding back .......................................... 96
Folding out ............................................ 94
Installing and removing the seat
cushion .................................................. 95
Notes ..................................................... 94

Index 485
Opening and closing the cargo com‐
partment floor ....................................... 96
Fragrance
see Fragrance system
Fragrance system .................................... 142
Inserting/removing the flacon ............. 142
Free software ............................................ 30
Frequencies
Two-way radio ...................................... 397
Frequency band
Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 224
Front air bag (driver, front passenger) .... 38
Front passenger front air bag shutoff
see Automatic front passenger front
air bag shutoff
Front passenger seat
Adjusting from the driver's seat ............ 87
Front passenger seat
see Seat
Fuel ........................................................... 402
Additives ............................................. 402
E10 ...................................................... 401

Gasoline ..............................................
Quality (gasoline) .................................
Refueling .............................................
Reserve fuel level ................................
Sulfur content ......................................
Tank capacity ......................................
Fuel consumption
On-board computer .............................
Function seat
see Door control panel
Fuse insert
see Fuses
Fuses ........................................................
Assignment diagram ............................
Dashboard fuse box ............................
Fuse box in the cargo compartment ....
Fuse box in the engine compartment ..
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐
well ......................................................
Notes ..................................................

401
401
157
402
401
402
221

362
362
364
365
363
364
362

G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ........................... 163

Opening/closing the garage door ........ 163
Programming buttons .......................... 160
Radio equipment approval numbers .... 164
Resolving problems ............................. 162
Synchronizing the rolling code ............. 162
Gas station search
Starting an automatic gas station
search ................................................. 266
Switching the automatic gas station
search on/off ...................................... 271
Gasoline ................................................... 401
Gearshift paddles
see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Gearshift recommendation .................... 156
Genuine parts ............................................ 19
Glide mode ............................................... 156
Glove box
Air vent ................................................ 144
Locking/unlocking .............................. 102
H
Handbrake
see Electric parking brake

486 Index
Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 366
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 69
HANDS-FREE ACCESS
see Opening the tailgate using your foot
Hazard warning lights ............................. 126
Head restraint ........................................... 88
Front (adjusting manually) ..................... 88
Front (luxury head restraint) .................. 89
Rear (adjusting) ..................................... 90
Rear (lowering from the front) ............... 90
Rear passenger compartment
(removing/installing) ............................. 90
Head-up Display ...................................... 226
Adjusting brightness (on-board com‐
puter) .................................................. 226
Adjusting display elements (on-board
computer) ............................................ 226
Function .............................................. 227
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 226
Setting the position (on-board com‐
puter) .................................................. 226
Switching on/off ................................. 228
Using the memory function ................. 100

Heating
see Climate control
High beam
Activating/deactivating .......................
High-beam flasher ...................................
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...................
Hill start assist ........................................
HOLD function .........................................
Activating/deactivating .......................
Function/notes ...................................
Hood
Function (active hood) .........................
Opening/closing .................................
Resetting (active hood) ........................
Hooking the luggage net .........................
Hotspot
Setting up (Wi-Fi) .................................

125
125
127
185
185
185
185
333
333
333
111
254

I
Identification plate
Engine ................................................. 398
Refrigerant .......................................... 405

Vehicle ................................................ 398
Ignition
Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 145
Ignition key
see SmartKey
Immobilizer ................................................ 81
In Car Office
Accepting/rejecting a call for a tele‐
phone conference ....................... 296, 297
Features .............................................. 296
Marking a to-do entry as completed .... 297
Selecting functions .............................. 296
Switching automatic start on/off ........ 296
Indicator lamp
see Warning/indicator lamps
Individual drive program
Configuring .......................................... 153
Selecting ............................................. 153
Instrument cluster
see Instrument Display
see Warning/indicator lamps
Instrument Display .................................. 216
Adjusting the lighting .......................... 220

Index 487
Function/notes .................................... 216
Overview .............................................. 216
Overview (standard) ................................ 8
Overview (Widescreen) ............................ 8
Warning/indicator lamps .................... 452
Instrument lighting ................................. 220
Intelligent Light System
Cornering light function ....................... 126
Interior lighting ........................................ 128
Ambient lighting .................................. 129
Setting ................................................. 128
Switch-off delay time ........................... 129
Interior lighting
see Interior lighting
see Lighting
see Lights
Intermediate destination
Calculating a route with intermediate
destinations ......................................... 267
Editing ................................................. 267
Entering ............................................... 266
Starting an automatic gas station
search ................................................. 266

Starting the automatic service sta‐
tion search ...........................................
Internet
Deleting a bookmark ...........................
Deleting browser data .........................
Managing bookmarks ..........................
Internet connection
Canceling permission ..........................
Connection status ...............................
Displaying the connection status ........
Editing access data .............................
Establishing .........................................
Information ..........................................
Mobile phone details ...........................
Restrictions .........................................
Setting access data .............................
Setting up (Bluetooth®) .......................
Switching Bluetooth® profile (DUN/
PAN) ....................................................
Via Bluetooth® .....................................
Via Wi-Fi ..............................................
Internet radio
Calling up ............................................
Deleting stations .................................

271
308
308
308
305
306
306
305
306
303
306
303
304
304
305
304
303
309
309

Logging in ............................................
Logging out ..........................................
Overview .............................................
Saving stations ....................................
Selecting and connecting to a station
.............................................................
Selecting stream ..................................
Setting options ....................................
Terms of use ........................................
Ionization ..................................................
iPhone®
see Apple CarPlay™

310
310
309
309
309
310
310
310
141

J
Jack
Storage location .................................. 389
Jump-start connection ............................ 354
Jump-starting
see Jump-start connection
K
KEYLESS-GO
Locking the vehicle ................................ 62
Problem ................................................. 63

488 Index
Unlocking setting .................................. 58
Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 62
Kickdown ................................................. 156
Using ................................................... 156
Knee air bag ............................................... 38
L
Labeling (tires)
see Tire labeling
Laden ........................................................
Stowage space underneath the cargo
compartment floor ...............................
Tie-down eyes ......................................
Laden
see EASY-PACK load-securing kit
Lamp (Instrument Display)
see Warning/indicator lamps
Lamps
see Interior lighting
Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Language
Notes ..................................................

110
114
110

256

Setting ................................................. 256
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
attachment
Installing ................................................ 50
Notes ..................................................... 49
Level control system
see AIR BODY CONTROL
Light switch
Overview .............................................. 124
Lighting .................................................... 128
Lighting
see Lights
Lights ................................................ 124, 128
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 127
Adjusting the instrument lighting ........ 220
Automatic driving lights ....................... 125
Combination switch ............................. 125
Cornering light function ....................... 126
Hazard warning lights .......................... 126
High beam ........................................... 125
High-beam flasher ............................... 125
Light switch ......................................... 124
Low beam ............................................ 124
Parking lights ....................................... 124

Rear fog light .......................................
Responsibility for lighting systems .......
Setting the surround lighting ...............
Standing lights .....................................
Turn signal light ...................................
Limited Warranty
Vehicle ..................................................
Limiting the opening angle (tailgate) ......
Live Traffic Information
Displaying subscription information ....
Displaying the traffic map ....................
Displaying traffic incidents ..................
Extending a subscription .....................
Issuing hazard alerts ...........................
Load index (tires) .....................................
Load-bearing capacity (tires) .................
Loading
Bag hook ..............................................
Definitions ...........................................
Roof rack .............................................
Loading guidelines ..................................
Loading information table ......................

125
124
128
124
125
26
70
278
278
279
278
280
381
381
110
383
114
101
373

Index 489
Loads
Securing .............................................. 101
Locator lighting
Activating/deactivating ....................... 128
Locking/unlocking .................................... 65
KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 62
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside .............................................. 62
Low beam
Switching on/off ................................. 124
Lubricant additives
see Additives
Luggage
Luggage net .......................................... 111
Securing .............................................. 101
Lumbar support
see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lumbar support (4-way) ........................... 88
M
Maintenance
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 220
Vehicle ................................................... 21

Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Making a call via the overhead con‐
trol panel
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA) ........... 300
Malfunction
Restraint system ................................... 32
Map ........................................... 278, 280, 281
Avoiding an area .................................. 283
Avoiding an area (overview) ................. 283
Changing an area ................................ 283
Deleting an area .................................. 284
Displaying the compass ....................... 285
Displaying the map version ................. 283
Displaying the next intersecting
street ................................................... 283
Displaying the satellite map ................ 285
Displaying the traffic map .................... 278
Displaying weather information ........... 285
Map data ............................................. 284
Moving ................................................. 281
Overview ............................................. 280
Selecting POI symbols ......................... 282
Selecting text information ................... 282
Selecting the map orientation ............. 282

Setting the map scale .......................... 281
Setting the map scale automatically .... 285
Switching highway information
on/off ................................................. 282
Updating .............................................. 284
Map and compass
Overview ............................................. 280
Massage program
Selecting the front seats ........................ 91
Massage programs
Overview ................................................ 91
Massage settings
Resetting ............................................... 92
Matt finish (cleaning instructions) ......... 341
Maximum load rating .............................. 380
Maximum permissible load
Calculation example ............................ 375
Determining ......................................... 374
Maximum tire pressure .......................... 380
Mechanical key
Inserting/removing ............................... 59
Locking a door ....................................... 65
Unlocking a door ................................... 65

490 Index
Unlocking the tailgate ............................ 71
Media
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 225
Searching ............................................. 317
Media display
Notes ................................................... 242
Media Interface
Activating ............................................. 318
Information .......................................... 317
Overview .............................................. 319
Media mode
Activating ............................................. 312
Media playback
Operating (on-board computer) ........... 225
Media search
Starting ................................................ 317
Media source
Dialling (on-board computer) ............... 225
Memory function
Head-up display — Calling up saved
settings ............................................... 100
Head-up Display — Saving settings ...... 100
Operating ............................................ 100

Outside mirror — Calling up saved
settings ...............................................
Outside mirror — Saving settings .........
Seat — Calling up saved settings .........
Seat — Saving settings .........................
Steering wheel — Calling up saved
settings ...............................................
Steering wheel — Saving settings .........
Menu (on-board computer)
Assistance graphic ..............................
Designs ...............................................
Maintenance .......................................
Media ..................................................
Navigation ...........................................
Overview ..............................................
Radio ...................................................
Telephone ............................................
Trip ......................................................
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Notes ...................................................
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Calling up ............................................
Using voice control ..............................

100
100
100
100
100
100
221
227
220
225
223
217
224
225
221
145
306
306

Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA)
Emergency call system ........................
Making a call via the overhead con‐
trol panel .............................................
MB Info call .........................................
Roadside Assistance call .....................
Transferred data ..................................
Message (multifunction display)
see Display message
Message memory ....................................
Messages
see Text messages
Mirrors
see Outside mirrors
Mobile phone
Canceling permission for Internet
connection ..........................................
Wireless charging ................................
Mobile phone
see Android Auto
see Apple CarPlay™

301
300
302
302
302
408

305
122

Index 491
see Telephone
Mobile phone voice recognition
Starting ............................................... 290
Stopping .............................................. 290
Model series ............................................ 398
MOExtended tires .................................... 347
Multifunction display (on-board com‐
puter) ........................................................ 219
Multifunction steering wheel
Overview of buttons ............................. 217
Multifunction steering wheel
see Steering wheel
Multimedia system ......................... 242, 250
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ................................................... 168
Adjusting the volume ........................... 248
Calling up lists and menus ................... 246
Central control elements ..................... 242
Configuring display settings ................ 250
Main functions ..................................... 245
Overview ............................................. 242
Rear climate control ............................ 140
Restoring the factory settings .............. 261

Switching the sound on/off ................. 247
N
Navigation
Calling up the Digital Operator's
Manual ................................................
Menu (on-board computer) ..................
Showing/hiding the menu ...................
Switching on .......................................
Updating the map data ........................
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) .....................................................
Navigation
see Destination
see Destination entry
see Map
see Route
see Route guidance
see Traffic information
Navigation announcements
Activating/deactivating .......................
Adjusting the volume ...........................
Repeating ............................................
Switching audio fadeout on/off ...........
Switching on/off during a phone call ..

286
223
262
262
284
233

274
274
275
274
274

Navigation messages
On-board computer .............................
Near Field Communication (NFC) ..........
Connecting the mobile phone to the
multimedia system ..............................
Information ..........................................
Switching Bluetooth® audio equip‐
ment ....................................................
Switching mobile phones ....................
Neutral
Selecting .............................................
NFC
see Near Field Communication (NFC)
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle .......

223
289
289
289
322
289
154
148

O
Occupant safety
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 55
Occupant safety
see Air bag
see Automatic front-passenger front
air bag deactivation system

492 Index
see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
see Restraint system
see Seat belts
Odometer
see Total distance
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer .................................
Assistance graphic menu .....................
Displaying the service due date ...........
Media menu ........................................
Menu designs ......................................
Menus ..................................................
Multifunction display ............................
Navigation system menu .....................
Operating .............................................
Radio menu .........................................
Service menu ......................................
Telephone menu ..................................
Trip menu ............................................

226
221
332
225
227
217
219
223
217
224
220
225
221

On-board diagnostics interface
see Diagnostics connection
Open-source software .............................. 30
Opening the tailgate using your foot ....... 69
Operating fluids
Additives (fuel) .................................... 402
Brake fluid ........................................... 403
Coolant (engine) .................................. 404
Engine oil ............................................ 402
Fuel (gasoline) ..................................... 401
Notes .................................................. 400
Refrigerant (air conditioning system) ... 405
Windshield washer fluid ...................... 404
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity (wireless
vehicle components) ............................. 23
Information ............................................ 22
Operating system
On-board computer .............................. 217
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ................................. 20
Operator's Manual (digital) ....................... 18

Outside mirrors ....................... 133, 134, 135
Anti-glare mode (automatic) ................ 134
Automatic mirror folding function ........ 136
Folding in/out ..................................... 133
Parking position ................................... 135
Setting ................................................. 133
Using the memory function ................. 100
Overhead control panel ............................ 12
P
Paint code ................................................ 398
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .......... 341
Panic alarm ................................................ 58
Activating/deactivating ......................... 58
Panoramic sliding sunroof
see Sliding sunroof
Park position
Selecting ............................................. 155
Selecting automatically ....................... 155
Parking ..................................................... 167
Parking
see Electric parking brake

Index 493
Parking aid
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist
Maneuvering assistance ......................
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ...................
Adjusting warning tones ......................
Function ..............................................
Side impact protection ........................
Switching off .......................................
Switching on ........................................
System limitations ...............................
Parking assistance systems
see Active Parking Assist
Parking brake
see Electric parking brake
Parking lights ...........................................
Parking position
Outside mirrors ...................................
Storing the position of the passenger
outside mirror using reverse gear ........
PASSENGER AIR BAG status display
see Automatic front passenger front
air bag shutoff

206
192
195
192
193
194
194
192

124
135
135

Payload
Calculation example ............................ 375
Determining the maximum ................... 374
Pedestrian protection
see Active hood (pedestrian protection)
Perfume
see Fragrance system
Perfume atomizer
Setting ................................................. 141
Perfume vial
see Fragrance system
Period out of use
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ................................................... 168
Permitted towing methods ..................... 357
Personalization
see User profile
Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 55
Phone book
see Contacts
Picture formats
see Video mode

Picture settings
see Video mode
PIN protection
Activating/deactivating ....................... 257
Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 344
Playback options
Selecting .............................................. 314
POI symbols
Custom ................................................ 282
Power supply
Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 145
Power washer (care) ............................... 340
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection) ................................................. 45
Function ................................................ 45
PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 45
Reversing the measures ........................ 45
PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side ........................... 46
Activation .............................................. 32
Function ................................................ 46

494 Index
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐
pant protection plus) ................................ 45
Function ................................................ 45
Reversing the measures ........................ 45
Preventative occupant protection sys‐
tem
see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
Previous destinations
Selecting ............................................. 265
Programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT
Protecting the environment
Notes ..................................................... 19
Q
QR code
Rescue card .......................................... 26
Qualified specialist workshop ................. 25
R
Radar sensors .......................................... 168

Radiator shutters
see AIRPANEL (Care)
Radio
Activating ............................................
Activating/deactivating radio text .......
Calling up the channel list ...................
Deleting stations .................................
Direct frequency entry .........................
Displaying information .........................
Displaying radio text ............................
Editing station presets .........................
Menu (on-board computer) ..................
Moving stations ...................................
Overview .............................................
Searching for stations .........................
Setting a station ..................................
Setting the waveband ..........................
Storing radio stations ..........................
Switching HD Radio on/off .................
Tagging music tracks ...........................
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) .....................................................
Radio stations
Selecting (on-board computer) ............

322
325
324
324
324
325
325
324
224
324
323
324
324
324
324
324
325
236
224

Rain closing function
Sliding sunroof ...................................... 78
Range
Displaying ............................................ 221
Reading lamp
see Interior lighting
Real wood (Care) ..................................... 344
Rear climate control
Setting ................................................. 140
Rear door (child safety lock) .................... 54
Rear fog light ........................................... 125
Rear seat
see Seat
Rear view camera .................................... 195
Assigning as a favorite (360° Cam‐
era) ...................................................... 200
Care .................................................... 342
Function .............................................. 195
Opening the camera cover (360°
Camera) .............................................. 200
Rear window
Replacing the wiper blade ................... 132

Index 495
Rear window heater ................................ 138
Rear window wiper
Activating/deactivating ....................... 130
Rear-view mirror
see Outside mirrors
Refrigerant (air conditioning system)
Notes .................................................. 405
Refueling
Refueling the vehicle ........................... 157
Remote Online
Cooling or heating the vehicle inte‐
rior ....................................................... 147
Starting the vehicle .............................. 147
Reporting malfunctions relevant to
safety .......................................................... 25
Rescue card ............................................... 26
Reserve
Fuel ..................................................... 402
Reset function (multimedia system) ...... 261
Residual heat ........................................... 141
Restoring (factory settings)
see Reset function (multimedia system)

Restraint system ....................................... 31
Children ................................................. 46
Function in an accident ......................... 32
Functionality .......................................... 32
Malfunction ........................................... 32
Protection .............................................. 31
Reduced protection ............................... 31
System self-test ..................................... 32
Warning lamp ........................................ 32
Reverse gear
Selecting ............................................. 154
Rims (Care) .............................................. 342
Roadside Assistance ................................. 21
Roadside Assistance call
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA) ........... 302
Roll away protection
see HOLD function
Roller sunblind
Side windows ........................................ 72
Roller sunblind
see Cover
Roof lining (care) ..................................... 344
Roof load .................................................. 407

Roof rack .................................................. 114
Route ................................................ 269, 271
Calculating .......................................... 269
Displaying destination information ...... 270
External ............................................... 277
Selecting a type .................................. 269
Selecting an alternative route .............. 271
Selecting notifications ......................... 270
Selecting options ................................. 270
Starting the automatic service sta‐
tion search ........................................... 271
Switching the automatic gas station
search on/off ...................................... 271
With intermediate destinations ............ 267
Route guidance ........................................ 272
Canceling ............................................ 275
Changing direction .............................. 272
Continuing ........................................... 275
Destination reached ............................ 273
From an off-road location .................... 275
Lane recommendations ....................... 273
Notes ................................................... 272
Off-road ............................................... 276
To an off-road destination .................... 275

496 Index
Run-flat characteristics
MOExtended tires ................................ 347
S
Safety net
Attaching .............................................
Safety systems
see Driving safety system
Safety vest ...............................................
Satellite map ...........................................
Satellite radio
Activating/deactivating Tune Start ......
Adding a channel to Smart Favorites ...
Deleting a channel ...............................
Displaying EPG information .................
Displaying service information ............
Information ..........................................
Information on smart favorites and
Tune Start ............................................
Logging in ............................................
Moving a channel ................................
Music and sport alerts function ..........
Overview .............................................
Pause and playback function ...............

109
346
285
329
329
328
328
330
325
329
325
328
328
327
329

Restrictions ......................................... 325
Selecting a category ............................ 328
Selecting a channel ............................. 328
Setting music and sport alerts ............ 328
Setting the parental control ................. 328
Storing a channel ................................ 328
Switching on ....................................... 326
SD card
Inserting/removing .............................. 312
Seat .................................................... 84, 103
4-way lumbar support ........................... 88
Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 87
Adjusting (manually and electrically) ..... 84
Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ....................... 86
Adjusting the seat backrest angle
(rear passenger compartment) ............ 106
Backrest (rear) folding forward ............ 103
Correct driver's seat position ................ 83
Folding back the backrest (rear
passenger compartment) .................... 105
Locking the backrest (rear passenger
compartment) ..................................... 106
Massage program overview ................... 91
Resetting the settings ............................ 92
Selecting a massage program ................ 91

Setting automatic lateral support
adjustment ............................................ 91
Setting options ...................................... 14
Using the memory function ................. 100
Seat
see Folding bench seat
see Head restraint
Seat adjustment
Configuring ............................................ 91
Seat belt
Releasing ............................................... 37
Seat belt adjustment
Activating/deactivating ......................... 37
Function ................................................ 36
Seat belt warning
see Seat belts
Seat belts ............................................. 33, 37
Activating/deactivating seat belt
adjustment ............................................ 37
Adjusting the height .............................. 36
Care .................................................... 344
Fastening ............................................... 36
Protection .............................................. 33
Reduced protection ............................... 34

Index 497
Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 36
Warning lamp ........................................ 37
Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 344
Seat heating
Activating/deactivating ......................... 92
Seat ventilation
Switching on/off ................................... 93
Selecting a gear
see Shifting gears
Selecting a POI
see Destination entry
Selector lever
see DIRECT SELECT lever
Sensors (Care) ......................................... 342
Service center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Service interval display
see ASSYST PLUS
Setting a speed
see Cruise control
Setting summer time .............................. 251
Setting the date format .......................... 252

Setting the distance unit ........................ 256
Setting the map scale
see Map
Shifting gears .......................................... 155
Gearshift recommendation .................. 156
Manual ................................................ 155
Short messages
see Text messages
Side impact air bag ................................... 38
Side impact protection ........................... 193
Side windows ............................................. 72
Child safety lock in the rear
passenger compartment ....................... 55
Closing .................................................. 72
Closing using the SmartKey ................... 74
Convenience closing feature .................. 74
Convenience opening ............................ 74
Opening ................................................. 72
Opening with the SmartKey ................... 74
Problem ................................................. 75
Roller sunblind ....................................... 72
Size designation (tires) ........................... 381

Sliding sunroof ........................................... 76
Automatic features ................................ 78
Closing ................................................... 76
Closing using the SmartKey ................... 74
Opening ................................................. 76
Opening with the SmartKey ................... 74
Problem ................................................. 79
Rain closing function ............................. 78
SmartKey ................................................... 57
Battery .................................................. 59
Energy consumption .............................. 58
Features ................................................ 57
Key ring attachment .............................. 59
Mechanical key ...................................... 59
Overview ............................................... 57
Panic alarm ........................................... 58
Problem ................................................. 60
Unlocking setting .................................. 58
Smartphone
see Android Auto
see Apple CarPlay™
see Telephone
Snow chains ............................................. 367

498 Index
Socket (12 V) ............................................ 118
Cargo compartment ............................ 120
Front center console ............................ 118
Front passenger footwell ...................... 118
Rear passenger compartment .............. 118
Socket (115 V) .......................................... 119
Rear passenger compartment .............. 119
Software update
Important system updates .................. 260
Information .......................................... 259
Performing .......................................... 260
Sound
PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 45
Wheels and tires .................................. 366
Sound
see Burmester® surround sound system
see Sound settings
Sound settings ........................................ 330
Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 330
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ............................................... 330
Automatic volume adjustment ............. 330
Calls up the sound menu ..................... 330
Information .......................................... 330

Speech dialog system
see Voice Control System
Speed index (tires) ..................................
Speedometer
Digital ..................................................
Standby mode
Activating/deactivating .......................
Function ...............................................
Standing lights .........................................
Start/Stop button
Starting the vehicle .............................
Switching off the vehicle .....................
Switching on the power supply or
ignition ................................................
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting the engine
see Vehicle
Starting-off aid
see Hill start assist
Station
Deleting ...............................................
Direct frequency entry .........................

381
221
168
167
124
146
159
145

324
324

Moving ................................................. 324
Searching ............................................ 324
Setting ................................................. 324
Storing ................................................. 324
Station presets
Editing ................................................. 324
STEER CONTROL
Function/notes ................................... 170
Steering wheel ......................................... 217
Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 98
Adjusting (manually) .............................. 97
Buttons ................................................ 217
Steering wheel heater ........................... 98
Using the memory function ................. 100
Steering wheel heater
Switching on/off ................................... 98
Steering wheel paddle shifters .............. 155
Stowage areas
see Laden
see Stowage compartment
Stowage compartment ........................... 102
Armrest ............................................... 102
Center console .................................... 102

Index 499
Door ....................................................
Eyeglasses compartment ....................
Glove box .............................................
Rear armrest .......................................
Stowage compartments
see Laden
see Stowage compartment
Stowage space underneath the cargo
compartment floor ..................................
Sulfur content ..........................................
Sun visor
Operating ............................................
Surround View
see 360° Camera
Suspension
Adjusting the chassis level (AIR
BODY CONTROL) .................................
Damping characteristics ......................
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL ..................
Suspension
see AIR BODY CONTROL
Switch-off delay time
Exterior ................................................

102
103
102
103

114
401
136

190
186
186

128

Interior ................................................. 129
Switching the surround sound on/off
Burmester® surround sound system .... 331
Synchronization function
Activating/deactivating (control
panel) .................................................. 140
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ................................................ 141
System self-test
Automatic front passenger front air
bag shutoff ............................................ 42
System settings
Language ............................................. 256
Notes on language selection ............... 256
Reset function (multimedia system) ..... 261
Setting the distance unit ..................... 256
Software update .................................. 260
System settings
see Multimedia system
T
Tailgate ....................................................... 65
Closing .................................................. 67
Emergency release from the inside ........ 71

HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 69
Limiting the opening angle .................... 70
Opening ................................................. 65
Opening dimensions ............................ 406
Unlocking (mechanical key) ................... 71
Tailgate
see Locking/unlocking
Tank capacity
Fuel ..................................................... 402
Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 402
Technical data
Information .......................................... 396
Tire pressure monitoring system ......... 373
Vehicle identification plate .................. 398
Telephone ........................................ 225, 286
Activating functions during a call ........ 290
Call and ringtone volume ..................... 290
Calls with several participants ............. 291
Connecting a mobile phone (Near
Field Communication (NFC)) ............... 289
Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐
key) ..................................................... 288
Connecting a mobile phone (Secure
Simple Pairing) .................................... 288

500 Index
Disconnecting a mobile phone ............
Importing contacts ..............................
Incoming call during an existing call ....
Information ..........................................
Menu (on-board computer) ..................
Mobile phone voice recognition ..........
Notes ...................................................
Operating modes .................................
Reception and transmission volume ....
Switching mobile phones ....................
Switching mobile phones (Near Field
Communication (NFC)) ........................
Telephone menu overview ...................
Telephone operation ............................
Using Near Field Communication
(NFC) ...................................................
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) .....................................................
Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........
Telephone number
Dialing (on-board computer) ................
Telephony operating modes
Bluetooth® Telephony ..........................
Temperature ............................................

289
292
291
287
225
290
287
287
290
288
289
286
290
289
235
122
225
287
138

Temperature grade ..................................
Text messages .........................................
calling a message sender ....................
Changing folders .................................
Composing ..........................................
Configuring the displayed text mes‐
sages ...................................................
Deleting ...............................................
Drafts ..................................................
Notes ...................................................
Options ................................................
Outbox ................................................
Read-aloud function ............................
Reading ...............................................
Replying ..............................................
Sending ...............................................
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) .....................................................
Through-loading feature
see Seat
Tie-down eyes ..........................................
Time
Manual time setting .............................
Setting summer time ...........................

378
294
295
296
295
294
296
296
294
296
296
295
295
295
295
239
110
252
251

Setting the time and date automati‐
cally .....................................................
Setting the time zone ...........................
Setting the time/date format ..............
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ............
Tire and Loading Information placard ...
Tire characteristics .................................
Tire inflation compressor
see TIREFIT kit
Tire information table .............................
Tire labeling .............................................
Characteristics ....................................
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
.............................................................
Load index ...........................................
Load-bearing capacity .........................
Maximum tire load ..............................
Maximum tire pressure .......................
Overview .............................................
Speed rating ........................................
Temperature grade ..............................
Tire Quality Grading .............................
Tire size designation ............................
Traction grade .....................................

251
251
252
379
373
381

373
378
381
379
381
381
380
380
378
381
378
378
381
378

Index 501
Tread wear grade .................................
Tire load (maximum) ...............................
Tire pressure ............................................
Checking (manually) ............................
Checking (tire pressure monitoring
system) ................................................
Maximum ............................................
Notes ..................................................
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ...........................................
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) .............................................
Tire pressure table ..............................
TIREFIT kit ...........................................
Tire pressure monitoring system
Checking the tire pressures .................
Checking the tire temperature .............
Function ...............................................
Restarting ............................................
Technical data .....................................
Tire pressure table ..................................
Tire Quality Grading ................................

378
380
370
370
372
380
368
373
371
369
348
372
372
371
373
373
369
378

Tire temperature
Checking (tire pressure monitoring
system) ................................................
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) .............................................
Tire tread .................................................
Tire-change tool kit
Overview .............................................
TIREFIT kit ................................................
Storage location ..................................
Using ...................................................
Tires
Changing hub caps ..............................
Characteristics ....................................
Checking .............................................
Checking the tire pressure (man‐
ually) ....................................................
Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐
sure monitoring system) ......................
Definitions ...........................................
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
.............................................................
Flat tire ................................................
Installing ..............................................

372
371
366
389
348
348
348
390
381
366
370
372
383
379
346
393

Load index ........................................... 381
Load-bearing capacity ......................... 381
Maximum tire load .............................. 380
Maximum tire pressure ....................... 380
MOExtended tires ................................ 347
Noise ................................................... 366
Notes on installing .............................. 386
Overview of tire labeling ...................... 378
Removing ............................................ 393
Replacing .................................... 386, 390
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ........................................... 373
Selection ............................................. 386
Snow chains ........................................ 367
Speed rating ........................................ 381
Storing ................................................ 389
Temperature grade .............................. 378
Tire and Loading Information placard .. 373
Tire pressure (Notes) ........................... 368
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 371
Tire pressure table .............................. 369
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 378
Tire size designation ............................ 381
TIREFIT kit ........................................... 348
Traction grade ..................................... 378

502 Index
Tread wear grade ................................. 378
Unusual handling characteristics ........ 366
Tool
see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether ................................................... 51
Total distance .......................................... 221
Displaying ............................................ 221
Touch Control
On-board computer .............................. 217
Operating ............................................ 243
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 243
Touchpad
Activating/deactivating ....................... 244
Activating/deactivating haptic oper‐
ation feedback ..................................... 245
Operating ............................................ 244
Reading the handwriting recognition
aloud ................................................... 245
Selecting a station and track ............... 245
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 245
Tow-starting ............................................. 362
Towing a trailer
Active Blind Spot Assist ....................... 210

Active Lane Keeping Assist ..................
Towing away ............................................
Towing eye
Installing ..............................................
Storage location ...................................
Towing methods ......................................
Track
Selecting (audio mode) ........................
Traction grade ..........................................
Traffic information ..................................
Displaying the traffic map ....................
Displaying traffic incidents ..................
Issuing hazard alerts ...........................
Live Traffic Information ........................
Overview .............................................
Traffic map
see Map
Traffic Sign Assist ...................................
Function/notes ...................................
Setting .................................................
System limitations ...............................
Transferred vehicle data
Android Auto .......................................

212
358
362
361
357
314
378
278
278
279
280
278
278
208
208
209
208
300

Apple CarPlay™ ...................................
Transmission position display ................
Transporting
Vehicle ................................................
Tread wear grade .....................................
Trim element (Care) ................................
Trip
Menu (on-board computer) ..................
Trip computer
Displaying ............................................
Resetting .............................................
Trip distance ............................................
Displaying ............................................
Resetting .............................................
Trip odometer
see Trip distance
Trunk lid
see Tailgate
Turn signal indicator
see Turn signal light
Turn signal light .......................................
Activating/deactivating .......................

300
153
360
378
344
221
221
223
221
221
223

125
125

Index 503
Two-way radios
Frequencies ......................................... 397
Notes on installation ........................... 396
Transmission output (maximum) ......... 397
U
Units of measurement
Setting ................................................. 256
Unlocking setting ...................................... 58
USB devices
Connecting .......................................... 314
USB port ................................................... 120
User profile .............................................. 258
Creating .............................................. 258
Importing/exporting ........................... 258
Options ................................................ 259
Selecting ............................................. 258
Using the telephone
see Calls

V
Vehicle .............................................. 146, 147
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ................................................... 168
Correct use ........................................... 25
Data acquisition .................................... 26
Diagnostics connection ......................... 24
Equipment ............................................. 20
Limited Warranty ................................... 26
Locking (automatically) ......................... 64
Locking (emergency key) ....................... 64
Locking (from the inside) ....................... 62
Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 62
Lowering .............................................. 394
Maintenance .......................................... 21
Parking ................................................ 167
Problem notification .............................. 25
QR code rescue card ............................. 26
Qualified specialist workshop ................ 25
Raising ................................................. 391
Starting (emergency operation
mode) .................................................. 147
Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 147
Starting (start/stop button) ................. 146
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 159

Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 62
Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 62
Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 74
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 240
Vehicle data
Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ............ 153
Roof load ............................................. 407
Turning radius ...................................... 406
Vehicle height ...................................... 406
Vehicle length ...................................... 406
Vehicle width ....................................... 406
Wheelbase ........................................... 406
Vehicle data storage
COMAND/mbrace ................................. 28
Electronic control units ......................... 26
Event data recorders ............................. 29
Service providers .................................. 28
Vehicle dimensions ................................. 406
Vehicle electronics
Notes .................................................. 396
Two-way radios .................................... 396
Vehicle identification number
see VIN

504 Index
Vehicle identification plate
Paint code ........................................... 398
VIN ...................................................... 398
Vehicle identification plate
see Model series
Vehicle interior
Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 147
Vehicle key
see SmartKey
Vehicle maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle operation
Outside the USA or Canada ................... 21
Vehicle position
Transmitting ........................................ 252
Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 348
TIREFIT kit ........................................... 348
Towing eye ........................................... 361
Ventilating
Convenience opening ............................ 74
Ventilation
see Climate control

Vents
see Air vents
Video mode ..............................................
Activating .............................................
Activating/deactivating full-screen
mode ...................................................
Overview ..............................................
Settings ...............................................
VIN ............................................................
Identification plate ..............................
Seat .....................................................
Windshield ...........................................
Visibility
Defrosting the windows .......................
Windshield heater ................................
Voice command types (Voice Control
System) ....................................................
Voice Control System .............................
Application specific voice commands
.............................................................
Audible help functions .........................
Entering numbers ................................
Global voice commands ......................
Improving speech quality .....................

317
315
317
316
317
398
398
398
398
141
143
230
229
230
231
231
230
231

Language setting .................................
Media player voice commands ............
Message voice commands ..................
Multifunction steering wheel (operat‐
ing) ......................................................
Navigation voice commands ................
Operable functions ..............................
Operating safety ..................................
Radio voice commands .......................
Switch voice commands ......................
Telephone voice controls .....................
Text message voice commands ...........
Types of voice commands ...................
Vehicle voice commands .....................
Voice prompting ..................................

231
237
239
229
233
230
229
236
231
235
239
230
240
230

W
Warning lamp
see Warning/indicator lamps
Warning system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Warning/indicator lamp
!ABS warning lamp ....................... 457
$Brake warning lamp (USA) ........... 455

Index 505
JBrakes warning lamp (Canada) .... 455
?Coolant warning lamp ................. 467
·Distance warning lamp ................ 463
#Electrical malfunction warning
lamp .................................................... 465
;Engine diagnosis warning lamp ... 465
åESP® OFF warning lamp .............. 459
÷ESP® warning lamp flashes ......... 457
÷ESP® warning lamp lights up ....... 458
8Fuel reserve warning lamp .. 465, 466
ÐPower steering system warning
lamp .................................................... 464
!Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (Canada only) ... 460
FRed indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (USA only) ........ 460
6Restraint system warning lamp .... 461
7Seat belt warning lamp flashes ... 462
7Seat belt warning lamp lights
up ........................................................ 462

àSuspension warning lamp ...........
hTire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem warning lamp flashes ....................
hTire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem warning lamp lights up .................
!Yellow electric parking brake
indicator lamp is malfunctioning .........

463
470
469
460

Warning/indicator lamps ................... 8, 452
Instrument display (overview) .................. 8
Overview ............................................. 452
PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................ 42
Warranty .................................................... 26
Washer fluid
see Windshield washer fluid
Washing by hand (care) .......................... 340
Weather information ............................... 285
Web browser
Calling up a web page ......................... 307
Calling up options ............................... 308
Calling up the settings ......................... 308
Deleting a bookmark ........................... 308
Deleting browser data ......................... 308

Ending .................................................
Managing bookmarks ..........................
Overview .............................................
Showing/hiding the menu ...................
Website
Calling up ............................................
Showing/hiding the web browser
menu ...................................................
Wheel chock
see Chock
Wheel rotation .........................................
Wheels
Care ....................................................
Changing hub caps ..............................
Checking .............................................
Checking the tire pressure (man‐
ually) ....................................................
Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐
sure monitoring system) ......................
Definitions ...........................................
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
.............................................................
Fitting ..................................................
Flat tire ................................................

308
308
307
307
307
307
388
342
390
366
370
372
383
379
393
346

506 Index
Load index ........................................... 381
Load-bearing capacity ......................... 381
Maximum tire load .............................. 380
Maximum tire pressure ....................... 380
MOExtended tires ................................ 347
Noise ................................................... 366
Notes on installing .............................. 386
Overview of tire labeling ...................... 378
Removing ............................................ 393
Replacing .................................... 386, 390
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ........................................... 373
Rotating ............................................... 388
Selection ............................................. 386
Snow chains ........................................ 367
Speed rating ........................................ 381
Storing ................................................ 389
Temperature grade .............................. 378
Tire and Loading Information placard .. 373
Tire characteristics .............................. 381
Tire pressure (Notes) ........................... 368
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 371
Tire pressure table .............................. 369
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 378
Tire size designation ............................ 381

TIREFIT kit ...........................................
Traction grade .....................................
Tread wear grade .................................
Unusual handling characteristics ........
Wi-Fi
Overview .............................................
Setting .................................................
Setting up a hotspot ............................
Setting up an Internet connection .......
Window curtain air bag ............................
Window lifter
see Side windows
Windows
see Side windows
Windows (Care) .......................................
Windshield
Defrosting ............................................
Infrared reflective ................................
Replacing the wiper blades ..................
Windshield heater ...................................
Windshield heating
see Windshield heater

348
378
378
366
253
253
254
303
38

342
138
137
131
143

Windshield washer fluid ......................... 404
Notes .................................................. 404
Windshield washer system
Refilling ............................................... 338
Windshield wipers
Replacing the wiper blades .................. 131
Switching on/off ................................. 130
Winter operation
Snow chains ........................................ 367
Wiper blades
Care .................................................... 342
Replacing ............................................. 131
Wireless charging
Function/notes .................................... 121
Mobile phone ....................................... 122
Wireless vehicle components
Declaration of conformity ...................... 23
Workout program
Overview ................................................ 91
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Modify Date                     : 2017:09:08 13:12:01-04:00
Create Date                     : 2017:09:08 13:10:24-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2017:09:08 13:12:01-04:00
Creator Tool                    : AH XSL Formatter V6.2 MR4 for Windows (x64) : 6.2.6.18551 (2014/09/24 15:00JST)
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Owner: y.io.creator
Document ID                     : uuid:409d02e6-b1d5-4b1e-8a64-6758b18ac62c
Instance ID                     : uuid:87029bd8-9a63-4b75-95a2-9ddaef9ed269
Producer                        : OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S)
Page Count                      : 510
Author                          : Owner: y.io.creator
Keywords                        : Stylesheet-Version, 3.11.0.6, (SAXON, 9.1.0.8, from, Saxonica)
One Vision Creator              : Speedflow Check Version 11.5 (SR 4)
One Vision Dongle ID            : _9DmSJQI6Za8Q6
One Vision Producer             : OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S)
Title                           : 
Trapped                         : False

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

MY18 E 63 Wagon Operators Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation